
>Qr G ® ** ® 







■bV 


C^ *.,i» aO ^ 

•0-. ^ «0^ 





^ V *..0’ 

a;" ^ v •!,*•' «i. 

•- V A^ ‘rC^vVA*” "^^iv •i'^'' 

. %. J’ 

^1T» A ''o . * >* *0^ A 

i C^ ^ *■> 1*^ 


*’’ -4:^ '^rf •’ 




> V 





“ ’^o ^ " 


\0 ttV 

w a'’ O ^ '-* 

* ^ \0 "* 





• * < o 






'b ‘-tt;-’ ^ 0^ 'V'*- 

’•»> o^ .<y ,»M'* ■> 




<* ^ ♦ 


*' A^'"V » 



••** <>. 'O, ^ 

-A> ^ dpn //yC^ ♦ /i ^ 


'•“-. % J>\- 

^ A'' ♦:( '*^t\ ^ ♦< 

♦ ^ O 




.V « N a . 




■ r 

AT • ‘ " * 

'. ■'o ♦W^*, 


\ 

• }P « 

r\ 

A*^ •j.:i^'» ^ v^ 

> • r\ 



xy • ^ * • ,* 

'. ■'^ *'-^dr^ 

^ V - H V*^ rJ> 



* -■?•'’ ^o. ‘*T:",T‘- .o'. 



A o. * 

V o * 

o w 0 ' ^ 

.Vw^/Ao . 


A“ 

” *>VL'« O- 






^ ^ « 
• <L^ O 

••.o’ 

V ^ 1 c 

. AV 9. NX />, O 

v-v^ • 






0 N o ^ • *• ' ® <• ^Qr 6 ® " ® -» ^ a!^ 



v> 0 ^_ <"^ 




qO 

0^ sL!nL% "> V » 

' V'<^ • 


. ...‘ . 0 ^ %,*-‘"^'\^ <*,'■’•* A' 

V 1 0 ^ rr 0" o M ^o av « *• ' * o ''^ Or 

’ ''■9 0 ^ ^ C 






aV -y*o- ^ .<y '*y \> .<• 0 ^ V 





I 







f 














V / 



'.♦•■•< /.'•'L 






V V' ’ 








. i: ;• 








>rT 


}?.f 


w*. 


>v 


X, 



, ' 


w>* ^ 




^ •ft 


*''' V‘ 




r <-. 




•♦ . 






jiT', »iW 

^ A * 




• * 


■ - 

. y . . * 4 .^ 





•'N» ' 


Ml I iyiWM 


’ ' N 


i,»iV‘'< ■* ♦*■'.• « f J» 




-J. 




. . .. ... 

^V4k‘'^- 'i •' ' • I ' ' ''*.• ■‘. -*- 


1 * 1 • 

■f X ‘ 

.‘A* . . I . 

•' » ' ‘ ■>*',.' r 

., ' . •hi 



. ' 0 ' ' 

'.* el 





■ / 





? 


\ , 


5^’*% ••' • ".‘r '.ih-1tk^ 



• .t 


« ■ * • * r . 





:":..-.'Hi 




1*. •- 


' r. 


\%M 






J ** n * ■ . 


f. 


M j . 






% 


EDWARD STRATEMEYER'S BOOKS 
©111 (glorg Setteg 

Cloth. Illustrated. Price j>er volume $1.25. 

UNDER DEWEY AT MANILA. UNDER OTIS IN THE PHIUPPINE& 

A YOUNG VOLUNTEER IN CUBA. THE CAMPAIGN OF THE JUNGLE. 

FIGHTING IN CUBAN WATERS. UNDER MacARTHUR IN LUZON. 

^0ll3ier0 of iFortune iSeries 

Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25. 

ON TO PEKIN AT THE FALL OF PORT ARTHUR. 

UNDER THE MIKADO’S FLAG. WITH TOGO FOR JAPAN. 

Colonial Merles 

Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25. 

WITH WASHINGTON IN THE WEST. ON THE TRAIL OF PONTIAC. 
MARCHING ON NIAGARA. THE FORT IN THE WILDERNESS. 

AT THE FALL OF MONTREAL. TRAIL AND TRADING POST. 

lIKeilcan OTar Series 

Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25. 

FOR THE LIBERTY OF TEXAS. WITH TAYLOR ON THE RIO GRANDE. 
UNDER SCOTT IN MEXICO. 

Pan-American Series 

Cloth. Illustrated, Price per volu 7 ne $1.25. 

LOST ON THE ORINOCO. YOUNG EXPLORERS OF THE AMAZON. 

THE YOUNG VOLCANO EXPLORERS. TREASURE SEEKERS OF THE ANDES. 
YOUNG EXPLORERS OF THE ISTHMUS. CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS. 

HBalie Porter Series 

Cloth. Illustrated, Price per volume $1.25. 

DAVE PORTER AT OAK HALL. DAVE PORTER IN THE FAR NORTH. 

DAVE PORTER IN THE SOUTH SEAS. DAVE PORTER AND HIS CLASSMATES. 
DAVE PORTER’S RETURN TO SCHOOL. DAVE PORTER AT STAR RANCH. 

DAVE PORTER AND HIS RIVALS. 

ILakeport Series 

Cloth. Illustrated. Price per voluttte $1.25. 

THE GUN CLUB BOYS OF LAKEPORT, THE BOAT CLUB BOYS OF LAKEPORT. 
■^HE BASEBALL BOYS OF LAKEPORT. THE FOOT BALL BOYS OF LAKEPORT. 
THE AUTOMOBILE BOYS OF LAKEPORT. 

American ISogs’ Biographical Series 

Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25. 

AMERICAN BOYS’ LIFE OF WILLIAM McKINLEY. 

AMERICAN BOYS’ LIFE OF THEODORE ROOSEVELT. 

Stratemeper Popular Series 

Fifteen Volumes. Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume 


DEFENDING HIS FLAG. Price%\.yi, 



Swiftly the pampas fike was creeping toward the party 

Page. 305. 






I 


Copyright, 191 x, by Lothrop, Lee & Shepard Co 


AU Rights Reserved 


Chased Across the Pampas 


jr 



f^orwoeb .l^rcff 
BERwicr Smith Co. 
Norwo<vd(,‘MMS. 
U.S. A. 


©CI.A285G88 



pan-Hmerican Scdce 


CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPA; 

/ 



AMERICAN BOYS IN AEGINTINA AND HOMEWARD BOUND 


EDWARD STRATEMEYER 

I) 

Author of “Lost on the Orinoco,” “Old Glory Series,” “Dave Porter Series 
“Lakeport Series,” “Colonial Series,” etc. 


' i 

ILLUSTRATED BY JOHN GOSS ; 


LOTHROP, 



PREFACE 


Chased Across the Pampas ” is a complete 
story in itself, but forms the sixth and final volume 
of a line issued under the general title of ‘‘ Pan- 
American Series.’' 

As mentioned before, my object in writing this 
series has been to acquaint our boys with the sights 
to be seen in the three Americas — especially such 
portions as lie outside of the United States. In 
the first volume, called “ Lost on the Orinoco,” the 
five young explorers, with their tutor, who was 
something of a hunter, visited Venezuela; in the 
next volume, entitled The Young Volcano Ex- 
plorers,” the scene was shifted to Cuba, Porto Rico, 
and the ill-fated islands of Martinique and St. Vin- 
cent; then in “ The Young Explorers of the Isth- 
mus,” the sightseers journeyed from one end of 
Central America to the other, and learned what 
had still to be done to bring the great Panama Canal 
to a finish. 

From Central America the young explorers went 
to Brazil, as related in the next book, called ‘‘ The 
iii 


IV 


PREFACE 


Young Explorers of the Amazon.” They had 
numerous adventures on and near this largest river 
of the world, and then journeyed into Peru, as re- 
lated in the fifth volume of the series, entitled 
Treasure Seekers of the Andes.” They found a 
treasure, although not exactly in the manner an- 
ticipated, and then journeyed to Cuzco, the ancient 
capital of Peru, and to Lake Titicaca, where we last 
left them. 

In the present volume the boys and their tutor 
travel through Bolivia and then down the coast of 
Chili, and later on across the mountains to the im- 
mense pampas, or prairies, of Argentina. Here 
they are followed by their enemies, who incite some 
gauchos to make the young explorers prisoners, 
stating that their families are rich and will pay well 
to have them liberated. What this led to, and how 
the lads finally reached Buenos Aires and set sail 
for home, I leave the pages which follow to tell. 

In bringing this series to a close I wish to thank 
my many readers for all the nice things they have 
said about my previous books. I trust the present 
volume will be found equally entertaining, and will 
prove instructive. 

Edward Stratemeyer. 

June I, 1911. 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER 

I. Caught in a Snowstorm 



PAGE 

I 

II. 

How Two Boys Disappeared 



12 

III. 

The Descent into the Canyon 



23 

IV. 

From One Peril to Another 



34 

V. 

The Mountain Lion 



45 

VI. 

At the La Paz Market Place 



56 

VII. 

Looking for Roberto Olano 



67 

VIII. 

Down the Coast of Chili 



78 

IX. 

In the Hands of a Sharper 



89 

X. 

A Crash in the Storm 



lOO 

XI. 

A Discovery in Valparaiso . 



III 

XII. 

Was It a Plot? .... 



123 

XIII. 

Something About a Wonderful Railroad 


134 

XIV. 

The Disappearance of Professor Strong 


145 

XV. 

A Thrilling Rescue 



156 

XVI. 

Sightseeing in Santiago de Chili 



167 

XVII. 

Hockley the Brave 



178 

XVIII. 

After the Earthquake 



189 

XIX. 

Farewell to the Andes 



200 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER PAGE 

XX. On the Pampas 21 1 

XXI. In the Hands of the Enemy . . . 222 

XXII. The Bandits of the Pampas . . . 233 

XXIII. A Midnight Adventure .... 244 
XXIV. Chased Across the Pampas .... 254 

XXV. Pursued and Pursuers 265 

XXVI. The Cattle Stampede 276 

XXVII. Lost on the Pampas 287 

XXVIII. Escaping the Pampas Fire .... 299 

XXIX. On to Rosario 310 

XXX. At Buenos Aires — Homeward Bound . . 321 


ILLUSTEATIONS 


Swiftly the pampas fire was creeping toward 
the party (Page 305) ‘ . . . Frontispiece 

PACING PAGB 

Boys and men found themselves sliding 
downward 32 

<<Get away, you beast!’’ he roared .... 60 

Each lad was hurled from his berth to the 
floor 106 

Hockley had run full tilt into this vendor . 136 

The sight caused Prank and Mark to stare in 


wonder 162 

Again the condor circled closer 202 

It was not until morning that Cellaboni was 
able to tell his story 312 





•I 





I 



* 

} 


t 

* • • 



♦ 




i 



t, K' 



CHASED ACROSS THE 
PAMPAS 

CHAPTER I 

CAUGHT IN A SNOWSTORM 

“ Say, this is fierce ! ” 

Fierce? I should say it was, Mark! Why, it 
seems to be snowing at the rate of a mile a min- 
ute! obseiwed Frank Newton. 

“ And it was as clear as a bell when we started 
out this morning,” grumbled a third youth of the 
party. “ Whoever would have thought of catch- 
ing a downfall like this in the Andes ? ” 

‘‘If we don’t look out we’ll lose our way,” 
growled a tall, lank youth. “ It was foolishness to 
start on such a trip, anyhow.” 

“ Well, Jake, you didn’t have to come,” answered 
the boy named Mark. 

“ Huh ! Do you suppose I wanted to stay all 
alone in that miserable little Bolivian village, with 


2 


CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 


nobody but those villainous-looking natives 
around?” growled Jacob Hockley. ‘‘Not much! 
I’d be afraid of being robbed.” 

“ Oh, the natives are honest enough in these 
parts — Professor Strong said so,” said another of 
the boys. “ But never mind all that now. The 
question is whether to go forward or turn back.” 
And Darry Crane looked anxiously at his com- 
panions. “ We are at least ten miles from that vil- 
lage — maybe fifteen,” he added. 

“ I guess we had better halt and wait for the 
professor,” said Sam Winthrop. 

“Yes, but. Beans, perhaps he won’t be able to 
reach us, with the snow coming down so thickly. 
Just look back. The trail is completely blotted 
out!” And Frank Newton turned the burro he 
was riding, so that he might get a better view of 
the trail the party had been pursuing. 

“ Phew ! listen to the wind coming up, boys ! ” 
gasped Darry Crane, a moment later. “ Puts me 
in mind of one of our Western blizzards! If I 
know anything about it, the best thing we can do 
is to hike for shelter.” 

“ It’s easy enough to say that, but where are you 
going to find shelter in such a lonely spot as this ? ” 


CAUGHT IN A SNOWSTORM 3 

came in disgust from Jake Hockley. ‘‘ Til wager 
there isn't even a hut within a mile." 

** We had better turn back — ^ajid try to meet the 
professor, if he is coming," said Mark Robertson. 
“ It would be foolhardy to try to go on in such a 
storm as this." 

‘‘And it is going to be worse — ^much worse," 
cried Darry Crane, and now his voice liad a trace 
of genuine anxiety in it. 

“ How do you know that, Darry ? " questioned 
one of the others. 

“ Because this burro I'm riding is beginning to 
tremble. He wouldn't do that unless he felt some- 
thing coming. Horses always know when danger 
is at hand." 

“Yes, you're right, and my animal is trembling, 
too," added Sam Winthrop. “ Come on, let us turn 
back, before it is too late." 

All of the five boys were mounted on Bolivian 
burros, small but strong animals, well trained to 
mountain-trail climbing. Now they turned the 
steeds around, to go back the way they had come. 

It was snowing thickly, the big flakes completely 
blotting out the landscape around them. Ahead 
and to one side was the steep mountain, behind and 


4 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

on the other side the valley wherein nestled the city 
of La Paz, and the village from which they had 
taken their departure less than three hours before. 

As the young burro riders turned to go down 
the mountain trail, a wild gust of wind struck them 
in the face, almost taking their breath away. Then, 
from a distance, came a strange roaring, gradually 
growing louder and louder. 

“What’s that?” asked Jake Hockley, his face 
blanching. 

“ It sounds to me like a tornado,” answered 
Darry Crane. “ And if it’s anything like the one I 
went through once in Montana, we’d better stand 
from under, and right away, too!” 

“But where can we go?” asked two of the 
others, in concert. 

“ I noticed an overhanging cliff a distance back,” 
said Mark Robertson. “Maybe we can get under 
that until the worst of the storm is over.” 

“ If it doesn’t last so long that we are snowed 
in I ” whined the tall, lank youth. 

“Oh, dummy, don’t be so gloomy!” burst out 
Sam Winthrop. “ I don’t believe we’ll be snowed 
in to-day.” 

“Huh! You don’t know anything about it!” 


CAUGHT IN A SNOWSTORM 5 

was the growled-out reply. “It's snowing harder 
than ever TV 

“ Back to the cliff ! ” shouted Mark Robertson, 
and it was now difficult to make himself heard. 
“ Don't waste any time ! Follow me ! " And he 
slapped his burro on the flank, to urge the steed to 
greater speed. 

“ I hope we run across the professor,” said Frank 
Newton. “ I am sorry now we didn’t wait for 
him in the first place. If he was along he'd know 
what was best to do. He has had all kinds of ex- 
perience as a traveler.” 

“ Don’t talk, but come on! ” urged Darry Crane. 
“This blizzard — or -whatever it is — is working up 
to something big, and the sooner we get to shelter 
the better.” 

Scarcely had he uttered the words when the 
roaring of the wind increased, and a blast swept by 
that almost took boys and burros off the trail. The 
youthful riders clung close to their steeds' necks, 
and the animals themselves bent low in an en- 
deavor to escape the fury of the elements. 

“I'm afraid we ca-ca-can't ma-make it!” 
gasped Sam Winthrop. 

“ We’ve got to make it ! ” urged Mark Robert- 


6 


CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 


son. ‘‘ Come on, and keep close together. If we 
don't reach the shelter of the cliff the next rush of 
air may send us off the trail into the valley I ” 

And then all moved along the downward trail 
as well as the fury of the storm permitted — in an 
endeavor to find some shelter where they might be 
safe for the time being. 

To those who have read the former volumes in 
this ‘‘Pan-American Series” the boys who are 
having such a hard time of it in this South Amer- 
ican snowstorm will need no special introduction. 
For the benefit of those who may now meet them 
for the first time, let me state that Mark Robert- 
son was a New York boy, living, when at home, in 
fashionable quarters on Madison Avenue. Across 
the way dwelt Frank Newton, the son of a banker, 
and the two lads had been warm chums for years. 

Of the other boys in the party, Samuel Winthrop 
was from Boston — ^whence his nickname of 
“ Beans.” He was the only son of a rich widow 
who resided in the fashionable Back Bay district 
of the Hub. Usually Sam was a studious youth 
and much given to the collection of specimens, but 
he was often ready for a good time, and always 
willing to look on the bright side of things. 


CAUGHT IN A SNOWSTORM 7 

The lad with the curly hair and laughing eyes 
was Dartworth Crane, always called Darry for 
short. Darry was the offspring of a rich Chicago 
cattle dealer, and had spent some of his younger 
years on a ranch in the far West. He could ride 
well, and knew ‘‘ hossflesh ” thoroughly. 

These four boys had been close friends for years. 
They had gone through many adventures and not a 
few perils together, and the concern of one was in- 
variably the concern of all. 

The fifth lad of the party was the tall, thin youth, 
with a freckled face and coarse, reddish hair. This 
was Jacob Hockley, usually called Jake, and some- 
times dummy, or Jake the Glum, because of his 
habit of looking on the dark side of things. Jake 
was the son of a millionaire lumber dealer of Penn- 
sylvania, but his riches did not seem to improve his 
disposition, which, at times, was either sour or dic- 
tatorial. 

My new readers may wonder how these five boys 
came to be traveling in the heart of the Andes 
Mountains. The explanation is very simple. All 
had at one time attended a boarding-school pre- 
sided over by a Professor Amos Strong, who, in 
his younger years, had been a great hunter and 


8 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

traveler. A fire burned the institution of learn- 
ing to the ground, and while it was being rebuilt 
under the supervision of the professor’s brother, 
Amos Strong decided to carry out a long-cherished 
plan of visiting Central and South America and 
other places of interest, taking with him such pupils 
as could afford to go, and wished to do so. 

A party was quickly made up of Sam, Frank, 
Mark, and Darry, and then Professor Strong an- 
nounced that Jake Hockley wished to go also. This 
did not quite suit the four chums, but they had no 
real reason for complaining, and so decided to 
make the best of the situation. 

From New York the five boys and the professor 
set sail for Venezuela, and in the first volume of 
this series, entitled “ Lost on the Orinoco,” I gave 
the particulars of some adventures on and near 
that mighty river. While on the way, Jake Hock- 
ley struck up an acquaintance with a sharper from 
Baltimore named Dan Markel, and this unprincipled 
fellow caused the whole party considerable trouble. 

From Venezuela the young explorers turned 
back, to visit Cuba, Porto Rico, and other islands 
of the West Indies. This was just before the 
awful eruption of Mont Pelee, and in the second 


CAUGHT IN A SNOWSTORM 9 

volume, called “ The Young Volcano Explorers,” 
I related the details of that world-stirring event, 
with its harrowing loss of life. All the young 
tourists suffered somewhat from the calamity, and 
Jake Hockley was so badly scared that he ran away, 
boarding a steamer bound for Trinidad. 

Before turning southward once more, it was de- 
cided by Professor Strong and the boys to visit 
Central America, and see what was being done 
to build the great Panama Canal. In the volume 
entitled “ The Young Explorers of the Isthmus,” I 
related the details of that trip, and also told how 
Hockley became the open enemy of the others. 
This brought on a fight that had an unlooked-for 
ending — something that caused the bully to act 
more meekly for a long time after. 

From the Isthmus the young tourists set sail 
for Brazil, and in the volume called “ The Young 
Explorers of the Amazon,” I told how they visited 
Rio de Janeiro, Para, and other cities, and then 
sailed up the mighty Amazon, the father of all in- 
land watercourses. Here they again met their old 
enemy, Dan Markel, and thwarted his efforts 
to swindle another man in a rubber plantation 
deal. 


lO 


CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 


From Brazil the boys and their tutor j urneyed 
over the mountains into Peru, and in the next vol- 
ume of the series, called Treasure Seekers of the 
Andes,” I told how they visited Truxillo, Lima, and 
other points of interest, and how they went out in 
quest of game, and also went on a great treasure 
hunt. On this hunt some of the boys got lost, and 
the others had to organize a searching party to find 
them. The treasure they unearthed proved to be 
worth almost twenty thousand dollars, which, as 
Frank declared, “ was not so bad.” 

During the days in Peru the boys again met Dan 
Markel, and, as before, he tried to make trouble 
for them. One day he was caught by Jake Hock- 
ley, and the lank youth was so wrought up that he 
gave the swindler the thrashing of his life, and then 
made him a prisoner. It was found that Markel 
had some money, and Professor Strong gave him 
his choice of settling up for his past crookedness 
or taking his chances with the local police author- 
ities. Markel, after much pleading, agreed to 
settle up, and, after doing so, was allowed to go. 
Later the boys heard that Markel had taken a 
steamer bound for Valparaiso, Chili. 

Good ! I am glad he is gone ! ” declared Sam. 


CAUGHT IN A SNOWSTORM 


II 


“ I never want to see him again, or hear from 

himr 

“ Oh, he’s like a bad penny — abound to turn up,” 
answered Mark. And that very day Professor 
Strong received a highly-abusive letter from the 
sharper, stating that he would “ fix them all ” some 
day, and that they had better beware of him. 

From Lima the young tourists and Professor 
Strong journeyed to Cuzco, the ancient capital of 
Peru, and then moved on to Lake Titicaca. Here 
the whole crowd had more than a week of fine 
weather, and spent the days in boating, fishing, and 
swimming. Then they moved onward to La Paz, 
in Bolivia. They took up headquarters in the city, 
but two days later moved to the mountain village 
of Gobiago, their intention being to make a trip 
to one of the mountain tops, to get a view of the 
surrounding country. All started off together, but 
half-way up the mountain the burro the professor 
rode went lame, and he turned back to the village 
to get another steed. The boys kept on, until a 
sudden snowstorm overtook them, as already de- 
scribed. 


CHAPTER II 


HOW TWO BOYS DISAPPEARED 

‘‘ Wait ! Wait ! Don’t leave me behind ! ” 

The cry came from Jake Hockley. He had been 
bending low over his burro’s neck, to escape as 
much of the fury of the gale as possible, and now 
he straightened up, to discover that the other lads 
were well ahead of him. 

“ Come on — don’t lag ! ” shouted Mark. “ The 
storm is growing worse every minute.” 

“ The confounded beast won’t go any faster ! ” 
wailed the tall youth. “ I’ve done my best to make 
him go, but he’s too lazy.” 

You saw too much on the reins, Jake,” ex- 
plained Darry. “ You’ve got the burro so wor- 
ried he doesn’t know what he is doing. Just pat 
him a little on the neck and he’ll go all right. He’s 
just as anxious to get to shelter as you are — for 
he knows what these blizzards on the mountain 
trails mean.” 


12 


HOW TWO BOYS DISAPPEARED 1 3 

“ It seems to be letting up a bit,” broke in 
Frank. “ The wind is dying down. Maybe it will 
be safe to go on, after all.” 

‘‘ Don’t you believe it ! ” cried Sam. “ The wind 
will be roaring worse than ever in a few minutes. 
Me for the best shelter I can find ! ” And on he 
went on the return trail. 

‘‘ Those natives in the village warned us of a 
snowstorm,” said Mark. “ But I didn’t look for 
any such downfall as this.” 

Well, you must remember that we are at an 
altitude of nearly three miles,” came from Frank. 

Three miles ! ” cried Dar’ry. ‘‘ How do you 
know that ? ” 

I looked it up in the guidebook. Alto La Paz, 
where we got off the railroad train, is 13,000 feet 
above sea level. That’s about two miles and a half. 
Well, we have climbed another half-mile above that, 
I am sure.” 

More like a mile ! ” grumbled Hockley. ‘‘ Oh, 
but this is beastly ! ” he added. “ I’d give as much 
as ten dollars to be back in my comfortable room 
at the La Paz hotel.” 

Well, we can’t get back there just now,” an- 
swered Mark. ‘‘ We’ll be lucky if we get down to 


14 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

that village we started from. Here comes that 
wind again ! ” he shouted, as a distant roaring 
reached their ears. 

With the increase in the wind came a heavier fall 
of snow, and once again was the landscape blotted 
out on every side. The boys kept as close together 
as possible, Hockley following Barry’s directions 
about handling his mount. The Western youth 
kept at his side, giving him additional directions. 

Be careful now — we are coming to that sharp 
turn! ” shouted Mark a half-minute later. “ Don’t 
miss the trail, or you’ll go down into the canyon and 
be killed!” 

He had hardly spoken when an extra-heavy blast 
of wind struck the crowd. The burros shivered 
and turned partly around, and for the time being 
there was a mix-up of boys and steeds. 

“ Don’t crowd me ! ” yelled Hockley. Don’t 
do it, or I’ll go over the edge ! ” 

“ Be careful ! ” called out Mark, in keenest 
anxiety. 

The roaring of the elements now drowned out 
every other sound. The snow, as fine and as hard 
as salt, swirled in all directions, entering their ears 
and eyes, and almost blinding them. Hockley 


HOW TWO BOYS DISAPPEARED 1 5 

crowded close to Mark, and both made the danger- 
ous turn in safety. Just ahead was the tall cliff 
under which they hoped to find shelter, and each 
made a dash for it. 

The wall of the cliff arose to a height of nearly 
two hundred feet. At its base it was split in a 
number of places, and it was for the largest of these 
openings that Mark headed, with Hockley close 
beside him. The split was irregular in shape, but 
it was so high and wide that they rode into it with 
ease. 

“ Look out for holes ! ” shouted Mark, and it 
was well he said this, for the cavern-like opening 
had a number of holes in its flooring into which one 
might easily have fallen to unknown depths. 

Safe from the worst of the blizzard that was 
now raging outside, Mark and Hockley brought 
their steeds to a halt and did what they could to get 
back their breath. They were fifty feet from the 
trail proper, and the whirling snow cut off their 
view completely. 

Where are the others? ” questioned Mark, after 
nearly a minute had passed and nobody had ap- 
peared. 

I thought they were right behind us,” answered 


l6 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

the tall 3^outh. ‘‘ Say, you don’t suppose they 
slipped off the trail, do you?” he went on, in 
scared tones. 

“ I hope not, Jake. Maybe they can’t locate this 
place. Let us call to them.” 

Filling their lungs with air, both boys shouted 
loudly. But their efforts seemed puny compared 
with the roaring of the elements battling on the 
mountain pass. Then Mark dismounted, secured 
his burro to a rock, and walked out to the face of 
the cliff. 

Frank! Sam! Darry! Where are you?” he 
yelled several times. 

No answer came back, and now Mark was thor- 
oughly frightened. 

Perhaps the burros got tangled up when that 
heavy wind struck them, and all went over into the 
canyon together,” he reasoned. “If they did that 
some of the fellows may be killed ! Oh, if only this 
storm Would let up ! ” 

“ You are not going out there again, are you?” 
asked Hockley, coming after Mark. “ It won’t do 
any good — you’ll get lost yourself.” He did not 
wish to be left alone in the cavern. 

“ We’ve got to learn what has become of them. 


HOW TWO BOYS DISAPPEARED 1 7 

Jake! Just think of what may have happened if 
they went down into the canyon I It’s nothing but 
jagged rocks down there! ” 

“ Yes, but you can’t do a thing in this high 
wind. Wait here until the wind goes down, or un- 
til Professor Strong comes.” 

Mark did not wish to wait — he was burning with 
impatience to learn what had become of his three 
chums. But he realized that he could do absolutely 
nothing in that frightful wind, that sent the hard 
snow along until it cut like a knife. Even at the 
mouth of the cavern he could scarcely breathe, the 
fine white particles going up his nose like snuffed- 
up pepper. 

Several minutes passed — ^just then they seemed 
an age to Mark and Hockley — and then came a 
faint cry, borne in on the roaring wind. 

Did you hear that, Jake? ” 

‘‘ Yes, somebody called ! ” 

‘‘I think it was Darry! Yell for all you are 
worth ! ” 

The boys raised their voices, and kept it up until 
Mark caught sight of Darry on his burro, plowing 
through the snow. The Western youth was all but 
exhausted, and kept in his saddle with difficulty. 


1 8 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

“ Darry, where are the others?” shouted Mark, 
as he rushed forward and caught hold of the burro, 
to lead him into the cavern. 

Gone ! ” gasped the other lad, and then did his 
best to catch his breath. 

Did they go over into the canyon? ” 

“ Yes.” Darry tried to say more, but could 
not. He swayed in the saddle and would have 
fallen into the snow had not his chum caught 
him. 

Bring in the burro, Jake ! ” called out Mark, 
and while the lank youth did as bidden, Mark car- 
ried Darry into the cavern, to a spot where the fury 
of the elements could not reach them. The West- 
ern boy was so exhausted that it was several min- 
utes before he got back sufficient strength to tell his 
story. 

“ I — I don't know how it hap-happened ! ” he 
gasped out. “ I guess Sam’s burro was kicked by 
the one Jake was riding. Then they got in a mix- 
up, and the next thing I knew Sam and Frank and 
their burros were missing.” 

“ My burro didn’t kick anything ! ” growled 
Hockley. 

“ I think he did, Jake. But that wasn’t your 


HOW TWO BOYS DISAPPEARED 


19 

fault,” added the Western lad, hastily. “The 
blizzard made the animals wild — they couldn’t see 
any more than we could. When I couldn’t see 
Frank and Sam I yelled to them, but they didn’t 
answer. I knew you two had gone on ahead. I 
called to you to come back, but I suppose you didn’t 
hear me.” ^ 

“ Not a word,” answered Mark. “ And you 
didn’t see or hear anything of them, did you, 
Darry?” 

“No, I looked along the up-trail, thinking that 
possibly the blizzard had twisted ’em up, and then I 
rode my burro as close to the edge of the canyon 
as he would go. But I couldn’t see a thing, not 
even a hoof-mark. They had disappeared as com- 
pletely as if the earth had opened up and swallowed 
’em ! ” 

“ Maybe it did do that ! ” cried Hockley. “ They 
have all sorts of earthquakes down here.” 

“ There was no earthquake or we would have 
felt it,” answered Mark. “ They must have 
slipped from the trail and gone down into the 
canyon. Oh, this is the worst yet ! I wonder what 
we can do ! ” 

“ Can’t do much until the wind lets up,” am 


20 


CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 


swered Darry. ‘‘ I stayed out there as long as I 
could. It’s almost certain death to try to do any- 
thing out there now.” 

“ Oh, but, Darry, we can’t leave Sam and Frank 
to perish ! ” 

“ Mark, I’m as willing to do anything as you are. 
But you can’t imagine how it is blowing around that 
turn of the trail! Why, it nearly lifted my burro 
off his feet ! And the fine snow gets right into your 
lungs ! ” 

“ It’s sheer foolishness to think of going out 
there while this blow lasts,” broke in Hockley, 
strenuously. “ Don’t you attempt it, Mark. Most 
likely, if they went down into the canyon, they 
landed in some safe place. The burros would pro- 
tect them in falling.” 

Maybe they came down with the animals on 
top of ’em,” sighed Mark. And I don’t believe 
there is any safe place to fall to down there. I’d 
go out, if I thought I could do the least bit of 
good,” he added, wistfully. 

He looked forth again. The wind was howling 
and shrieking through the mountain pass, and all 
was a whirl of white. Hockley had been right — 
it would be sheer foolishness to attempt to do any- 


HOW TWO BOYS DISAPPEARED 


21 


thing just then. With a sickening heart, Mark 
turned back and joined the others. 

‘‘ I wish we could start some kind of a fire,” re- 
marked Hockley, after a pause, during which each 
boy had been busy with his thoughts. “ Fm about 
half frozen.” 

Start one, if you can find anything to start it 
with,” answered Mark, and gave a long sigh. 

“ I noticed a part of a broken-down cart near 
here when we came past the first time. Fll see if I 
can find that.” 

While the tall youth roamed around searching 
for firewood, Mark and Darry huddled close to 
their burros and discussed the situation. The 
Western youth felt certain that Sam and Frank had 
fallen from the trail into the canyon, but did not 
know the exact spot. 

“ I wish I had kept my eyes on ’em,” he said, 
sorrowfully. “ But I thought they’d follow to this 
place.” 

‘‘ Oh, Darry, supposing they are killed ! ” 

“ Don’t say that, Mark ! It makes me shiver 
from head to feet ! ” 

“ Do you suppose the professor is safe? ” 

‘‘ I don’t know. He may have considered it his 


22 


CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 


duty to rejoin us when the blizzard started, and he 
may have gotten stormbound somewhere between 
here and that village where he was going to get the 
fresh burro. If he knew about Sam and Frank he’d 
be as much worried as we are.” 

'' And just to think of having such a thing as 
this happen — after all our adventures in Central 
America and along the Amazon and elsewhere ! ” 
Yes, and just when we were figuring that we’d 
start for home in another two months! If Sam 
and Frank are killed I’ll never get over it, never! ” 
‘‘ It will certainly be a sad ending to this tour,” 
added the other youth, seriously. 


CHAPTER III 


THE DESCENT INTO THE CANYON 

Hockley had been right about seeing an aban- 
doned cart along the trail, close to the cliff. With 
a rope he managed to fasten his burro to the wreck- 
age and drag it into the shelter. Then, , with a 
hatchet Mark was carrying, the cart was split up 
into firewood, and soon a small blaze was started 
against the rocks. 

“ I won’t use too much of the firewood at once,” 
said the tall youth, because there is no telling how 
long we’ll have to stay here.” 

“Just as you say, Jake,” answered Mark, list- 
lessly. Now that Sam and Frank were missing, 
he could take but little interest in what the tall boy 
was doing. 

“ I think I’d better make some coffee, too,” went 
on Hockley. “ It will warm us up, and that is 
what we need.” 

A lunch had been brought along by each of the 
23 


24 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

young explorers, and Hockley carried a coffee-pot 
and Darry a frying-pan. Soon the tall boy had 
some snow melted, and then he made the coffee 
and passed it around in some collapsible drinking- 
cups which were a part of their outfit. 

Better have something to eat, too,” suggested 
Hockley. But Mark and Darry shook their heads, 
being in no humor for a meal. The tall boy ate 
several sandwiches with a relish. All drank the 
steaming coffee, and it braced up Mark and Darry 
not a little. 

An hour passed, and presently the fury of the 
storm seemed to die away. The snow still came 
down, but it was not as thick as before, and the 
wind was now little more than a gentle breeze. 

“ I believe it will clear off before nightfall,” re- 
marked Darry, after studying the sky. But it 
was a corker while it lasted; wasn’t it? ” 

“ As soon as it is safe to do so, Darry, we must 
go in search of Sam and Frank,” said Mark. 

“ Of course. We can go now, if you say so.” 

“ Wait a while, and I’ll go with you,” cried Hock- 
ley. “ I’ll pack up the things first. Who knows 
that we shall come back this way ? ” 

‘‘ Jake is right,” answered Mark. “ There is no 


THE DESCENT INTO THE CANYON 25 

telling where our hunt for Sam and Frank will lead 
us.” 

‘‘ Hello ! hello ! ” came from the trail, in a strong, 
heavy voice, and a minute later a well-known form 
appeared, followed by two natives, all mounted on 
burros. 

‘‘Professor Strong!” cried Mark and Darry, 
eagerly. “We were hoping you would come 
along.” 

“ It has been a fierce storm, boys,” answered 
Amos Strong, as he rode up to the split in the cliff. 
“ I had just gotten a new mount when it descended 
on the village, and then it was out of the question 
for me to come up here. I felt sure you would 
seek shelter, but I wasn’t sure you’d find as good 
a spot as this. Where are Sam and Frank? ” 

“ We don’t know, but we are afraid they fell off 
the trail into the canyon,” answered Mark. 

“Wfiat?” cried the professor, and the tone 
showed his immediate and deep concern. 

“ Darry saw them last — he will tell you what he 
knows,” went on Mark, and then the Western boy 
gave the particulars of the sudden disappearance. 

“ We must look into this at once,” declared Pro- 
fessor Strong. “ I was afraid something might 


26 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

happen, so I brought these two natives along. They 
are Quichua Indians, and they know every foot of 
the trail, and know the canyon also. The taller of 
the two can speak a little English. He says he 
once worked for an American civil engineer em- 
ployed on the railroad surveys.” 

The three young explorers were soon in the sad- 
dle. While they were getting ready Amos Strong 
explained to the Indians that two of the boys were 
missing. 

“ Sombo know,” answered the native who could 
speak English. Big wind — blow horse in sky — 
come down in big hole — break bones, yes, sometime 
neck ! We look and see, yes.” And he nodded his 
head rapidly. 

“ Well, I hope they didn’t go up in the sky and 
come down and break their necks,” returned the 
professor. “ But certainly that wind was strong 
enough to do almost anything.” 

Once big wind take whole pack train off — 
llamas, horses, everyt’ing,” said Sombo. “ Big 
wind bad, sometime, yes.” And then he told the 
other native of what had occurred. 

All were soon on the trail, Darry leading the 
way. The snow continued to come down, but the 


THE DESCENT INTO THE CANYON 27 

wind had almost died away entirely. The burros 
did not tremble now, which Darry took as a sign 
that the danger from the tornado, or blizzard, or 
whatever it might be called, was past. 

A few minutes' ride brought the whole party to 
the turn in the trail, and there, as well as he was 
able, Darry pointed out the spot where he had last 
seen Sam and Frank. This done, the two Quichuas 
dismounted and commenced to search in the snow 
for some trace of the missing lads. Then the 
others, with the exception of Hockley, did like- 
wise. 

“ You are quite certain this is the spot. Dart- 
worth?" questioned the professor, after all had 
looked around for several minutes without seeing 
anything out of the ordinary. 

“ I think this is the place, sir," was the reply. 
‘'Of course, it was blowing so hard I may have 
made a mistake. I could hardly see a thing." 

“ Yes, I can understand that. It’s a wonder you 
didn’t go off, too." 

" I kept my burro as close to the inner side of 
the trail as possible. Of course, on account of his 
load, he wanted to take the outside edge, same as 
all burros, but I wouldn’t allow that." 


28 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

“Here disl” shouted Sombo at this juncture, 
and brought out of the snow a heavy fur cap. 

“ That is Frank’s new cap ! ” cried Mark. “ The 
one he bought in La Paz day before yesterday.” 

“ Then this must be the spot ! ” cried Amos 
Strong. “ A nasty place truly,” he continued, as 
he walked cautiously forward. 

It certainly was a dangerous spot on the trail. 
The path was not over six feet wide, and lined on 
one side by a series of jagged rocks extending up- 
ward hundreds of feet. On the other the same 
jagged rocks extended downward into the canyon, 
ending in a sheer cliff, the bottom of which was lost 
to view in timber and brushwood. 

“ See anything? ” asked Mark, after a silence of 
fully a minute. 

“ Not a thing,” declared Professor Strong, in 
sober tones. “ But I suppose the snow has covered 
their tracks.” 

“ Look out, or you’ll go down, too,” cried Jake, 
in alarm, as the professor crawled still closer to the 
edge. 

“ Perhaps I’ll have to go, Jacob,” was the calm 
reply. 

“ You go down? You’ll be killed! ” 


THE DESCENT INTO THE CANYON 29 

Of course I’ll not go on horseback. We must 
find out what has become of them, one way or an- 
other.” 

Of course we’ve got to find out! ” cried Darry. 

I’ll go with you, if you want me to.” 

“ And I’ll go, too,” added Mark. 

‘‘ What have we got in the way of a lasso or 
rope ? ” questioned Amos Strong. 

The packs were inspected, and a rope of good 
size was found. Darry had a lasso, and so had 
each of the Quichuas. 

‘‘ I think the descent will be fairly safe if we tie 
ourselves to the rope and the lassoes, as they do 
in Switzerland,” said Professor Strong. 

Excuse me, I don’t want to go down there ! ” 
faltered Hockley. Why, if a fellow slipped he’d 
be smashed to pieces I ” 

Very well, Jacob; you can remain behind and 
watch the burros,” answered the tutor. 

Matters were explained to the natives, and they 
readily consented to join the others in the attempt 
to get down into the canyon. It was decided that 
one of the Indians should go first, then Professor 
Strong, Darry next, and then the second Quichua, 
and Mark. All were bound together by the rope 


30 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

and the lassoes, so that if one slipped the other 
could hold him up. 

‘‘ Do be careful ! ” pleaded Hockley, when the 
others were ready to descend from the narrow trail. 
He was wondering what he should do if they failed 
to come back. 

When we get below, Fll fire my pistol to let you 
know we are safe,” said Professor Strong. “ Later 
on, if I fire two shots, you are to remain where 
you are for us. If I fire three shots, return to that 
village from which we started this morning, and 
take all the animals with you.” 

But how will you get out of the canyon? ” 

“ The Indians say there is another trail from 
below, leading into the village by a roundabout 
way. We may have to take that — if we find Sam 
and Frank hurt.” 

‘‘ Oh, I hope they are all right,” answered Hock- 
ley. Of course, they’ll be sure to be shaken up.” 

“ Let us give a final call,” suggested Mark, and 
all raised their voices, even the Indians joining in. 
They listened with strained ears, but no reply came 
back to them. 

With great caution Sombo, who was to lead, 
crawled from the trail to the first of the jagged 


THE DESCENT INTO THE CANYON 


31 

rocks below. As soon as he was safe, Professor 
Strong followed, and thus the line of five men and 
boys slowly disappeared from the sight of Jake 
Hockley, who viewed their movements with mixed 
wonder and alarm. 

“ Be careful ! ” he called, as Mark went down. 

Those rocks are mighty slippery with that snow 
on 'em.” 

“ We'll be as careful as we can — don't fear about 
that, Jake,'' answered Mark, and then he slid down 
and over a big flat stone, and was hidden from the 
gaze of the youth left behind. Hockley waited for 
a moment, and then drew a long breath and uttered 
a mountainous sigh. He felt lonely to the last de- 
gree. 

Why didn't we stay in La Paz instead of going 
on mis foolhardy trip ? '' he muttered to himself. 
“ I came down here to have a good time — not to 
run into all sorts of danger.'' And then he got to 
wondering if the wind were coming up again, and 
if he had not better get back to the shelter of the 
cliff. 

Slowly and cautiously Sombo climbed down from 
one projecting rock to another, and with even 
greater caution the others followed him. Once 


32 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

Darry slipped and slid a distance of several feet, 
but the lasso behind him checked his progress, and 
he was enabled to get a fresh hold on the rocks 
before any damage was done. 

Be careful ! ” warned Professor Strong, for the 
Western lad had landed almost on top of him. 
“ Don’t let go of one rock until you are sure of the 
next.” 

“ The rock slipped, I didn’t ! ” gasped Darry. “ It 
was loose in the snow, but I didn’t know that until 
it was too late.” 

Presently they came out on a level spot, and 
there all gathered in a bunch to rest, for the climb 
downward was positively nerve-racking. 

“ Bad place now,” announced Sombo, after look- 
ing downward with care. “No take step till sure, 
yes, verra sure, yes.” 

“Very well, we’ll try to be extra careful,” an- 
swered Mark. 

Over the edge slipped the Indian, and Professor 
Strong followed. Then the line gave a sharp jerk 
and Darry was carried downward before he could 
save himself. The second Indian and Mark fol- 
lowed. 

“ Stop ! ” yelled Mark. 



Boys and men found themselves sliding downward.— P a.i5fe 33 . 





THE DESCENT INTO THE CANYON 33 

‘‘ I ca-can’t stop ! ” panted Darry. “ Sombo 
must have lost his grip entirely.” 

There followed another jerk, and then, of a sud- 
den, boys and men found themselves sliding down- 
ward over some slippery rocks well covered with 
snow. They did their best to stop themselves, but 
it was of no avail. Faster and faster they went, 
until with a bound they shot over an ice-covered 
edge, and then disappeared utterly from view! 


CHAPTER IV 


FROM ONE PERIL TO ANOTHER 

“ Where are we? 

“ Bless me if I know ! 

“ Kindly get your feet off my neck ! ’’ 

“ Sombo make big slide — stones roll over, yes ! ’’ 

Such were some of the remarks spluttered out 
as the whole crowd found themselves in a hollow 
well filled with snow. They had landed in a heap, 
but the loose snow had saved all from serious 
injury. Darry had received a kick in the shoulder, 
and one of the Quichuas had some skin scraped 
from his knee. 

“ Wow ! ” came from Mark. ‘‘ Say, I guess I 
got about a foot of snow down my back ! ’’ 

“ My ears and nose were full of it,’^ returned 
Darry. 

‘‘Anybody hurt?’' questioned Amos Strong, 
when he felt able to speak. 

“ I reckon not enough to count,” answered Darry. 

34 


FROM ONE PERIL TO ANOTHER 35 

Say, that was a regular football pile-on, wasn’t 
it ! ” he added, grimly. 

To get out of the hollow was no easy task, for 
the sides were almost as smooth as a china bowl. 
Sombo tried it several times, only to slip backwards, 
and Mark was equally unsuccessful. 

“ I’ve got an idea ! ” cried Darry. “ Mark, you 
are at the end of the line. Let that Indian stand 
on your shoulders. Then I’ll crawl up somehow, 
and the professor and Sombo can follow. We can 
all rest against the rocks, so the strain won’t be 
very great.” 

“ A good idea, Dartworth,” answered Amos 
Strong. We’ll put it into execution without 
delay.” 

The plan was successfully carried out, and once 
out of the hollow, the climb down to the bottom of 
the canyon was again begun. As they descended 
the depth of snow became greater. 

“ We must be careful that we don’t go into snow 
over our heads,” cautioned Professor Strong. “ We 
don’t want to be smothered.” 

Maybe that is what happened to Sam and 
Frank,” said Mark. 

“ Oh, don’t think of it ! ” cried Darry. 


^6 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

“ Let US hope for the best,” said the tutor, 
gravely. 

Presently they came to a spot where sliding was 
easy, and down they went for several hundred feet. 

“ Why, here is another trail ! ” cried Mark, as 
all halted. ‘‘ It’s a better trail than the one above.” 

“ This udder trail to Gobiago,” explained Sombo. 
“ Good trail, yes.” 

“Do you think Sam and Frank landed here?” 
questioned Darry. 

“ I am sure I do not know, Dartworth. All we 
can do is to look around for them. When the wind 
was blowing the snow must have been very thick 
down here.” 

Beyond the lower trail was a sheer wall of rocks, 
down which it was impossible to climb. All came 
to a halt, and gazed anxiously up and down the 
trail, and then at each other. 

“ Let’s set up a yell,” suggested Mark. “ They’ll 
be sure to hear if they are anywhere in this 
vicinity.” 

'‘All right!” cried Darry. “Now then, all to- 
gether I ” 

A ringing cry arose, that echoed and reechoed 
through the canyon in spite of the falling snow. 


FROM ONE PERIL TO ANOTHER 37 

Now once more ! ” added the Western youth. 
“We want to give them a chance to hear us.” 

Again the call arose — and then they waited with- 
out making a sound. 

“ I heard something ! ” exclaimed Mark, his voice 
trembling with excitement. 

“ So did I,” added Professor Strong. “ It was 
from a great distance.” 

“ Could it have been Hockley calling ? ” ques- 
tioned Darry. 

“ No, his voice could not carry down here. That 
call came from up the trail.” 

“ Boy shout,” said Sombo. “ Boy dere! ” And 
he pointed up the trail with his hand. “ Long way, 
yes.” 

“ It must be Sam or Frank ! ” cried Darry. 
“ Hello ! ” he yelled. “ Hello ! Sam ! Frank ! ” 

“ Hello ! ” came faintly. “ This way ! ” 

“ It’s Frank’s voice ! ” exclaimed the professor. 
“ We are coming ! ” he added, at the top of his 
lungs. “ Are you on the trail ? ” 

“ Yes,” was the reply. 

“ Frank must be alone,” remarked Darry. 
“Where can Sam be?” 

“ That remains to be found out. Come, let us 


38 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

go to Frank at once,” said Amos Strong, with par- 
donable impatience. 

All set off along the lower trail. Here the snow 
was over a foot deep, and consequently walking was 
anything but easy. At some places the jagged 
rocks jutted far out, and they had to climb around 
dangerous bends as bad as that where the first 
mishap had occurred. 

From time to time they called out and thus 
learned that they were gradually drawing closer to 
Frank. Then they rounded another turn of the 
rocky trail and discovered the New York boy watch- 
ing eagerly for them. 

‘‘Frank!” was the cry from the professor and 
the others. 

“ Hello ! Fm glad somebody has got here,” an- 
swered Frank, and his face showed his anxiety and 
his relief. 

“Are you all right?” demanded Mark. 

“ Yes, all but a few scratches on my right leg.” 

“ Where is Beans ? ” demanded Darry. 

“ Over under yonder rocks.” 

“ Hurt?” 

“ A little. He struck his head and it made him 
feel rather queer. He’s resting out of the storm.” 


FROM ONE PERIL TO ANOTHER 39 

‘‘ I am glad it is no worse,” said Amos Strong, 
fervently. “ You must have had an awful tumble.” 

“ It happened so quickly that I hardly knew what 
was taking place,” answered Frank, with a grim 
smile. “ We were in a bunch on the trail, and the 
next thing I knew I was slipping over the rocks on 
my burro. I did my best to keep from going down 
under the animal, and when we landed on a rocky 
shelf I jumped from the saddle and tried to cling 
to the rock. Then, all of a sudden, Sam came 
along on his animal, and the three of us rolled over 
and over in the snow. Then Sam and I grabbed 
each other and clung to some other rocks, and his 
horse struck this trail and went over into the gorge. 
My burro saved himself from that by landing in 
a hollow full of snow. He got cut up a little, but 
that’s all.” 

“ Take us to where Sam is,” said Amos Strong. 
‘‘ I trust his head is not badly injured.” 

“ He has a lump on his forehead as big as a wal- 
nut,” answered Frank. “ But he says he doesn’t 
care — he is thankful he wasn’t killed — and I am 
thankful I wasn’t killed, too,” he added, with feel- 
ing. 

‘‘ We are all thankful,” said Mark. 


40 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

“ Where is Glummy ? 

“ We left him on the upper trail, in charge of 
the burros,” answered Darry, and then he added 
in a whisper : “ He was afraid to try crawling down 
here.” 

“ Well, I don’t blame him much,” answered 
Frank, candidly. “ It was a risky thing for you to 
do.” 

** Huh ! you didn’t suppose we’d go on and leave 
you to your fate, did you ? ” demanded Mark. 

‘‘We fired our pistols to inform you that we were 
safe,” said Frank. 

“ We didn’t hear any shots.” 

“ Then the tornado, or whatever it was, drowned 
out the sounds.” 

All moved to the spot Frank indicated, and there 
they discovered the boy from Boston, seated on a 
rock in the shelter of a cliff. He had his forehead 
bound up in a bandage. Over this he wore his fur 
cap. Frank, having lost his new cap, had his head 
covered with an extra cap of wool. He was glad 
to get his new cap back. 

“ Oh, I’m all right, I guess,” said Sam, after 
greetings had been exchanged. “ It all happened 
just as Frank told you — and it happened mighty 


FROM ONE PERIL TO ANOTHER 4I 

quick, too, I can tell you. I thought sure at first 
that Fd be smashed to pieces on the rocks at the bot- 
tom of the canyon. It’s a lucky thing for us that 
this trail was here, otherwise nothing could have 
saved us.” 

‘‘ We ought to send up some sort of a signal to 
Jake,” said Mark, a few minutes later. “ I sup- 
pose he is mighty anxious.” 

“ We’ll fire off a pistol just as soon as we know 
what signal to send,” answered Amos Strong. Se- 
cretly he was somewhat chagrined over the 
cowardice shown by the tall youth. 

The matter was talked over, and it was decided 
to try to get to the village of Gobiago by means of 
the lower trail. They had one burro, and Sam, be- 
ing the worst hurt of the party, could ride this, 
while the others walked. 

It’s a good ten miles,” said Amos Strong. But 
perhaps we can find other means of transportation 
than walking before we get there.” 

One pistol shot was fired, to let Jake Hockley 
know they were safe, and this was followed by three 
other shots, to let him know that he was to return 
to Gobiago with the animals in his care. After a 
few seconds of waiting three shots came from 


42 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

above, to show that their signals were heard and 
understood. 

‘‘ It is of no use to look for the burro that fell 
into the canyon,” remarked Professor Strong. 
“ The distance here is hundreds of feet, so the ani- 
mal must be dead. We’ll have to pay for it, and 
that will end it.” 

“ Well, it’s good it’s the burro instead of one of 
us,” answered Mark. 

In a few minutes the boy from Boston was 
mounted on the animal that had been saved, and the 
two Quichuas led the way on the trail in the direc- 
tion of Gobiago. 

“ This is going to be a long walk,” remarked 
Darry, in a low voice to Mark and Frank. “ And 
I am pretty tired already.” 

“ Well, we’ll have to rest now and then, that’s 
all,” answered Frank. ‘‘ Sam simply can’t walk — 
and there is only one burro.” 

“ Oh, I don’t begrudge Beans the mount ! ” cried 
the Western youth, hastily. “ But I do wish we 
could strike some horses, or mules, or even some 
llamas, if they were ridable.” 

The snow was coming down less thickly now, so 
they could see some distance ahead. They kept 


FROM ONE PERIL TO ANOTHER 


43 


steadily on, until a full mile was covered. Then 
they came to a spot where the trail broadened out, 
and here they found a low house of stone, built in 
the shelter of the mountainside. 

“ Here is some kind of a shelter! ” cried Mark. 
“ Why can’t we go in there and rest up and have 
some lunch ? ” 

“ We might do that, if you wish it, Mark,” an- 
swered Amos Strong. “ And I was thinking of 
something else. We might rest here while Sombo 
went forward to the nearest village and got us 
some mounts. I know you must be tired out, and 
there is no use in walking when you can ride.” 

“ Let us see what sort of a place this shelter is 
first,” remarked Darry. “ It may be such a filthy 
place we won’t want to stop.” 

“ I think I know what kind of a place it is,” 
answered Amos Strong. “ It is a road shelter, put 
up for travelers who may be caught in just such a 
blizzard as that you experienced on the upper trail. 
The government used to put them up for the pro- 
tection of the mail and express carriers. We may 
find it quite a comfortable place — especially if there 
is enough wood around with which to start a fire.” 

All started for the low stone house, or, rather, 


44 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

hut. The door was tightly closed, but a window in 
the side next to the mountain was broken open. 

‘‘ I reckon it is deserted,” observed Darry. 

There is no smoke coming from the hole of a 
chimney, and if anybody was inside he’d most 
likely have a fire.” 

I’ll beat you to the door ! ” cried Mark, cheerily. 

“ Done ! ” cried Darry, and then both set off on a 
run for the stone hut. Mark got there first, but 
before he could open the door Darry plumped into 
him, and both went up against the barrier with a 
crash, almost taking it off its hinges. Then both 
lads went sprawling into the semi-darkness of the 
room beyond. 

For the instant there was silence. Then, as both 
youths commenced to speak, a noise sounded out 
that thrilled them to the heart. 

It was the unmistakable growl of some wild 
animal — a heavy, vicious growl, that meant but one 
thing — grave and immediate danger. 


CHAPTER V 


THE MOUNTAIN LION 

“ What in the world is that? 

“ I don’t know, Mark ! But we had better get 
out of here ! ” 

‘‘ There it is — a mountain lion ! Look out, he is 
coming for us ! ” 

As quickly as possible the two lads scrambled 
to their feet. As they did so, a tawny body swept 
through the semi-darkness of the stone hut and 
crouched close to the half-open door. 

Instinctively the two youths stepped backwards, 
and this took them farther from the doorway. They 
could see the beast but dimly, yet the two glowing 
eyes that were turned on them were enough to 
make them shiver from head to foot. 

A shout from outside reached their ears. Pro- 
fessor Strong was coming closer to the hut. 

What are you doing in there, boys? ” he called 

out. 


45 


46 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

Look out for the mountain lion ! ” yelled Darry, 
as loudly as he could. 

Both the Western lad and Mark were armed, and 
were feeling for their revolvers. While doing this 
they kept their eyes fixed on the beast before them. 
The mountain lion was large and powerful, and the 
boys had met such a beast before and knew that if 
it made a leap they would have to get out of the 
way or run the danger of being mauled to death. 

Mark was the first to draw his weapon, and, tak- 
ing hasty aim, he fired two shots at the savage 
animal. There was a frightful roar, and the moun- 
tain lion leaped toward him. He sprang nimbly to 
one side, and the beast struck the wall of the stone 
hut with a thud. 

Darry was now ready with his weapon, and as 
the beast turned he, too, fired twice. Mark had 
managed to hit the mountain lion in the right fore- 
leg; Darry now put a bullet in the left foreleg, and 
thus the animal was seriously crippled. It continued 
to roar frightfully, and this noise told those outside 
something of what was going on. 

“ A wild beast is chewing them up ! ” cried Frank. 

“ Stand back, boys ! ” cried Amos Strong, and 
quickly he unslung the only rifle the party carried. 


THE MOUNTAIN LION 47 

With this weapon in hand he ran for the door and 
kicked it open to its full extent. 

At first only the smoke from the shots was to be 
seen. But as this cleared away the professor made 
out the form of the mountain lion, glaring fero- 
ciously from the shelter of a corner. 

“Boys, where are you?” he called out, not 
wishing to risk a shot that might do them harm. 

He had hardly spoken when several pistol shots 
from the knocked-out window rang out. The 
mountain lion leaped in the air, turned over several 
times, and then lay quiet. The professor glanced 
toward the window and saw that Mark and Darry 
had jumped through to the outside and were firing 
from this point of vantage. 

“ Do you think he’s dead? ” questioned the New 
York lad, when the smoke was clearing away and 
the mountain lion continued to lie motionless. 

“ I think so,” answered Amos Strong. “ But 
perhaps you had better give him another bullet in 
the head, to make sure,” he added. Now that the 
danger was practically over, he did not wish to use 
the rifle and thus deprive the boys of the honor 
of having brought down the mountain lion alone. 

Mark and Darry came around to the doorway, 


48 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

and both advanced on the beast with caution. But 
the savage animal was dead, as they soon saw, so 
that another shot was unnecessary. 

Any more of ’em around? ” asked Frank, as he 
came in to look at the mountain lion. “ Some- 
times they travel in pairs, you know.” 

I’ll take a look around,” said Professor Strong. 
And he walked all around the hut, inside and out. 
But no more animals were in sight. 

The Quichuas had been greatly alarmed when 
they learned that a mountain lion had been sighted. 
By them such a beast was to be given a wide berth, 
and this is not to be wondered at, since mountain 
lions of South America have been known to kill 
many a native, and have even carried off children. 
When it was announced that the animal was dead, 
both came in to view it with awe, and then they 
gazed admiringly at the lads who had laid such a 
powerful enemy low. 

“ Big hunters, yes,” said Sombo. “ Make best 
pistol knocks, yes,” and he smiled broadly at Mark 
and Darry. 

‘ Pistol knocks ’ is good,” remarked Sam. “ But 
that is just what they did, anyway.” 

Aside from the dead mountain lion, the stone hut 


THE mountain lion 


49 


was found to be deserted, and the party of ex- 
plorers quickly made themselves • at home there, 
building a fire in a corner set apart for that purpose, 
from wood brought in by the natives. Then 
Sombo and his companion set off for the nearest 
settlement, to obtain fresh mounts for them. 

“ I guess we can keep this lion skin,” remarked 
Darry, after all had warmed up and rested. “ It 
will make a nice rug at home. Do you want it, 
Mark?” 

‘‘ No, Darry, I am satisfied to let you have it. 
ril help you skin the beast if you say so.” 

‘‘ All right, Mark.” And then the two boys set 
to work to strip the carcass of the mountain lion, 
no mean work, as they presently discovered. The 
pelt was heavy, and would undoubtedly make a 
fine rug. 

It was growing dark once more, and presently the 
snow commenced to come down as thickly as ever. 
One of the packs was placed in the broken-out win- 
dow, to keep out the air, and the door was all but 
closed. By this means, even with a scanty fire, the 
stone hut was kept moderately warm, and the Amer- 
icans were correspondijigly comfortable. 

''How do you feel, Samuel?” questioned the 


50 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

professor, when he noticed the Boston boy readjust- 
ing the bandage on his forehead. 

“ Oh, I think Fll be all right again in a day or 
two,” was the reply. But I certainly had a great 
tumble. I don’t want another like it.” 

“ No, we’ll have to be extra careful after this. 
After traveling so many thousands of miles it would 
be a shame to have something happen when our 
great tour is so close to its end.” 

“ Well, we’ve still got some distance to travel,” 
answered Sam, with a faint smile. Down to Val- 
paraiso, and then across Argentina to Buenos Aires. 
Some folks would count that a tour in itself.” 

“You are right. We have certainly covered a 
great deal of ground since we left New York. I 
presume you’ll be glad to get back to Boston.” 

“ I’ll be glad to see mother again. I fancy she 
has been rather lonely since I went away. It isn’t 
as if father were alive.” 

“ Well, you must send her letters regularly.” 

“ I do that — and have ever since we left the 
United States. The trouble is, the letters don’t al- 
ways go as quickly as one would wish.” 

“ I shall be glad to see the new school buildings,” 
went on Amos Strong. “ My brother writes that 


THE MOUNTAIN LION 


51 

they are almost finished and that they look very 
fine.’’ 

We’ll have a lot to tell the other fellows when 
we get back to school,” broke in Mark. 

“ I’ll wager they won’t believe the half of it — 
how we escaped from that awful volcano eruption, 
and all that,” came from Frank. 

“ And how we got lost on the Orinoco, and what 
wild times we had on the Amazon,” put in Darry. 

“ And the treasure we unearthed in the Andes,” 
cried Sam. ‘‘ That sounds like a chapter from a 
story-book.” 

But we’ve got the treasure to show — ^just as 
we’ve got this skin of a mountain lion,” said Mark. 

Seeing is believing, you know.” 

When the other boys hear about all the good 
times we have had they’ll want to go, too,” said 
Frank. 

Well, the professor can organize another tour, 
during the next vacation,” suggested Darry. “ How 
about that, Mr. Strong ? ” 

We’ll see about that when the time comes,” was 
the reply, with a faint smile. No use in talking 
about another trip before the present one is over.” 

Fortunately the party had a fair supply of eat- 


52 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

ables along, and soon a meal was prepared, in- 
cluding some hot cocoa, which all drank with a 
relish. Then they sat down to rest until the re- 
turn of the Quichuas with the fresh mounts. 

“ Professor, do you think we’ll ever see that Dan 
Markel again ? ” asked Mark, presently. 

That is a hard question to answer,” was the 
reply. Several times I thought we had seen the 
last of him, and then, like the proverbial bad penny, 
he has turned up again. I certainly do not wish to 
see him.” 

It’s a pity we didn’t have him put in prison when 
we had the chance,” remarked Sam. 

“ I agree with you in one respect, Samuel. But 
you have had a chance to see how justice is ad- 
ministered down here. Everything moves very 
slowly, and had we made a formal charge, we might 
have been held as witnesses against Markel for an 
indefinite time. If only he keeps out of our path 
in the future, I shall be satisfied.” 

“ But he sent that threatening letter,” cried 
Darry. “ That looks as if he meant to do some- 
thing.” 

“ The letter may be all bluster,” was Amos 
Strong’s comment. But in this the tutor was sadly 


THE MOUNTAIN LION 53 

mistaken, as he found out ere many weeks had 
passed. 

Night came on, and still there was no sign of 
Sombo or his companion. The professor and the 
boys looked out on the trail many times. The 
snow had almost ceased falling, but all was very 
dark. 

“ I don’t see that there is anything to do but to 
turn in and wait till morning,” announced Professor 
Strong at last. “We can’t walk through the snow 
very well, and to attempt it on such a trail as this 
in the dark would be dangerous.” 

“ Do you think the Indians have deserted us ? ” 
asked Sam. 

“ Oh, no — they were too anxious to earn the 
money I promised them. Either they have been 
unable to get the horses or burros wanted, or else 
they thought it best to wait until daylight. I am 
sure they will be back in the morning.” 

“ Well, we didn’t get to the mountain top, but we 
certainly seem to be having our share of adven- 
tures,” remarked Darry. 

“ Instead of going to the top, Sam and I tried to 
get to the bottom,” was Frank’s dry comment. 

All of the young explorers were so exhausted 


54 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

that they went to sleep without difficulty, even 
though they rested on nothing better than some old 
brushwood, found piled up in one corner of the 
stone hut. Professor Strong remained awake for 
an hour after they retired, but then he, too, turned 
in, having first propped a big stone against the door 
and fastened the pack in the knocked-out window. 

It was daybreak when the boys awoke. Darry 
was the first to get up, and he rushed to the door 
and threw it open. A flood of light came into the 
stone hut, for the sun was rising clear and bright 
over the mountain tops. 

‘‘ A glorious day after the storm ! cried the 
Western youth, gayly. “Just see the snow and ice, 
shining like diamonds ! ” 

“ I see something on the trail ! ” announced 
Frank, after a long look. “ I believe it is a pack 
train coming.’’ 

“ I hope they have some grub to sell ! ” said Mark, 
who had viewed the diminished supplies with sor- 
row. 

“ It isn’t a pack train — it’s our Indians with the 
new mounts!” exclaimed Sam. “Hurrah! Now 
we’ll be able to get back to Gobiago in jig time, 
and get back to La Paz, too.” 


THE MOUNTAIN LION 


55 


The announcement that it was the two Quichuas 
who were returning was correct, and inside of a 
quarter of an hour they arrived at the stone hut. 
They had brought with them some horses and 
mules, and also the owner of the animals. On one 
of the mules was a pack, containing various things 
good to eat. 

No come las’ night in dark, no,” explained 
Sombo. “ Start early to-day, yes — come just so 
quick dat way, yes. Bring eat and drink, you want, 
yes?” 

You just bet we want the stuff! ” cried Darry, 
slangily. It’s just what we have been waiting 
for. Now for a good breakfast, and then we’ll 
start for Gobiago.” 


CHAPTER VI 


AT THE LA PAZ MARKET PLACE 

It was wonderful how the spirits of the boys 
arose when they saw the fresh steeds and the 
amount of things to eat that had been brought by 
the two Indians. 

While the professor was negotiating with the 
owner of the horses and mules about getting back 
to the village and also to La Paz, the boys lost no 
time in cooking a substantial breakfast, of fried 
eggs, mutton chops, and coffee. To this were 
added some fresh bread brought in the pack, and 
some fruit cakes. 

The owner of the mounts proved to be a reason- 
able man, and a bargain was quickly consummated 
with him, whereby they were to have the use of the 
horses and mules until La Paz was reached. This 
accomplished, all sat down to breakfast, and it is 
perhaps needless to state that each ate his full 
share of what was provided. 

56 


AT THE LA PAZ MARKET PLACE 57 

From Sombo it was learned that Hockley had 
arrived at Gobiago with the burros, and had agreed 
to remain at the village until the others of his 
party arrived. But he wanted them to hurry up, 
for the village, with its rather dirty natives, did not 
suit him at all. 

“ He say, you not come soon, he go La Paz, yes,’* 
added the Quichua. ‘‘ Say, he wait at hotel La 
Paz for you, yes.” 

‘‘ Very well,” answered Amos Strong. 

Half an hour later breakfast was over, the packs 
made up, and the whole party started off along the 
snow-covered trail. The wind had gone down en- 
tirely, and the ascending sun made it a good deal 
warmer. 

‘'A big change from yesterday,” was Mark’s 
comment. How do you feel, Sam ? ” 

Feel as if I had been through a first-class foot- 
ball scrimmage,” answered the Boston youth. “ But 
I don’t care — I am thankful I got off so easily. 
I’m glad the burro got killed, not I.” And he 
shuddered as he thought of his narrow escape from 
serious injury, if not death. 

The owner of the animals knew the mountain 
trail even better than did the Indians, and he led 


58 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

the way, shouting back to them to avoid all danger- 
ous places. But progress was slow, and it was 
noon by the time Gobiago was reached. 

“Well, I thought you’d never get here!” came 
a hail, and Jake put in an appearance. “ How is 
everybody?” and he glanced curiously at Sam and 
Frank. 

“Oh, we’re alive and kicking!” cried Frank, 
cheerily. “ Sam got the worst of it.” 

“Tell me about it,” said the tall youth, and once 
again the story of the mishap had to be related. 
The boys also told about the mountain lion. 

“Wish I had been there — ^to get a crack at that 
lion,” said Jake, a bit enviously. “ I think a 
couple of shots from my big pistol would have fin- 
ished him.” 

“ Maybe,” answered Darry, dryly. 

“ Oh, I know I could do it,” went on the lank 
youth, boastfully. 

“ Well, we’ll turn over the next mountain lion 
to you,” returned the Western boy. He did not 
care to risk a dispute with Hockley. 

A rest of an hour was made at Gobiago — a small 
village" of no importance — and then, after a lunch, 
the whole party started for Alto La Paz, the sta- 


AT THE LA PAZ MARKET PLACE 59 

tion where the railroad landed its passengers for 
La Paz proper. 

‘‘ How much longer are we to stay in La Paz ? ” 
questioned Mark, when they were approaching the 
railroad station. 

‘‘ Only a few days, Mark,” returned Professor 
Strong. ‘‘ Then we’ll return to Lima and Callao, 
and there take the steamer for a sail down the 
coast to Valparaiso.” 

“ Can we get a steamer ? ” 

“ Oh, yes, there is a regular line running — ^and 
they are fine boats, too.” 

From Alto La Paz, a winding road leads down 
the mountain side to the city, with its narrow 
streets, its stone buildings, and its queer, old- 
fashioned market place. On this road were numer- 
ous pack trains and teamsters, driving horses, bur- 
ros, and llamas. Many of the teamsters were Cholo 
boys, with big hats, and heavy capes that came 
well up around their necks. But though everybody 
was d^S3ed warmly from the head to the knees, 
many^'-tT the natives were barefooted! 

‘‘ This barefooted custom gets me,” remarked 
Mark, after he had taken a snap-shot photograph of 
a Cholo boy ankle-deep in snow and with a grin 


6o CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

on his face. “ It’s a wonder his feet don’t get 
frozen.” 

‘‘ It is what you get used to,” answered Pro- 
fessor Strong. “ When you go to snowballing 
your hands get warm instead of cold. Well, your 
hands are just as sensitive as your feet.” 

As the party entered the city they came face to 
face with an immense flock of llamas, driven by a 
man and several boys. The llamas were a bit wild, 
and ran hither and thither, as if anxious to get 
back to the plains from which they had come. 

‘‘ Say, I don’t like this ! ” cried Jake, as two of 
the llamas crowded close to the mule he was riding. 
“ Get away, you beast ! ” he roared, and made a 
slash at one of the llamas with a stick he was car- 
rying for a whip. 

“ Don’t hit them — you’ll only make them 
wilder!” called out Amos Strong. “Just sit per- 
fectly still, and they’ll soon pass on.” 

But Hockley did not intend to sit still. He 
struck at the second llama. The animal .yvhirled 
around and gave a kick at the mule. Promptly on 
the defensive, the mule kicked back. As his hind 
feet came up Jake slid down on the mule’s neck. 
The llama was sent whirling into one of the other 






*^.1 


’ir/ 

• t •> 


w- 


rv 


i 




V» 4 * U 

r ■ 


-t: 1 


> - wt 
* 

• * 


■’.* * 

a 


. » 


.1 


• _, , 
• ■ ^ >t 


«. rt.l- •- ^ 

1 ' ■" 


iy\ '■ 


V • 

- 1 1'*' 


V 

V 


^ ♦ 


* r 




• - , » 

t t 


■ \ • 
- ^ 
? *«^ 


r 






r-. - ^ 

». ^ * T •• ■ -r r-’^Vv ^ ' ' ' ■■•*'/ - . 

V;.#V. - , C.,; H ^ * Jrf* ; ^ *- . .V 

'"v • ■'•• . T' - • • ''■■• • * 

... -V. * , .-Svi'sf- , '.,• 

. v.i.-;' .- "• ,' J. . .. , 

-- >'• > 'TU ••''■-■ • ''■ -'-S'- 'N"- >-■■ -7 ■■ /<;;•■'■. ' 

.- j^' • R-'W? »• x; *. » ■‘' ^' ''^ ■ *^ * f^ ... 


4 « 


•• ^ ' 
*- A-^V 


it *' 



rji 


■ '' ti*. 




^ pJCT’' V * ''r \\V 

^ .>.„ \ ' 'V :-' 

• f ^ • - .'* • • ’ v . r • , • - - ’^ 

- - r »v f:.. ^‘. - ' • 4 •;: . - . 

'v- '-^•rj^-*'. '--VI 

S .9^ •« . ^ 


^ 


..<■ ' ■■■?'■ »-; 

. N* • ‘ , --Ik* 

.1* ^ 


f 

w ^ * 


> . 






\ \ 



% > .Jt. 


P . 

rr-{ » . V 

Kti" _ ■ 


^ » 


- ’ \ 


• •*» 
I 


• * 


' ‘ j"* 

J ', ■‘^ 

V ’ I >.J- ' 


I * 

"V'T. , 


4- -« 


w r • 


r ■ r 

'• f 

•• J - 'f " . 




.V 



v> 




. f • 




^ * 











' r- 

;.* . v» - 


*» •' 


i •• 


\a- 








' ' 4-i^pp. 



.'• t. ^ 


s . 


. ^ 


4 • 

V 




' V 


( 


«• 


-- fc" 

i ' 

. ) 


- >• < I *, 

T *• 

.' * i V -. nL . 


- -v l'? 


» • 


■ . V ’JJ''{ r, _ i\- / '" -. 

fc • • i • •* • , < . 


ru,’ 




J 44 • ♦ 



•> 


I > 


k. ’ 4 


& Ii.‘ . V •*’-'■ 

?■ %-■- -- ■. ' 


V. 


f- :- 


. r; ' > J W 

■ :. -.-r^*' • :/ s’- •- 


.4 « 


>i-j 


T» v’- 

> I 


4< • 


■ > / 


♦ 

w • 


A- ' ' ^ >x’" 

‘ • . p7i • " . 


;. ll 


r 

j 



- ,*> 0 . » 


-•}‘»\ J't' 

,.4. *. ♦ ■ 


-t • • 


-^■4 ,. 

' ^ . *:■ 

% 


'A:- 




L> 


r I 4 ••• • 

’ - \v* •- ":'■’ -w 

7 X ''. •■,’.* ‘ A™ 

w- « 1'*. \ tr '. '*\''JL - ■ 




.y 


# 

« 


’* ••'T* ;. 


4 «' 

f-j^y i 
s%.^J - 


\> f 


T. 


V.^ 


• k 


*■'*•• - k ' "^^ * ' * * I ■' Y ^ 





’X « 


• ; '4r I 5 A .. ■ ' , v> . : t'- ■; ■ ' 

' i. »-- • . . . 


i 


X- 



. fjuHUlSF .r>^; nW* A R4«ac.i*£& 


> . 

■%< 


.‘t 


A 


r* 

'< 




^1 




*> i 


■ ]7'^ 


• * * 


»■ i 


AT THE LA PAZ MARKET PLACE 6l 

of the flock. Instantly there was confusion, and in 
the midst of this the mule let out another kick, 
raising up so high this time that poor Jake was 
thrown over his head and directly in front of half 
a dozen frightened llamas. 

“ Stop ! Save me ! ” yelled the lank youth. 

Don’t let them step on me ! ” 

“ Keep ’em back with your pistol, Jake — the big 
pistol ! ” cried Darry, dryly. He was satisfied that 
there was no great danger. ^ 

Keep them back ! Don’t let ’em crush me ! ” 
howled Hockley, in terror. And then he scrambled 
to his feet and backed out of the flock of llamas 
with all speed. 

In the meantime the owner of the mule and the 
owner of the llamas had seen the happening, and 
both rushed to the spot. The mule was readily 
caught and quieted, and the llamas driven to a 
distance. Both owners reviled each other for what 
had occurred, and for several minutes the air re- 
sounded with their talk, but the boys did not un- 
derstand a word, which was perhaps just as well. 
Then the flock of llamas passed on, and the 
owner of the mule beckoned to Jake to get up in the 
saddle once more. 


62 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

‘‘ Is it — it safe ? asked the tall youth, with a 
nervous glance at the retreating llamas. 

The owner of the beast said it was, and very 
cautiously Jake mounted again. As he did this, 
Darry winked at Sam, Frank, and Mark, and all 
had to make an effort to keep from laughing. As 
it was, Frank gave a snicker that reached Jake’s 
ears and made him turn quickly. 

“ Who are you laughing at ? ” he demanded, 
roughly. 

‘‘ Nobody,” answered Frank. 

‘‘ Thiiik it’s smart to laugh at me, don’t you?” 
cried Jake, in a rage. ‘‘ I suppose you thought it 
mighty funny to see me go over the mule’s head, 
eh? ” 

“ Well, it wasn’t a very serious proceeding, 
Jake.” 

‘‘ I might have broken my neck ! ” 

“ I am glad you didn’t.” 

Don’t you get gay and laugh at me, Frank 
Newton! I won’t allow it!” 

All right, Jake — just as you say,” answered 
Frank, bound to do all he could to keep the peace. 

‘‘Jake is getting sour again,” whispered Mark, 
a few minutes later, when they were on the way 


AT THE LA PAZ MARKET PLACE 63 

once more. “ He stays sweet about so long, and 
then boils over.” 

Well, Mark, I am not going to take too much 
from him. I like to have ‘ peace in the family,^ as 
the saying goes, but I can’t stand everything.” 

“ None of us are going to stand too much. He 
has got to behave himself or take the conse- 
quences.” 

“ I wish he’d make up his mind to be like the 
rest of us,” said Sam. If he was, what jolly good 
times we could have ! ” 

“ Well, one good thing about Jake is, he isn’t 
sour as much as he used to be,” said Darry. “ He 
only gets an occasional spell. Don’t you remem- 
ber when we first started out, he was sour and dic- 
tatorial all the time.” 

They soon entered the city, and a few minutes’ 
ride through the narrow streets, and across one of 
the quaint public squares, brought them to the Hotel 
Guibert, at which they had rooms. Here the boys 
were glad enough to dismount, and here the owner 
of the steeds, and the Quichuas, were paid off by 
Professor Strong. 

“ I don’t think any of us will care to go out to- 
night,” said the professor, when they were entering 


64 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

their apartments. “ We are all too tired, and will 
enjoy a good night’s rest.” 

“ I’d enjoy it more if it wasn’t so cold,” grumbled 
Hockley. The fact that none of the rooms in the 
hotel had any artificial heat annoyed him greatly. 
In La Paz but few houses are artificially heated, 
in spite of the fact that the city lies at an altitude 
of nearly two miles and a half above sea level. 

Well, you’ll have to do as the natives do, roll 
yourself in warm blankets,” answered Amos 
Strong. “ Or, I might be able to borrow a char- 
coal stove for you, if you are suffering very much 
from the cold, Jacob.” 

“ Oh, I reckon I can stand it if the rest can,” 
answered the lank youth, a bit sheepishly. 

A substantial dinner had been ordered, and after 
a good washing up, and after Sam’s bruises had 
been attended to, they went below to the dining- 
room. Here they took their time over the meal, 
there being nothing else to do. 

“ The steamer sails from Callao for Valparaiso 
next Wednesday,” said Professor Strong, after he 
had consulted a local newspaper. ‘‘We can easily 
get to Lima by that time, and I can telegraph ahead 
for staterooms,” 


AT THE LA PAZ MARKET PLACE 65 

“ I hope we get good ones,” muttered Jake. “ No 
little cubby-hole for mine.” 

‘‘ ril get the best to be had,” responded the tutor, 
briefly. 

Everybody was utterly worn out, and shortly 
after the meal was finished, Sam and Mark retired 
to the room they occupied, and presently the others 
also went to bed. All slept soundly, and it was 
after eight o’clock before either the professor or 
any of the lads awoke. 

^ “ What’s the programme for to-day ? ” ques- 

tioned Sam, while the crowd was going to break- 
fast. 

‘‘ I was thinking of going down to the market 
place to get some snapshots of the natives,” an- 
swered Mark, who loved to take pictures. “ Some 
of the Chola girls are very picturesque, especially 
those who wear the bright-colored skirts.” 

They tell me some of those girls wear ten and 
twelve skirts at a time,” remarked Darry. 

“ That is true,” said Professor Strong. “ The 
native girls here are as proud of their skirts as our 
own girls are of their hats. Some of them wear a 
dozen or more at a time, of all hues under the 
sun, and from time to time they slip off a skirt, as 


66 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

our ladies would slip off a cape, just to show the 
gorgeousness of the next one/’ 

“ And the shoes ! ” was Mark’s comment. “ Did 
you notice them ? All the colors of the rainbow ! ” 

“ Yes, and did you notice that some of the poorer 
natives walked barefooted, carrying those same 
gorgeous shoes in their hands, so as not to soil them 
in the mud ? ” added Sam. 

Down in the market place they met a great con- 
glomeration of people, Aymaras, Quichuas, Span- 
iards, with here and there a European or an Amer- 
ican. The market stalls were filled with fruits and 
vegetables brought in from the fertile valleys be- 
yond the mountains. Those who came to buy were 
mostly poor people, and the “ dickering ” went on 
constantly. 

“ I am going to buy some fruit,” said Hockley, 
and put his hand in his pocket, to bring out a purse 
which he usually kept well filled with money. Then 
he gave a slight gasp. 

“What’s the matter?” inquired Darry, who was 
beside him. 

“ My purse — it is gone! ” was the reply. “ Some- 
body has robbed me I ” 


CHAPTER VII 


LOOKING FOR ROBERTO OLANO 

‘‘What’s that?” queried Frank, who had over- 
heard only a few words of the talk. 

“ Jake says he has been robbed — ^that his purse 
has been stolen,” answered Darry. “ Jake, did you 
have much in it ? ” he went on. 

“ I just guess I did ! I had a letter of credit 
cashed at the bank only three days ago, and most 
of the money was in the purse — about a hundred 
and fifty dollars.” 

“ Did you have the purse when you left the 
hotel ? ” asked Mark. 

“ Sure I did. I looked at it just before we left 
the dining-room — ^to make certain that the bank 
bills were in it. I even counted the bills.” 

Professor Strong had gone on, to the other end 
of the market place, so the five boys were left to 
themselves in the crowd. Hockley talked in such 
an excited manner that the market women and 
67 


68 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

many others gazed at him curiously, wondering 
what could be the matter. 

‘‘ Let us take a look around, maybe it dropped 
on the walk,” suggested Darry. 

“ Oh, I’m not in the habit of dropping my purse ! ” 
burst out Jake. “ I tell you I have been robbed ! 
I only wish I knew who did it — I’d have him ar- 
rested on the spot ! ” And he glared around at the 
gathering crowd and along the line of innocent 
market vendors. Then his glance fell on a Cholo 
boy who chanced to be standing near, and he caught 
the lad by the arm. ‘‘ Did you take my purse ? ” 
he almost shouted. 

The Cholo boy looked scared, the more so be- 
cause he did not understand a word of what was 
said. He stammered something in his native 
tongue, and tried to free himself. 

“ I don’t believe he is guilty, Jake,” said Mark. 
“ Unless you lost the purse, some iclever pick- 
pocket has relieved you of it.” 

“ Say, did anybody at the hotel see you counting 
that money?” demanded Sam. ‘‘If he did, he 
might have followed you, and brushed up to you 
in the ctowd.” 

Jake stared at the boy from Boston for a mo- 


LOOKING FOR ROBERTO OLANO 69 

ment, and then his eyes lit up. He released the 
Cholo boy, who lost no time in leaving the vicinity 
of the excited American youth. 

“ Somebody did see me — a rascally-looking 
Bolivian, I guess he was. The fellow at the hotel 
with a cut across his chin. He was sitting on the 
veranda smoking, and he looked in the window 
right at me, just as I was putting the money back 
into the purse. I remember him well, for he gave 
me a cunning, villainous look. And, come to think 
of it, when we left the hotel he followed close be- 
hind us ! ’’ 

“ Then he may be the guilty fellow,” replied 
Mark. “ But I shouldn’t accuse him, Jake, until 
I was certain of what I was doing. Otherwise you 
may get into serious trouble.” 

I’ll get right back to the hotel and find out 
who that fellow is,” said the youth who had suf- 
fered the loss. ‘‘If his reputation isn’t good. I’ll 
make a complaint against him and chance it.” 

Professor Strong had seen the gathering crowd, 
and now he hurried towards the boys. He was 
quickly acquainted with what had occurred. 

“ You had better take a look around here before 
you return to the hotel,” he said. “ Possibly that 


70 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

man is in the crowd — although, if he has the pocket- 
book, he most likely got away as fast as he could. 
I will make a few inquiries.” 

The professor spoke the native language fluently, 
and he questioned several of the vendors in that 
vicinity. At first he learned little of importance, 
but presently he turned to the boys with a peculiar 
grim smile on his countenance. 

‘‘ I am inclined to believe that the man with the 
cut on his chin is guilty,” he said. ‘‘ That old 
woman yonder, who is selling herbs, says she saw 
such a looking man come up beside Jacob in the 
crowd and press very close to him, while at the same 
time his eyes roved around, to see if anybody was 
noticing him. She says she saw the cut on his chin 
quite plainly.” 

“ Then he is guilty ! ” cried the lank youth, hotly. 

It’s as plain as day. He saw me count the money 
and put it in my purse, and then he followed me, 
just to watch his chance to get his hands on the 
purse! I am going right back to the hotel after 
him!” 

“ Maybe he didn’t go back,” suggested Frank. 

“ He was stopping there — for I saw him in the 
dining-room when we got back from that mountain 


LOOKING FOR ROBERTO OLANO 7 1 

trip/’ put in Mark. “ He must have some baggage, 
and he’d have to go back for that.” 

“ We’ll go right back and find out,” said Amos 
Strong. “ I am very sorry for you, Jacob,” he 
added, kindly. “ After this you must be careful 
how you show your money before strangers.” 

“ Humph! I didn’t think they’d allow crooks to 
stop at that hotel ! ” grumbled the lank youth. 

‘‘ Hotel managers cannot always tell bad men 
from good, Jacob — they have to take chances. I 
have warned you of this before. Never trust 
strangers any more than is necessary.” 

“ Jake always was careless about carrying his 
money,” whispered Frank to Mark, as the crowd 
hurried back to the hotel. “ I warned him about 
it twice.” 

“ I did the same thing, Frank. The trouble is, 
dummy likes to show off. I wager he thought it 
was big to let that fellow see he had such a roll.” 

Inside of a quarter of an hour they were back 
at the hotel. All looked around anxiously for 
the fellow with a scar on his chin, but that in- 
ividual was nowhere in sight. 

“ I will ask about him,” said Amos Strong, and 
: roceeded to question not only the clerk, but also 


72 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

the manager of the hotel, and then several of the 
servants. From these people it was learned that 
the man with the scar on his chin was named 
Roberto Olano. He was a Chilian, and had come 
from Valparaiso to La Paz on business, so he had 
said, but what that business was nobody knew. On 
leaving the hotel but a short while before he had 
taken his baggage with him, and nobody knew 
where he had gone. 

“ This certainly looks very suspicious,'' was Pro- 
fessor Strong's comment. “ We’ll have to see if 
we can't trace him in some way." 

Wouldn't it be a good thing to watch the rail- 
road station at Alto La Paz? " asked Mark. “ He 
may be taking a train to get away." 

“ More than likely he'd hide right here in the 
city until he went away," grumbled Jake. “ He 
may have overheard our talk about taking that 
steamer for Valparaiso." 

The young explorers and their tutor talked the 
matter over for some time, and it was finally de- 
cided that Amos Strong and Frank should ride up 
to the ^railroad station, while the others searched 
throughout the city for Roberto Olano. Jake and 
the three others walked back to the market place. 


LOOKING FOR ROBERTO OLANO 73 

and then up one street and down another, looking 
into various business places and eating and drink- 
ing resorts. During this journey Mark took a num- 
ber of snap-shot photographs, and Sam and Darry 
purchased a few souvenirs. Hockley did nothing 
but look for the fellow with a scar on his chin, and 
grew impatient the moment any of the others de- 
layed this search. 

Guess you don’t care about my money ! ” he 
grumbled once, when the Boston youth stopped to 
buy some hand-made trinkets for his mother. 

“ Oh, yes, I do, Jake,” answered Sam. “ But we 
can’t spend every instant looking for that fellow. 
I’ve got my eyes open, the same as you have.” 

‘‘ It’s a good thing that chap has the cut on his 
chin,” came from Darry. He can change his 
dress, but he can’t disguise that very well.” 

‘‘ He might grow a beard over it,” suggested 
Mark. 

I don’t think he can, or he’d have a beard al- 
ready — to hide it. Hair won’t grow over some 
kinds of cuts.” 

Inside of three hours the boys had tramped from 
one end of La Paz to the other. They came to a 
halt at one of the plazas, where there were trees and 


74 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

shrubbery, and a pretty fountain. In the distance 
they could see Mount Illimani, the top covered with 
snow. 

Well, what shall we do next? ” asked Sam. 

“ I must confess I am getting tired,'’ said Darry. 

These uneven pavements are hard on a fellow’s 
feet.” 

All the others looked at Hockley. During the 
last hour that youth’s face had grown more sour 
each instant. 

Well, you fellows can give up the search if 
you want to ! ” he snapped. “ I guess you don’t 
care, anyway — it wasn’t your money ! ” 

Now, Jake, don’t talk like that,” answered 
Mark, quietly but firmly. “We do care, and you 
know it. But we simply don’t know what to do 
next. If you can suggest something, I, for one, 
will do what I can.” 

“ So will I,” added Sam and Darry, promptly. 

“ Darry says he’s too footsore to go farther.” 

“ No, I’m not,” came quickly from the Western 
youth. “ Just mention something worth doing, 
and I’ll do it.” 

But jake could not mention anything, so, after a 
few words more, all turned in the direction of the 


LOOKING FOR ROBERTO OLANO 75 

hotel. Here even the boy who had lost his purse 
was glad to sit down and rest. The hotel man- 
ager came up and asked if the purse had been 
found, and then suggested that he send for the 
police. 

“Wait until Professor Strong and Frank get 
back,’' said Jake, after consulting the others. 

A little later the others returned from the rail- 
road station at Alto La Paz. 

“Did you learn anything?” questioned Jake, 
eagerly. 

“ We did,” answered Professor Strong. “ That 
man left on a train about two hours and a half 
ago.” 

“ Where did he go to ? ” 

“ That we couldn’t find out. In fact, we didn’t 
find out that he was on the train at all until a little 
while ago. Then we met a stage driver who re- 
membered him.” 

“ Did he go to Lima, do you think ? ” asked Sam. 

“ Possibly. But there are plenty of places he 
could stop at before going that far. For all we 
know he may have gone only a few miles.” 

“ Didn’t you telegraph, or telephone? ” asked the 
lank youth. 


76 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

‘‘ Yes, I sent word ahead,” answered Amos 
Strong. “ But I got no reply. I left word, if any 
reply came, to send it to this hotel.” 

This was all that could be done, and with it Hock- 
ley had to be content. But he grumbled that even- 
ing to the other boys, until they were tired of listen- 
ing to him. 

“ Jake acts as if he almost thought we were 
responsible because he can’t get his money back,” 
said Darry to his chums. It makes me tired to 
hear him.” 

“ It’s his own fault,” answered Mark. “ If he 
hadn’t made a spread of his cash he wouldn’t have 
been robbed. Nevertheless, I am sorry for him, 
and I hope he gets his money back.” 

“We all hope that,” answered Frank. 

The night passed, and also the next day, and no 
word came in concerning Roberto Olano. The lo- 
cal authorities were consulted, and they promised 
to institute a search. Then a private detective 
called on them and asked to see Jake with regarci 
to recovering the lost money. 

“ I am of a mooch gooda to find de criminal,” he 
said, with a flourish. “ You say you employa me 
I catcha heem for you.” 


LOOKING FOR ROBERTO OLANO 77 

All right, go and catch him,” answered Jake, 
quickly. 

“You paya me first, den I catcha heem,” an- 
swered the detective, with another flourish, and 
then, in a rapid-fire talk, he explained how he would 
go to work to corner Sehor Olano, provided Hock- 
ley would first, however, advance him the sum — the 
very small sum — of fifty dollars. 

“ What ! give you fifty dollars ! ” cried the lank 
youth, sourly. “ Not much ! Why, that might be 
throwing good money after bad. No, Til not pay 
you a cent until you catch him.” 

“ But a-fifty dollars, he is only a leetle sum,” 
pleaded the native detective. 

“Not a dollar!” cried Jake. “ You catch him 
and then I’ll pay you.” And then the detective 
marched off with a much-injured air. It is, per- 
haps, needless to add that he never did anything 
on the case, and they never heard of him again. 


CHAPTER VIII 


DOWN THE COAST OF CHILI 

Hurrah for a life on the ocean wave ! ” 

It was Frank who uttered the words. He was 
standing on the deck of the coastwise steamer Pi- 
zarro, in company with Mark and Sam, gazing west- 
ward on the boundless Pacific. Darry, Jake, and 
Professor Strong had gone below, to arrange some 
things in their staterooms. 

The entire party had left La Paz several days 
before for the seacoast, and had there boarded the 
vessel which was to take them to Valparaiso. The 
professor had been fortunate in obtaining first- 
class accommodations for all, and every lad but 
Hockley was well satisfied. But as the lank youth 
was in the habit of finding fault, nobody paid at- 
tention to his remarks. 

During the time spent on shore Professor Strong 
had doi^e all in his power to locate Roberto Olano 
and to get back the purse that had been lost, but 
78 


DOWN THE COAST OF CHILI 79 

he had been unsuccessful. The man, guilty or in- 
nocent, kept himself well hidden, and not a trace 
of the missing money could be found. Hockley 
grumbled greatly because of this, and acted as if 
he thought the others were in some manner re- 
sponsible, and this at last caused Amos Strong to 
read the youth a stern lecture. 

‘‘ You must blame nobody but yourself, Jacob,” 
he said. You are too careless in handling your 
funds. I have done all that is possible to get your 
money back, and the others have done what they 
could. Now, I want you to find no more fault. In 
the future, you had better carry only a small amount 
of cash, and leave the rest in my care.” 

“ Huh ! they may rob you as quickly as they 
did me,” grumbled Jake. 

“If they do. I’ll be responsible, and you won’t 
lose anything,” returned the tutor, quickly. 

The Pizarro was a large steamer, making regular 
trips between Panama, Callao (the seaport for 
Lima), Valparaiso, and other ports along the west- 
ern shore of South America. Travel at that season 
of the year appeared to be somewhat light, so our 
friends had plenty of room. The cabin passengers 
were a mixture of South Americans, English, 


8o CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

Americans, Germans, and Spaniards, while in the 
steerage were a motley collection of natives, includ- 
ing Indians, and many Chinese. 

“ The Chinese are creeping into South America, 
just as they have crept into California and other 
places on the western coast of the United States,” 
answered Professor Strong, when this subject was 
mentioned by the boy from Boston. The author- 
ities here will have to be careful, or sooner or later 
they will be overrun by the yellow race.” 

‘‘ Well, I thought that Lima had an unusual num- 
ber of Italians,” observed Mark. 

You are right, Mark,” answered the tutor. “ A 
certain section of that city — across the Rimic River 
— is called Little Italy. But Chinese were numer- 
ous there, also, as you must have noticed.” 

‘‘What will be our next stopping-place?” ques- 
tioned Frank. 

“ Iquique, located near the northern end of Chili. 
It is a city of less than twenty thousand inhab- 
itants, but has considerable shipping. During the 
war between Chili and Peru, in 1879, there was a 
fierce naval battle in the harbor of Iquique, in which 
the Chilian man-o'-war Esmeralda was sunk by the 
Peruvian monitor Huascarf' 


DOWN THE COAST OF CHILI 8 1 

“ Where will we stop after we leave Iquique? ” 
asked Darry. 

Nowhere, Dartworth, until we reach Val- 
paraiso. If you will consult an atlas you will see 
that there are numerous other places along the 
coast of Chili, but they are all small and of little 
importance, commercially and otherwise.” 

“ Chili is certainly an odd-shaped country,” ob- 
served Sam. ‘‘ It’s shaped just like a hockey stick, 
with the lower end at the toe of South America.” 

You have hit it exactly,” answered the pro- 
fessor, with a smile. ‘‘ Chili is, roughly speaking, 
about twenty-five hundred miles long, from north 
to south, and not much over a hundred miles wide, 
east to west. The eastern boundary is the range 
of mountains that divides it from Bolivia and Ar- 
gentina — the same range that we explored in Peru, 
when you were fortunate enough to locate that 
treasure.” 

Then, to get into Argentina, we’ll have to cross 
that range again,” said Jake, making a wry face. 
‘‘ I was in hope we were through with mountain 
climbing.” 

Oh, don’t say that, Jake ! ” broke in Darry. 
“ It’s lots of fun climbing the trails on horseback — 


82 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

that is, if there isn’t an accident,” he added, quickly, 
thinking of their recent adventure. 

‘‘ We’ll not have to go on horseback unless we 
wish,” answered Amos Strong. The railroad is 
nearly open, and one can ride in the cars almost 
all the way from Valparaiso to Buenos Aires. It 
was a great feat of railroad engineering to get 
through the mountain range, but it has been accom- 
plished, and trains are now running regularly on the 
greater part of the line, although the cars don’t go 
through from one seacoast to the other.” 

“ Why, what do you mean? ” asked Sam, looking 
puzzled. 

“ The tracks are not all of the standard gauge. 
Some are narrow-gauge — as some of the old lines 
used to be in the United States — and so at certain 
points the passengers have to shift from one train 
to another.” 

Well, I’d like to ride on the railroad — but I’d 
like to ride on horseback, too,” said Frank. That 
is, if the trail wasn’t too narrow.” 

‘‘ We’ll see what we’ll do after we get there,” an- 
swered Professor Strong. ‘‘ For the present let us 
all try to enjoy this sail down the coast to Val- 
paraiso. It will take this vessel two days to reach 


DOWN THE COAST OF CHILI 83 

Iquique, and three to four days longer to reach 
Valparaiso, so you see you have quite a trip ahead.” 

I know where Td like to go when I get to Val- 
paraiso,” cried Sam, who had been studying a book 
of travels. “ I’d like to go out to the island of 
Juan Fernandez. It is only about four hundred 
miles west of the seaport we are bound for.” 

‘‘ What place is that? ” asked Hockley. ‘‘ What 
good will it do to go there ? ” 

“Oh, I know that place!” cried Frank. “It’s 
Robinson Crusoe’s island ! ” 

“ That’s it,” added the youth from the Hub. 
“ Say, wouldn’t it be great to visit Robinson Cru- 
soe’s cave, and all that I ” he went on, enthusi- 
astically. 

“ I am afraid you would be very much disap- 
pointed if you visited the island,” said Professor 
Strong. “ Since Alexander Selkirk, the so-called 
Robinson Crusoe, lived there, the island has been 
used at times for a penal colony, and everything is 
changed. It would not pay you to make the trip, 
even if you could find a boat going there, which I 
very much doubt.” 

It was a clear, balmy day, and the Pacific rolled 
under the steamer in long, regular swells. Far off 


84 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

to the eastward could be seen a faint haze that in- 
dicated the shore and the mountains behind it; to 
the westward was the boundless sea, stretching thou- 
sands of miles, to New Zealand and Australia. 

‘‘ What a tremendous old ocean it is ! '' remarked 
Frank, as he and Mark walked along the deck. 

'' Yes, and what a fuss it can kick up in a storm,” 
added his chum. 

Do you think wedl have a storm? ” 

‘‘ I am sure I don’t know. It doesn’t look like it 
now. But storms gather pretty quickly on the 
ocean sometimes.” 

Oh, I know that.” 

I was wondering if any of us would get sea- 
sick.” 

Do you want a dose of it ? ” 

^^Me? Not much! If I thought I was going 
to be sick. I’d be for going ashore and walking to 
Valparaiso ! ” 

You’d have your hands full — walking a couple 
of thousand miles I ” 

A little while later Darry came up to the two 
boys. His face showed that he had something un- 
usual to tell. 

What do you think! ” he cried. I just met 


DOWN THE COAST OF CHILI 85 

a man who knows Dan Markel — used to know him 
in Baltimore.” 

“ Who is he ? ” demanded Mark. . 

‘‘ His name is Paul Radell. He says he used to 
be in the wholesale grocery business there, but 
hard times made him give it up. He says he 
knows all about Markel.” 

“ Well, we know all we want to about him, too,” 
was Frank’s grim comment. 

Right you are,” added Mark. 

“ I had quite a talk with this Mr. Radell,” went 
on Darry. At first I thought he was a pretty 
nice kind of a fellow, but after a while I changed 
my mind. I rather fancy he is a good deal of a 
sport.” . 

What is he doing down here? ” 

“ Said he was going down to Argentina to spec- 
ulate in cattle.” 

'' If he is going to do that, he must have money,” 
observed Mark. 

‘‘ Oh, he seems to have money, but I don’t know 
how much. Some of those fellows can put up a big 
bluff,” added the youth from Chicago. 

On the following day all the young explorers met 
Paul Radell and talked to him. He was a stout 


86 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

man, with deep-set, speculative eyes, surmounted by 
bushy eyebrows. He was smoking a black cigar, 
and his breath smelt of liquor. 

It’s a great thing for you boys to make a tour 
of South America,” he said, pleasantly. “ A great 
thing. It will open your eyes to the possibilities 
down here. They tell me a fellow can make money 
twice as fast down here as he can at home.” 

‘‘ Oh, I don’t believe that ! ” cried Mark. I 
think the chances at home are as good as they are 
anywhere — but one must know what to go at.” 

Well, I came down here to get rich,” answered 
the man from Baltimore. “ I am going to invest 
my last dollar in cattle — if I can make the deal I 
have in mind.” 

“ Mr. Radell, have you heard from Dan Markel 
lately ? ” inquired Sam, suddenly. 

Paul Radell started, but quickly recovered. 

“ Why — er — no,” he stammered. You see,” 
he went on, smoothly, “ Markel has been away from 
home now a long time. I haven’t had any word 
from him since he went away.” 

“ Then he doesn’t correspond with you? ” 

“ No, since he has been away he seems to have 
forgotten me entirely.” 


DOWN THE COAST OF CHILI 87 

‘‘ Well, you can afford to have him forget you,” 
said Mark, bluntly. 

“ I understand from this young man ” — Paul 
Radell pointed to Darry — “ that he did not treat you 
fairly. I am sorry to hear that, and I must say I 
can’t understand it. He comes from an excellent 
family, and was always considered a pretty good 
sort.” 

“ Well, he has been a rascal since he came down 
here,” added Frank. 

“ And we could have had him sent to prison, if 
we had wanted to bother about it,” put in Jal^e. 
“ But those things take time, and we didn’t wish 
to delay our trip.” 

Which way are you bound, after you arrive 
at Valparaiso?” questioned the man from Balti- 
more. 

“ We are going to look around Valparaiso and 
Santiago first, and then strike out across Argentina 
for Buenos Aires,” answered Jake. 

“ Going by railroad? ” 

“ That isn’t decided yet.” 

‘‘ You ought to make part of the trip across the 
pampas on horseback,” said Paul Radell. “ A 
friend of mine was telling me that it is a wonderful 


88 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

trip — even better than a trip across our own West- 
ern prairies.” 

“ Hurrah ! that would suit me down to the 
ground ! ” exclaimed Darry, enthusiastically. “ My, 
how a fellow could ride over those pampas, if he 
had a good horse ! ” 

“ I am going out on the pampas on horseback — 
to look over the cattle situation,” pursued the man 
from Baltimore. Perhaps we might ride to- 
gether part of the distance.” 

‘‘ So we might,” answered Darry. The fact that 
Paul Radell loved to ride raised him somewhat in 
Darry’s estimation. 

‘‘ Let us talk it over again, before we get to 
Valparaiso,” said Paul Radell. And then the gong 
rang for dinner, and the talk came to an end. 


CHAPTER IX 


IN THE HANDS OF A SHARPER 

I CAN^T say that I like that man Radell/’ ob- 
served Frank to Mark, during the course of the 
meal. He tries to make himself agreeable, but 
there is a look in his eyes I can’t altogether trust.” 

‘‘ Just my way of thinking,” returned Mark. 

And his breath smells too much of liquor to suit 
me.” 

“ Oh, I don’t think he is any better or any worse 
than hundreds of other fortune hunters,” put in 
Sam, who overheard the talk. “ At the same time 
he isn’t exactly the companion I should choose for 
an outing.” 

During the following morning they saw Paul 
Radell and another man playing cards in the smok- 
ing-room of the steamer. No money was in evi- 
dence, yet Frank and Mark, who looked on 
through an open window, were satisfied in their 
minds that the two men were gambling. 

89 


90 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

‘‘ I guess we had better steer clear of him,” said 
Frank to his chum. “ He isn’t our style.” 

I noticed that Jake is growing more friendly 
with him,” returned Mark. ‘‘ I trust he doesn’t try 
to rope poor dummy in on one of his gambling 
games. It would be just like dummy to fall for 
it — just as he once fell into Dan Markel’s trap.” 

“ Oh, I guess Jake has learned his lesson,” an- 
swered Frank. 

The stop was made at Iquique, a rather uninter- 
esting seaport, and then the steamer turned her 
prow down the coast tow^ards Valparaiso. The at- 
mosphere was muggy, and all felt that a heavy 
storm was not far distant. 

We are now bound for the second largest sea- 
port on the Pacific coast,” said Professor Strong, as 
he gathered the young explorers around him on the 
deck. “ As you all know, San Francisco is the 
largest. I wonder if any of you can tell me what 
Valparaiso means.” 

It means Vale of Paradise,” answered Sam, 
who had been studying his guidebook. 

“ That is correct.” 

“If it is the second largest city, it must be quite 
a place,” said Darry. 


IN THE HANDS OF A SHARPER 9 1 

“ Valparaiso numbers close on to a hundred and 
fifty thousand inhabitants. It is built at the foot of 
some high hills, and contains many squares of fine 
buildings. The commerce is very large, and this is 
to be wondered at, since the harbor is a poor one, 
not to be compared to that at our own Golden Gate. 
There has been much talk about making the harbor 
better, but so far little actual work has been done.” 

“ I understand that all nations have business deal- 
ings in Valparaiso,” said Jake. 

“ That is true, Jacob. There are regular sailings 
to the United States, and also to England, Ger- 
many, and France. Strange as it may seem, I have 
heard more German spoken in Valparaiso than 
either Spanish or English.” 

It must be quite a trip from Europe to Val- 
paraiso,” observed Mark. 

By fast steamer the trip is made in five weeks. 
The ordinary freight steamers take seven or eight 
weeks. Sailing vessels take several months, all de- 
pending on the winds.” 

‘‘ Somebody told me that Chili was a rather un- 
healthy place,” said Frank. 

“ It is, in comparison with some other South 
American countries,” answered Amos Strong. 


g2 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

Every once in a while some sort of an epidemfc 
breaks out and carries off a great number of people. 
They also have terrific storms down here. One 
such storm, some years ago, destroyed the sea-wall 
of Valparaiso, and did much damage to the ship- 
ping.” 

What do they ship? ” questioned Jake. 

“ Wheat, corn, and fruits are handled in large 
quantities, and also native wines. From the mines 
come great shipments of copper, sulphur, and 
nitrates. I was told that last year the value of the 
nitrates shipped was between forty-five and fifty 
millions of dollars.” 

‘‘ Great Scott ! nitrates must be valuable ! ” mur- 
mured Darry. 

One of the most useful commodities in the 
world, Dartworth, and used in an endless number of 
ways. What is obtained in Chili is principally 
nitrate of soda, and that is used as a fertilizer, and 
also to obtain nitric acid and saltpeter.” 

“ How do they get the nitrate down to the ships, 
by muleback? ” asked Frank. 

‘‘ Some may be carried that way, Frank, but most 
of it is transported by railroads and by overhead 
tramways. Even though Chili is very narrow, the 


IN THE HANDS OF A SHARPER 93 

country has nearly three thousand miles of rail- 
roads, and more building every year. The total 
area of the country is a little over three hundred 
thousand square miles, and the population is about 
three millions.” 

“ Then the country must be pretty well crowded,” 
observed Sam. 

“ It is more crowded than any State in the United 
States,” answered Professor Strong. “ There are 
not many important cities, but towns and villages 
are exceedingly numerous.” 

‘‘ It’s a republic, isn’t it? ” questioned Jake. 

Yes, and the capital is Santiago, a city that lies 
not a great distance from Valparaiso. There are 
twenty-four provinces, which correspond to our 
States. They have a president and also a Con- 
gress. Chili has had several wars of importance, 
the greatest being that with Peru and Bolivia, in 
1879 to 1883. The national language is Spanish, 
but, as I mentioned before, in the seaports one hears 
a perfect babel of tongues.” 

“ I haven’t seen very many ships down here fly- 
ing the Stars and Stripes,” said Sam. 

You are right, Samuel, and that fact is much 
to be regretted. American shipping in these ports 


94 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

is very slim. Our business men do not seem to 
realize the golden opportunites that await them 
here. I trust the next decade will see a change/’ 
concluded Professor Strong. 

Frank was much interested in the machinery of 
the steamer, and he and Mark paid a trip to the 
engine room, where they struck up an acquaintance 
with the head engineer, a good-natured German. 
In the meantime, Darry and Sam went to the 
writing-room, to pen letters to be mailed at Val- 
paraiso, and Professor Strong accompanied them, 
to write up a diary of their travels. The professor 
had kept this diary ever since leaving New York, 
and he hoped some day to use it in writing a reg- 
ular book of travels, for publication, to be embel- 
lished with the photographs taken by himself and 
the boys. 

Hockley was left alone. He did not care for 
machinery, and he did not want to write or read. 
He was heartily tired of being on the ship, and he 
longed for the sights and amusements of some large 
city. 

This traveling around is getting dead slow,” 
he confided to Paul Radell, when the two chanced to 
meet near the door of the smoking-cabin. 


IN THE HANDS OF A SHARPER 95 

Don’t like it, eh ? ” queried the man from Balti- 
more, and he looked at Jake sharply. 

Oh, it’s good enough as far as it goes,” was the 
answer.. ‘‘ But^ like something more stirring than 
just riding on a steamer, or a train, or on horseback. 
When I started with the bunch I fancied we would 
visit a lot of big cities and see something that was 
new and full of life.” 

“ Yes, I know what you mean, Mr. Hockley,” an- 
swered Paul Radell. “ I am that way myself — I 
hate things that are slow. A merry life every day 
in the year is my motto. Nothing bad, you under- 
stand,” he added, hastily, as he saw Jake purse up 
his lips. “ But a good time, that’s all. Come on 
in and have a smoke with me,” and as he finished 
the man from Baltimore drew out his cigar case. 

Poor Jake! It was just such a temptation as he 
could not resist, and, looking around, to make sure 
that he was not observed, he entered the smoking- 
cabin and took a cigar. Paul Radell handed him a 
lighted match; and soon both were puffing away, 
Hockley doing his best to appear as if smoking were 
a regular habit with him, although he was a bit 
dubious about the weed, it looked so black and 
strong. 


g6 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

In an adroit manner Paul Radell questioned the 
youth from Pennsylvania regarding the movements 
of the explorers — where they had been and where 
they intended to go. He asked who the others 
were, and if their folks were wealthy. 

“ Sure, they are all pretty well off,” answered 
Jake, glibly. “If they weren’t, they couldn’t afford 
such a trip as this. But none of ’em are as rich as 
I am,” he added, boastfully. 

“ How about Professor Strong, is he rich, too ? ” 
asked the man. 

“ Oh, he’s pretty well fixed — owns a big board- 
ing-school, and some stock in a bank, and a land 
company.” 

“Of course you don’t carry much money around 
with you — it wouldn’t pay you to do that,” observed 
Paul Radell, as he blew a cloud of smoke to the 
ceiling. 

“We don’t carry a great deal of cash — not over 
two or three hundred dollars at the most. But we 
all carry letters of credit.” 

“ I see — so you can get money whenever you 
need it. A good idea. I carry ’em myself. But 
I find it mighty handy to have some cash on hand.” 

“ I’d have more cash if I hadn’t been cleaned out 


IN THE HANDS OF A SHARPER 97 

in La Paz,” said Jake, somewhat bitterly. But 
even as it is I’ve got about fifty dollars. When we 
get to Valparaiso I’ll get more.” 

‘‘ I hope you get that money back, but it will be 
doubtful,” said Paul Radell. He gave a yawn. 

Supposing we have a game of cards, just to pass 
the time ? ” 

Now, Jake had been warned about playing cards, 
and especially about playing with strangers. But 
he was out of sorts and reckless, and he readily con- 
sented to take a hand. Paul Radell led the way to 
a far corner of the cabin, where nobody was likely 
to interrupt them. 

It was the old, old story, and I have no desire 
to go into its details. Although he did not know it, 
Hockley had unconsciously placed himself in the 
hands of a sharper — a fellow of the same stripe as 
Dan Markel. This fellow allowed him to win a 
game or two and then proposed that they put up a 
small amount of money on the next game, “ just to 
make it more interesting.” This was likewise won 
by Jake, and then the stakes were increased. Then 
the lank youth lost, and lost again. He was now 
highly excited, and on the next game put up all the 
money that remained in his pocket. 


98 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

“ I hope you win — you deserve it,’’ said Paul 
Radell, blandly. “ But if you lose, don’t blame me, 
Mr. Hockley.” 

“ Who said anything about blaming you ? ” 
growled Jake. “Go on and play. I guess Pm 
sport enough to take what comes.” 

A few minutes later the game came to an end, 
and Hockley had lost his money. He had been 
cheated, but he did not know this. His face 
blanched a little, and he gave a short gasp. 

“ Have another game ? ” asked Paul Radell, 
coolly. 

“ I — er — I guess not,” stammered Jake. 

“ Might as well. I’ll give you a chance to win 
back what you have lost.” 

“ I haven’t any more cash to put up.” 

“ I’ll take your I O U, or you can put up an order 
on 36our credit people in Valparaiso.” 

“ I — I guess I’ll quit,” faltered Hockley. “ I’ve 
got to — er — write some letters,” he continued, and 
a minute later left the smoking-room. His head 
was in a whirl, both from the card playing and 
from the smoking of the cigar, which had proved 
to be so strong that it was positively sickening. 

Left to himself, Paul Radell calmly put away 


IN THE HANDS OF A SHARPER 99 

the cards and the money he had won, lit a fresh 
cigar, and then strolled out on the deck. As he 
walked he stroked his chin reflectively. 

“I wonder if I could work the scheme?” he 
mused. “ It would be a bigger thing than .was ever 
attempted before. There is no doubt but that the 
whole crowd is rich. Their dress, and the state- 
rooms they occupy, show that. I must see Dan as 
soon as we reach Valparaiso, and see what he thinks 
of the plan. If we could put it through we’d make 
a barrel of money out of it, yes, a big barrel of 
money at that ! ” 


CHAPTER X 


A CRASH IN THE STORM 

Poor Jake felt very sore because of his loss, but 
he did not dare to say a word to the other boys or 
to the professor about the happening. 

“ I’m cleaned out completely — not a dollar left ! 
he mused, bitterly. “ I hope I don’t have to use 
any cash before I can get something on my letter of 
credit. If the occasion does come up — well. I’ll 
make some excuse — say I left my money in my 
trunk, or something.” 

The wind was increasing, and that evening the 
sun went down behind a bank of dark-looking 
clouds. Out on the ocean the whitecaps com- 
menced to show themselves, and the steamer began 
to labor in the heavy sea as she pursued her 
course. 

I guess we are in for a spell of dirty weather,” 
observed Darry, as he walked forward with Mark 
and Amos Strong. 


100 


A CRASH IN THE STORM lOI 

‘‘ It certainly looks that way, Dartworth,” re- 
sponded the professor. 

“ Are storms dangerous down here ? ” questioned 
Mark. 

“ A storm at sea is always more or less danger- 
ous, Mark. But these steamers are all well built, 
and I do not look for trouble. But the extra pitch- 
ing of the vessel may make some of us seasick.*’ 

Directly after the evening meal all of the young 
explorers went on deck again. By this time the 
wind was blowing at a furious rate, and the swells 
of the Pacific, were mounting higher and higher. 

“ It’s coming right enough,” observed Frank. 
“ Gracious ! just listen to that gale whistling over- 
head ! ” 

I suppose we’ll be ordered to stay inside soon,” 
said Mark, and he was right; the order came but a 
few minutes later. The sea was now dashing 
wildly against the side of the steamer and occa- 
sionally a wave, higher than the others, would send 
the spray flying clear across' the deck. 

‘‘ It’s queer it doesn’t rain,” observed Darry, as 
he watched the angry ocean through one of the 
cabin windows. 

Very little rain falls in this portion of the 


102 


CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 


globe/’ answered Professor Strong. “ In some 
parts of Chili the total rainfall during a year is 
practically nothing. Were it not for the dews and 
mists, all the vegetation would be burned up.” 

“ I — 'I guess ril go to bed,” said Jake, with some 
hesitation. 

“ Why, it’s early yet,” returned Sam, consulting 
his watch. 

Well, I’m tired out, and besides, I’ve got a little 
headache,” went on the lank youth, and then lost 
no time in disappearing in the direction of his state- 
room. 

“ I shouldn’t wonder if Jake were seasick, whis- 
pered Frank to Mark. 

“ He certainly looked that way around the 
mouth,” was the reply. “If he is. I’m sorry for 
him.” 

What Frank had surmised was correct. The 
smoking of the strong cigar and the pitching of the 
vessel had proved too much for the lad from Penn- 
sylvania. His head was in a whirl, and his stomach 
seemed to be “ turning inside out,” and it was all he 
could do to get to his stateroom. 

“ Oh, why did I come on this miserable trip ! ” he 
groaned, as he threw himself down on his berth. 


A CRASH IN THE STORM 


103 


‘‘ Td give a thousand dollars to be back in the 
States again! No more South American trips for 
me ! And then he rolled over and over, groan- 
ing dismally. 

“ I don’t think we’ll get much sleep to-night,” 
observed Sam, as, some time later, the other boys 
sought their staterooms. This ship is rolling like 
a tub ! ” 

“ We’ll have to strap ourselves in our berths, to 
keep from pitching out,” returned Darry with a 
grin. 

‘‘ I trust none of you feel seasick,” remarked 
Amos Strong, as he smiled faintly. 

“ I’m all right,” answered Frank. 

So am I,” added Mark. 

‘‘ I feel just a bit queer,” replied Sam. ‘‘ I think 
I’ll be all right when I lie down.” 

“ That’s me, too,” put in Darry. This old ship 
is worse than a galloping horse on a rough trail I ” 

“ But this storm isn’t as bad as that blizzard on 
the mountain,” said Frank, quickly. 

“ Wait — it isn’t over yet,” chimed in Sam. 

‘‘ Oh, don’t croak ! ” cried the others, in a chorus. 

I think I’ll go and see Jacob before I retire,” 
said Professor Strong, and made his way along the 


104 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

rolling passageway until he reached the door to 
Hockley’s stateroom. He knocked several times 
before there was any response. 

‘‘What’s wanted?” asked Jake, at last, in surly 
tones. 

“ It is I, Mr. Strong. Can I do anything for 
you, Jacob?” asked the tutor, kindly. 

“ No, sir.” 

“Are you sick?” 

“ A little— not much.” 

“ I am sorry to hear it. If you get worse, let me 
know.” And then, as there was no reply, Amos 
Strong walked away and entered his own state- 
room. 

Mark and Frank had a room directly opposite to 
that occupied by Hockley, and next to them were 
Sam and Darry. All of the boys were soon un- 
dressed, and, after saying their prayers, they pro- 
ceeded to make themselves as comfortable as pos- 
sible. 

“ This night is going to be a corker, and no mis- 
take ! ” was Mark’s comment as he lay down. “ Just 
listen to that ! ” he added, as a big wave hit the side 
of the steamer with a bang. 

“ I’m thankful we are not out in a sailboat,” an- 


A CRASH IN THE STORM IO5 

swered Frank. A rocky coast like this must be 
highly dangerous.” 

“ Oh, I reckon the captain knows enough to 
stand out in deep water, Frank. It would be fool- 
hardy to stand in close in such a blow as this.” 

“ I wonder if this will delay us.” 

“ Not very much, I guess. This steamer has 
powerful engines.” 

But the pounding of the sea might break the 
rudder or the screw.” 

‘‘ Let us hope not. Good-night,” and then both 
boys turned over and tried to lose themselves in 
slumber. 

On and on labored the steamer, now on the crest 
of a gigantic wave, and anon deep in the trough of 
the sea. The night was pitch black, not a single 
star showing in the firmament. The regulation 
lights shone but dimly through the flying spray, 
and an extra lookout was kept at the bow, to report 
any danger. 

After tossing around for an hour or more, all the 
young explorers fell asleep, and Professor Strong 
also rested in slumber. The tutor was such a con- 
firmed traveler that the war of the elements did 
not disturb him in the least. 


I06 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

Suddenly from out of the darkness came a wild 
yell of alarm, almost drowned out by the roaring 
of the wind. Then came the sight of several lights, 
off the port bow. Orders were at once given to 
reverse the engines, and the pilot did all he could 
to steer to starboard. 

But these movements were next to useless, for the 
other vessel, a big lumber schooner, loaded deeply 
with timber, was too close. There was a crash, fol- 
lowed presently by another, that shook the steamer 
from stem to stern. 

At the first crash Mark and Frank were awak- 
ened; at the second each lad was hurled from his 
berth to the floor. Frank came down first, and 
his chum landed across him. 

“ Wha-what is it? ” gasped Mark, when he could 
speak. 

Get off of me!” spluttered Frank. Yo-you 
are smashing m-my ribs ! ” 

Mark tried to regain his feet. Hardly had he 
done so when there came a third crash, and he went 
down again, and this time it was Frank who rolled 
on top. Then the light went out, leaving them in 
total darkness. 

It was enough to alarm anybody, and the boys 







• . ‘ r 





,^C iJ'', 






w. 


<! 


rt w 


>»•' 


t— , I 


4?*- 


I'* 


■* 




r*’ 


' -ti*. 


V 7 = 


,’i: 


'' i 


;?v 


W* 


«kf, 






t r» 


/ 


-*i 


4 t! 


# 

, Ju , *!/■ 

I • J 

r *" A 


•■il 


f4m„ 

' >4£i 

r ,. ?"5jW| w \ ffcMJia - ▼ TWVL^H 

'SS® 'y 

■'•■ '’J'i:'';-*!, it 

f :?T 

-V*^ if * , 
jT • r^. 

iia ^ 

:it ■ ’ 





-> 


1*1 


>: 


»4. 


'i^i 






fJ: 


J3 






U-M 


?^V- 


•Ih- 


Jf. 


j*V 




*■'■ ■ t 


« * 


•‘iiT 











^. A?r 


*r 


Jm 1' 1 '‘j2*‘ '■«« •t'l* 

>’-f' " i 

'V ' c '0 ' ' ' ■* <1- ' . 



A CRASH IN THE STORM IO7 

were thoroughly frightened. Both got up as 
quickly as they could, and each caught the other by 
the arm. 

“ What’s the matter ? ” 

“ We’ve struck something! ” 

‘‘ Do you think we’ll sink? ” 

“ Let us get out of here ! ” 

Fortunately both remembered the location of the 
stateroom door, and, hand in hand, they made their 
way towards it. As they came out into the passage- 
way they heard loud cries, the clanging of bells, 
and the blowing of a whistle. 

‘‘ Save me ! Save me ! ” came in a mad yell, and 
Hockley appeared from his stateroom. “ Save me I 
I don’t want to drown I ” 

“ Is that you, Jake?” called out Mark, and just 
as he spoke the electric lights lit up again, so that 
the boys could see one another. 

‘‘Yes! yes! Is the boat sinking? Will we be 
drowned ? Come ahead on deck ! Maybe we’ll 
have to get into one of the small boats I ” gasped 
Hockley. He was as white as a sheet and trembling 
so that his teeth chattered. 

Other stateroom doors were opening, and Sam 
and Darry and the professor appeared, and so did 


108 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

other passengers, clad in their night garments, and 
some of them carrying other wearing apparel and 
hand baggage. Among the number was Paul 
Radell, and his manner showed that he was as badly 
scared as Hockley. 

“ Are we going down ? ’’ he demanded, clutching 
Professor Strong wildly by the arm. 

“ I do not know, but I hope not,” was the reply, 
and then Amos Strong pushed the sharper to one 
side. Let us go on deck,” he added, to the boys. 
“ Perhaps the danger is over.” 

“ But what do you think was the matter? ” asked 
Hockley. 

“We struck something — another ship most 
likely.” 

Keeping close together, the boys and the tutor, 
along with a number of others, hurried to the deck 
of the steamer. The wind was still blowing a 
gale, and the spray was flying in all directions. The 
captain was on deck, and was issuing orders with 
great rapidity. 

“Be careful, that none of you fall overboard!” 
called out Amos Strong, to make himself heard 
above the roaring of the wind. “ Better keep close 
together ! ” 


A CRASH IN THE STORM IO9 

‘‘Are we sinking?” gasped Jake. “Oh, don’t 
tell me that we are going down ! ” 

“ Stay here and I will try to find out just what 
happened,” answered the tutor. 

It was no easy matter, amid such confusion, to 
learn just what had occurred. But at last it was 
made plain to everybody that the other craft had 
rammed the steamer on the port side, about twenty 
feet back from the bow. A dozen feet of the rail 
had been carried away and also a portion of one of 
the cabins, and there was a small hole in the side, 
above the water line. 

“ Then we are in no danger of sinking? ” inquired 
Amos Strong of one of the under officers. 

“ Not the slightest,” was the ready reply. “ Please 
tell the other passengers that there is no danger.” 
And word was passed around as rapidly as possible. 
Then the passengers were told to go back into the 
cabins or their staterooms, for the wind was causing 
the steamer to toss and pitch as greatly as ever. 

“Was anybody hurt?” asked Sam, after the 
worst of the excitement was over. 

“One deckhand and one passenger,” answered 
a man standing near. “ None of the injuries are 
serious.” 


no 


CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 


“ What of the vessel we struck, or that struck 
us ? questioned Mark. 

'' I don’t know anything about her.’* 

‘‘If we are in no danger of going down, we’ll 
have to stand by the other ship, to give assistance, if 
necessary,” said Professor Strong. “ It is too bad 
that it is so dark.” 

He had hardly spoken when a colored light flared 
up on the bow of the steamer. It lit up the scene 
for a considerable distance, so that the lumber 
schooner could be seen distinctly. 


CHAPTER XI 


A DISCOVERY IN VALPARAISO 

‘‘ She seems to be safe ! ’’ 

Yes, but she may be taking in water rapidly/’ 
The steamer will have to stand by to take off 
her crew if she is in any danger.” 

Such were some of the remarks passed while the 
colored light lit up the scene. Soon it went out, 
leaving the darkness as intense as before. 

The lumber schooner had displayed no signal 
of distress, and that was taken as a good sign. 
Presently another colored light flared up, and 
then the schooner and the steamer came a little 
closer. 

‘‘ Ahoy the schooner ! ” was the cry from the 
captain of the steamer, in Spanish. 

What d’ye mean by running into us ? ” snarled 
a deep bass voice, in English. 

‘'Any danger of going down?” was the next 
question asked, also in Spanish. 

Ill 


II2 


CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 


“ No, but you smashed up our bow some. Are 
you all right? ” 

We have some damage, but nothing dangerous,” 
answered the captain of the steamer. What 
schooner is that ? ” 

The Rosemary, bound for Valparaiso. What 
steamer is that? ” 

'' The Pizarro, also bound for Valparaiso.” 

Then we’ll see you later, and collect damages,” 
growled the heavy voice, in English. 

It is we who will collect damages,” answered 
the captain of the steamer, in Spanish. And then 
the two vessels drifted apart in the darkness, and 
the Pizarro proceeded once more on her way. 

‘‘ There is a promise of a lawsuit,” observed 
Mark, when he heard of the talk that had taken 
place. “ Who is guilty. Professor? ’’ 

“ I am sure I do not know, Mark. The steamer 
had her lights lit and a lookout on guard. Whether 
the schooner was showing the proper lights or not 
remains to be found out. If she was, I suppose 
they will put it down as due to the storm, with no- 
body to blame.” 

Assured that there was no danger of sinking, the 
passengers commenced to retire again. With 


A DISCOVERY IN VALPARAISO II3 

them went the boys, including Jake. The lank 
youth had been completely frightened out of his 
seasickness, but although he felt better he was as 
sour as ever. 

“ The captain of this boat ought to be locked up 
for such a smash,” he growled. ‘‘ Why, we might 
all have been drowned! It’s gross carelessness, 
that’s what it is ! ” 

“ I think the storm was to blame,” returned 
Darry. 

“ Humph I A big steamer like this can easily 
weather such a blow. It was rank carelessness, I 
tell you I ” went on Jake, and then he shuffled off to 
his stateroom. 

“ dummy makes me weary in the bones ! ” de- 
clared Sam, as he and Darry turned in. I thought 
he was going to turn over a new leaf, but he seems 
to be as bad as ever.” 

“ I guess it isn’t in him to turn over a new leaf — 
at least, not yet,” answered the Western boy in a 
disgusted tone. 

By morning the storm had blown itself out, and 
before noon the sun shone as brightly as ever. Now 
that all danger was past, the passengers were in- 
clined to laugh over the fact that the shock of the 


1 14 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

collision had thrown many of them out of their 
berths. 

“ Oh, I thought it couldn’t be much,” said Paul 
Radell, in an off-hand manner, as he lit a fresh 
cigar. These steamers are very strongly built, 
you know.” 

“ Well, it was a pretty bad smash,” answered 
Mark. “ I want no more of them.” 

“ Have you made up your mind where you are 
going to stop when you get to Valparaiso? ” ques- 
tioned the sharper, curiously. 

“ I don’t know the name of the hotel. We leave 
those things to Professor Strong.” 

‘‘ The Strand is a good English hotel, so I’ve been 
told.” 

Perhaps we’ll stop there. You might ask Pro- 
fessor Strong.” And Mark turned away, for Paul 
Radell’s manner was not to his liking. A little 
later he saw the sharper in conversation with Hock- 
ley. 

The remainder of the run to Valparaiso was made 
without mishap, and about the middle of one after- 
noon they ran into the harbor. All the passengers, 
including the young explorers, crowded on the deck 
to see the sights. 


A DISCOVERY IN VALPARAISO II5 

My! what a lot of shipping! was Sam’s com- 
ment, as he gazed at the many vessels at the docks 
and in the roadstead. 

“ And look at the flags ! ” added Mark. “ Nearly 
every flag under the sun! There are German, 
French, and English, and over yonder is a Spanish 
steamer, and a Japanese sailing vessel.” 

'‘Yes, and here comes a Dutch freighter, bound, 
I suppose, for Holland, and just back of her is a 
bark flying Old Glory, the best flag of all! ” 

“It assuredly is a conglomeration of nations,” 
said Frank. “ What flag is that? ” and he pointed 
to one on a small warship lying at anchor. 

“ That’s the flag of Chili,” answered Professor 
Strong. “ And the flag on the low-lying ship to 
the left is that of Argentina. Yes, it certainly is a 
conglomeration, as you say. I am only sorry for 
one thing, boys.” 

“ That Old Glory isn’t better represented ? ” put 
in Darry, quickly. 

“ That’s it. Our foreign shipping is not what it 
should be. We are allowing foreign ships to carry 
cargoes that should be carried in our own bottoms.” 

An hour later found them ashore. Their 
baggage had been inspected and passed, and was 


Il6 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

sent to a hotel the professor had selected, not the 
one mentioned by Paul Radell, but a newer affair, 
which had been recommended by a merchant-friend 
in Lima. The young explorers and their tutor were 
driven to the hostelry in a carriage which was as fine 
as any they could have engaged in New York. 

Part of this city looks rather old,” remarked 
Frank, as they rode along. 

“ Valparaiso consists really of two towns,” an- 
swered Professor Strong. The old town was 
called Puerto and the new Almendral. The place 
dates back to 1 544. It was taken by Admiral Drake 
in 1578, and by Sir Richard Hawkins in 1594. 
Then, in 1600, some Dutch pirates came along and 
took possession.” 

Dutch pirates ! ” exclaimed Hockley. ‘‘ Are 
there pirates down here? ” 

Not now, Jacob. That happened three hun- 
dred years ago. Since that time Valparaiso has 
been the scene of several bombardments and insur- 
rections, and has been visited by numerous fires and 
earthquakes. One earthquake was so severe that 
it ruined many beautiful buildings.” 

‘‘ I don’t want to be here when they have an earth- 
quake,” returned the lank youth. ''We’ve had 


A DISCOVERY IN VALPARAISO II7 

enough earthquakes and volcanic eruptions al- 
ready/’ 

“ All right, Jake, we’ll have the earthquakes 
chained up while you are here,” remarked Darry, 
dryly. 

'' Huh ! you needn’t poke fun at me ! ” grumbled 
Hockley. You’d be scared yourself, if a big 
earthquake hit us.” 

“ I reckon we’d all be scared,” said Frank. 
“ Don’t talk about it.” 

“I don’t look for any earthquakes,” said Amos 
Strong. “ They are not so frequent as all that.” 

As they rode along, the young explorers could 
readily see that Valparaiso was a busy place. The 
shipping was immense, and many of the numerous 
stores seemed to be doing a thriving business. Signs 
in Spanish predominated, but there were also many 
in English and in German. 

The English signs make a fellow feel a little 
at home,” was Sam’s comment. '' I’d hate to get 
in a country where they didn’t speak a word of 
United States.” 

Well, they are just as up-to-date here as any- 
where,” said Mark. “ Electric lights, telephones, 
trolley cars, and all.” 


Il8 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

‘‘ And back on the next square I saw a window 
full of typewriters and talking machines,” added 
Frank. 

And there is the advertisement of a moving pic- 
ture show,” said Darry. “ What more could a fel- 
low want than that?” And this remark caused a 
general laugh. 

The hotel was located at the end of a public 
square, where there was a tiny park. It was a 
roomy, comfortable place, with a courtyard in the 
center, used in warm weather for dining purposes. 
The whole party had adjoining rooms on the sec- 
ond floor. 

“ Did you notice the help?” remarked Frank, to 
his chums, while getting ready to dine. Some are 
natives, some English, and a few of them French 
and German.” 

“ I guess they cater to all nationalities,” was 
Sam’s reply, and the youth from the Hub was 
right. When they entered the dining-hall they were 
assigned to a table at one end, over which an Eng- 
lish waiter presided. More than this, the waiter 
brought them a bill of fare written out in English 
and French, so that the boys had no difficulty in 
ordering what they wanted. 


A DISCOVERY IN VALPARAISO II9 

“ I wonder what became of that Paul Radell,” 
said Mark, during the progress of the meal. 

“ 1 saw him get into a carriage right after we 
drove off/' answered Sam. “ But I don’t know 
where he went.” 

‘‘ His carriage followed ours,” said Jake. “ When 
we stopped here he looked in, at us and then went 
on. 

“ Perhaps that Strand Hotel is near here,” sug- 
gested Darry. 

“ No, the Strand is on the other side of the city,” 
answered Amos Strong. 

‘‘ You don’t suppose he was following us, do 
you ? ” asked Hockley, quickly. 

“ Why should he follow us ? ” demanded Sam. 

I’m sure I don’t know — I was only wondering 
if it could be so.” 

I didn’t like that chap at all,” said Mark. “ Per- 
haps I am doing him an injustice, but he struck me 
as being of the same stripe as Dan Markel.” 

“ That’s the way I sized him up, too,” returned 
Frank. 

“ There are a great many such fellows in this 
world,” said Amos Strong. “ They wander around 
from one country to another, always in the hope 


120 


CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 


that they are going to make money easily — strike 
some soft snap. Some of them are pretty shrewd, 
but often they overreach themselves, as was the case 
with Markel.'' 

“ I wonder if Markel will bob up again? ” mused 
Darry. 

‘‘If he bothers us again we ought to have him 
locked up,’' burst out Frank. “ I am sick of being 
tormented by such a rascal.” 

“ I guess we are all sick of him,” said Mark. 

“ By the way, while we are in Valparaiso, I want 
to get some money,” said Jake. As he spoke, he 
felt his face growing red, thinking of how he had 
allowed Paul Radell to get his money away from 
him. 

“ More money, Jake? Say, you must have spent 
a lot on shipboard ! ” observed Darry. 

“ Oh, I — er — spent some for souvenirs before we 
sailed,” stammered the lank youth. 

“We can all go to the bankers in the morning,” 
answered Professor Strong. “ After that we can 
visit the principal places of interest in Valparaiso, 
and then make arrangements to visit Santiago, the 
capital.” 

“How far is that?” questioned Frank. 


A DISCOVERY IN VALPARAISO 


I2I 


‘‘ About seventy-five miles. We can go there by 
train.’' 

“ Is Santiago much of a place? ” asked Darry. 

“ Yes, it is about one-third larger than Val- 
paraiso, and, being the capital of the country, it has 
many beautiful buildings, including a university and 
a library, as well as the government structures.” 

The whole party took time in eating, and then 
walked into the reading-room of the hotel, to look 
over the newspapers, especially such as were printed 
in English. The Shipping Register and the Val- 
paraiso News interested them, although they saw 
no news that concerned any of their number. 

Presently Darry tired of the papers and walked 
around the hotel, to where a side veranda over- 
looked an alleyway. Here it was almost dark, and 
nobody was present but an old German, who was 
dozing away in a wicker chair. 

Darry walked to the end of the veranda and 
stood looking out into the darkness beyond. As he 
stood there he heard a murmur of voices. Then 
came the slight crack of a safety match and his at- 
tention was attracted by a tiny flare of light. A 
man standing out in the alleyway was lighting a 
cigar. 


122 


CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 


As Darry looked, he recognized Paul Radell. 
Beside Radell stood another man, talking earnestly. 
Just as the match went out Darry recognized the 
second individual. It was Dan Markel. 


CHAPTER XII 


WAS IT A PLOT ? 

Darry was considerably surprised, and not with- 
out reason. Radell had mentioned Markel several 
times, but the youth had not expected to see the 
two men together and so soon. Evidently Radell 
had sought Markel out immediately upon landing. 

“ I wonder if it is possible that they are in league 
with each other?” mused the Western lad. “It 
looks like it, from the earnest way in which they are 
discussing something.” 

Darry wanted to call some of the others, but he 
was afraid that, if he walked back to where they 
were, the men might disappear in the darkness. 
Both men were smoking, and the lights from their 
cigars glowed like fireflies in the darkness. 

The Western boy was naturally brave, and with- 
out stopping to think twice he made his way to the 
end of the veranda, climbed over the railing, and 
dropped to the yard below. Then with caution he 
123 


124 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

moved along the side of the alleyway to where 
Markel and Radell were talking as earnestly as 
ever. 

Of course, if we could do it, it would be a big 
thing,” he heard Dan Markel say, as he drew closer. 
“ I know they are all wealthy.” 

I don’t see why it can’t be done,” returned Paul 
Radell. “ It has been done before. I imagine you 
read about that Gilbert affair. That crowd got 
thirty thousand dollars.” 

“ Yes, so I heard. But this would be different. 
You would have to get ” 

Dan Markel broke off short, for just then a man 
carrying a lantern came into the alleyway. He 
marched up to the two men and eyed them sus- 
piciously. 

“ What are you doing here ? ” he demanded, in 
Spanish. 

‘‘ Oh, we only came here to talk,” answered Paul 
Radell. 

“ Very well,” answered the newcomer. “ But I 
must clean the alley.” And he set down his lantern. 
He had not seen Darry, and the boy moved back 
into the shadow of a doorway. 

“ Come, we’ll find another place,” said Radell to 


WAS IT A PLOT? 


125 


Markel. “ And then we’ll get down to details.” 
And with this both men walked rapidly away. 
Darry wanted to follow them, but they disappeared 
around a corner, and were swallowed up in a crowd. 

“ Those fellows are up to some scheme,” thought 
the Western youth, as he went back into the hotel. 
“ I wonder what it is ? ” 

When he rejoined the others, he told them of 
what had happened. All listened with interest to 
what he had to say. 

‘‘ I believe that Paul Radell and Dan Markel are 
tarred with the same stick!” cried Frank. “We 
had better keep our eyes open for both of ’em.” 

“ Does anybody know what they meant by speak- 
ing of the Gilbert affair? ” questioned Mark. 

“ I never heard of it,” answered Jake, after a 
pause. 

“ I think I know what they referred to,” an- 
swered Professor Strong, gravely. “ An English- 
man named Gilbert, a very rich nobleman, was trav- 
eling some time ago in Peru, when he was made a 
prisoner by some mountain brigands. They de- 
manded a heavy ransom, and some of the news- 
papers stated that his relatives paid thirty thousand 
dollars for his release.” 


126 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

“ Do you think Radell and Markel would go into 
any such scheme as that? ” demanded Sam. 

I do not know what to think, Samuel. I know 
that Markel is a rascal of the first water, and I am 
inclined to believe that Radell is no better.” 

“Whom can they be plotting against?” asked 
Frank. 

“ Maybe they are plotting against us ! ” cried 
Mark. “ You know how Markel threatened us, in 
that letter he wrote.” 

“ I believe they are plotting against us ! ” ex- 
claimed Hockley, and as he spoke his face grew 
pale. “Yes, I am almost sure of it!” he added, 
after a moment’s thought. 

“What makes you sure?” questioned the tutor, 
quickly. 

“ ril tell you. You remember how friendly that 
Paul Radell was on the steamer? Well, he asked 
me a lot of questions about our crowd — where we 
were from, and where we intended to go — and he 
said we must have money, to be sporting around in 
this fashion.” 

“ What did you tell him ? ” asked Frank. “ Come, 
tell us everything, Jake; this is important.” 

“ Why, I — er — told him we all had money — that 


WAS IT A PLOT? 127 

is, that our folks were rich. I didn’t want him to 
think we were poor.” 

“ And I suppose you bragged a little, too,” added 
Darry, rather bitterly. 

'‘No, I didn’t brag. But I told the truth — ^that 
all of us could get all the money we needed at any 
time.” 

" That was enough,” put in Mark. “ Ten to one 
they are plotting to make money out of us.” 

" What, by making us prisoners ? ” cried Sam. 
" They would have a job doing that with the six 
of us.” 

" Maybe they are planning to carry Jake off 
alone,” said Darry, mischievously. " He’s the rich- 
est fellow in the crowd.” 

At these words poor Jake grew paler than before. 
Only too well he remembered how he had bragged 
to Paul Radell about the wealth of his father. Now 
he wished he had not done it. 

" I — I won’t give ’em the chance,” he muttered. 
“If they try to lay their hands on me they’ll get 
hurt.” 

“ I think I’ll look into this,” said Amos Strong. 
“ I’ll try to locate Markel and Radell in the morn- 
ing. And, boys, when you go out after this, keep 


128 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

together, and don’t give these men, or any outsiders, 
any chance to play any tricks on you.” 

After that there was a long discussion, but 
nothing came of it, and, a little later, the crowd 
retired. Professor Strong did not have much to 
say, but he was greatly worried — in fact, more so 
than Hockley. The boys were under his care, and 
he felt that he must do all in his power to keep 
them from harm. He knew many of the particulars 
of the Gilbert affair — how the Englishman had been 
enticed to visit a mountain resort, and then made a 
prisoner and carried off to a pass where the author- 
ities could not locate him, and how he had been 
threatened with torture and even death if the money 
his captors demanded was not forthcoming. 

Markel and Radell have heard all about that af- 
fair, and it has set them to hatching out some plot 
of their own,” reasoned the tutor. “ Markel is 
angry enough at us to try almost anything, and 
Radell most likely got Jacob to tell him all about 
our crowd, and our plans, and just how wealthy Mr. 
Hockley and all the others are. The question is, 
whether Markel and this Radell have nerve enough 
to try anything really desperate. It’s a long trip 
from Valparaiso to Buenos Aires, especially if we 


WAS IT A PLOT? 


129 


make part of the journey across the pampas on 
horseback. Perhaps, after all, we had better travel 
mostly by train — ^that is, if I can’t round up those 
two men before we leave here.” 

Early in the morning Amos Strong callel a car- 
riage and was driven over to the Strand Hotel. 

“ Is there a man stopping here by the name of 
Paul Radell ? ” he asked. 

The clerk looked over the register, and then 
shook his head. 

“ No such party here,” he said. 

‘‘ Is there a man here named Dan Markel ? ” 

“ Not now. Mr. Markel stopped here last week 
for a few days.” 

Do you know where he went to ? ” 

‘‘ No, sir.” 

This was all Professor Strong could learn, and 
he returned to his own hotel. Here he got the 
names of all the other hotels in Valparaiso, and 
called them up, one after the other, on the telephone. 
At first he could find no trace of either Markel or 
Radell, but at last located the pair at a place called 
The Golden Crown. 

“ What sort of a hotel is The Golden Crown? ” 
he asked of a merchant whom he had met the even- 


130 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

ing before — a rich gentleman who had lived in the 
seaport for several years. 

“ The Golden Crown ? ” repeated the merchant. 
“ It isn’t a hotel you would want to stop at with 
your boys.” 

“ Not a very nice place? ” 

“ It is nice so far as outward appearances go. 
But some rather shady characters stop there, and 
there is a good deal of drinking and gambling.” 

Amos Strong asked no more questions, but went 
in to breakfast, being joined in the dining-hall by 
the boys. Hockley was the last down, and his eyes 
showed that he had slept but little. Truth to tell, 
the lank youth had had a fearful nightmare, in 
which he had dreamed that he was being carried off 
to sea by Radell, Markel, and some others, who pro- 
posed to bury him alive on Robinson Crusoe’s island. 

“ I have a little private business to attend to,” 
said the tutor, when the meal was nearly over. “ I 
think you had better remain around the hotel until 
I get back.” 

“ I was going to the bankers after that money,” 
said Hockley. “ Don’t you think it would be all 
right, if one or two of the others went with me? ” 

“ Oh, I guess you can go as far as that, Jacob. 


WAS IT A PLOT? 


I3I 

But be careful and don’t go into any out-of-the-way 
places.” 

“ Who wants to go along? ” asked the lank youth, 
looking at the others. 

“ I’ll go,” answered Frank, when none of the 
others spoke. He hated to see Jake left out in the 
cold, even though he did not care much for the big 
youth. 

“ I’ll go along, too, if you want me,” added 
Mark, who always liked to be with his old chum. 

All right, come ahead,” said Hockley. 

“ What will you two do? ” asked Frank, turning 
to Sam and Darry. 

“ I’m going to study the guidebooks, to find out 
what I am going to see,” answered the boy from 
Boston. 

“ I’ll do the same — until you fellows come 
back,” put in Darry. 

Hockley had the address of the bankers in his 
pocket, and was told by the hotel clerk where the 
banking-house was located. It was quite a distance, 
but the three lads decided to walk. In the mean- 
while Professor Strong hurried off in a carriage, to 
see if he could locate Markel and Radell. He had 
determined to learn, if possible, what those men in- 


132 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

tended to do, and, if it was anything underhanded, 
stop them, even if he had to have them arrested on 
suspicion. 

As the three boys walked along one thorough- 
fare after another of the seaport, they were much 
interested in the sights to be seen. Both on the 
streets and in the shops all nationalities were repre- 
sented. 

“ It certainly is a cosmopolitan city and no mis- 
take,” observed Mark. 

“Look at the bird store!” cried Frank, and 
stopped at the place. “ Did you ever see so many 
different kinds of birds I ” 

“ And look at the parrots ! ” exclaimed Jake. 

“ Puts me in mind of those we saw along the 
Orinoco and the Amazon,” came from Frank. 

“ These folks certainly have some elegant pot- 
tery ware,” observed Mark, as they stopped at the 
next shop, where some beautiful pots and vases 
were on exhibition. 

“ They aren’t anything to that urn from which 
Darry and I got that treasure ! ” cried Frank. “ My, 
but that was a beautiful urn, if ever there was 
one I ” 

“ I reckon the contents made it beautiful,” an- 


WAS IT A PLOT? 133 

swered Jake, with a little sigh. He could not help 
but remember how his own treasure hunt had come 
to naught. 

The banking-house was presently reached, and 
the three boys entered the office. Here several 
men were present, and the lads had to wait their 
turn to be served. 

“ Now what can I do for you? asked a clerk at 
last, and turned to Hockley. 

“ Why, I want to get some — — ” began the lank 
youth, and then his gaze chanced to turn toward a 
big window opening on a side street. He gave a 
start. “ Hello, there is that fellow now ! ’’ he cried. 
“ How did he get here? I must catch him ! ” And 
turning on his heel, he started from the banking- 
house on a run. 


CHAPTER XIII 


SOMETHING ABOUT A WONDERFUL RAILROAD 

Frank and Mark were waiting on a settee in a 
corner, and they did not notice Jake's hasty de- 
parture from the bank until he was on the outside 
steps. Then both sprang up simultaneously. 

“ There goes Jake! " 

What is he after? " 

‘‘ I don’t know, but he is in a mighty hurry.” 
Come on after him, Frank. Something is 
wrong, I am sure.” 

“ I don’t believe he has his money yet.” 

“ Neither do I. He wasn’t at the counter more 
than a second.” 

Thus speaking, both boys left the banking building 
and hurried out on the pavement. Here a crowd 
was passing, and for the moment they could see 
nothing of Hockley. Then they caught sight of a 
figure just vanishing around a corner. 

“ There he goes, Mark ! ” 

134 


A WONDERFUL RAILROAD 1 35 

“ I saw him. He must be after somebody. Won- 
der who it can be ? ” 

“ Markel maybe, or Radell.” 

“We had better go after him.*' 

“ Sure." 

Both boys broke into a rim, and darted around the 
corner after Hockley. Then came a chase of sev- 
eral blocks. 

“ Look ! look ! ’* cried Frank, suddenly. “ Oh dear, 
there is more trouble ! If that isn’t the worst yet ! " 

They had come up until they were less than a 
hundred feet behind Jake. At this point the thor- 
oughfare was rather narrow, and the shopkeepers 
had many articles of merchandise piled on the side- 
walks. From out of one of the shops had come a 
man bearing on his head a flat tray on which rested 
a variety of plaster-of-paris images. Hockley had 
run full tilt into this vendor, hurling him on his 
back and scattering the images in all directions with 
disastrous results. 

When Frank and Mark reached the spot, Jake, 
who had sprawled on top of the image vendor, was 
picking himself up. On all sides lay the white 
casts, many of them broken to bits. As soon as 
the lank youth arose the vendor did likewise. He 


136 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

was not much hurt, and his first thought was for his 
demolished stock in trade. 

“You kill me! You ruin me! I am a poor 
man ! he bawled, in his native tongue. “ Oh, that 
I should live to see such destruction! Never more 
can I sell those beautiful statues! They are 
crushed forever, and so my heart is crushed also! 
Oh, wretch that you are! A thousand years in 
prison would not be too many for you ! You shall 
be hung for this, yes, hung ! ” And then in a 
frenzy he caught Hockley by the arm and the throat. 

“ Hi ! hi ! le-let go ! spluttered the unfortunate 
boy. “ Don’t cho-choke me-me ! I didn’t mean to 
smash your images.” And he did his best to shake 
the man off. 

“ You shall pay me ! Every dollar shall be 
paid!” bawled the vendor. “Call the police! I 
will have this villain arrested! Oh, that such ruin 
should come to such an innocent man like me ! ” 
And now his face took on a woebegone look as he 
gazed at the destruction around him. 

“ Don’t call the police — I’ll pay you,” said Hock- 
ley, growing scared. “ It was an accident,” and 
then he spoke to the man in the best Spanish he 
could command, and presently the fellow calmed 



Hockley had run full tilt into this vendor.— P a^e 135 



« ' 


• * 
4 


• ^ 

V •- 





4 




H 

* - « 







. <# 







t < 


« 




!» * 




A WONDERFUL RAILROAD 1 37 

down a little. But he insisted upon it that Hock- 
ley had ruined him and that never again could he 
make such beautiful statues as had been broken. 

‘‘ Don’t you believe him,” put in Mark. These 
fellows make those images in molds, and turn ’em 
out by the hundreds. They sell ’em from ten cents 
up. There are some in the window now, marked 
ten cents to a dollar.” And he pointed to the win- 
dow of the shop from which the traveling vendor 
had come. Sure enough, the statues were there, 
with prices plainly marked on each. 

This was lucky for Hockley, for the fellow at 
first demanded ten times as much as what the 
broken pieces were worth. But when he saw that 
the tall youth, backed up by his chums, did not in- 
tend to be intimidated, his demands became more 
reasonable, and in the end he named a sum that was 
only a little above actual value. 

Might as well let him have it, Jake,” said Mark. 

Remember, you knocked him flat. That’s worth 
something.” 

I suppose it is,” grumbled the lank youth. All 
right. I’ll pay him. But — er — I haven’t got the 
money. I didn’t have a chance to get it from the 
bank. Can you lend me some ? ” 


138 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

Certainly/’ answered Mark, and Frank said the 
same, and between them the vendor was paid off. 
Each of the boys took along a little image, as a 
memento of the affair. 

“ What caused you to start on such a run ? ” 
asked Frank, as they turned back in the direction 
of the banking-house. 

Oh, I didn’t tell you, did I? ” cried Jake. ‘‘ I 
was after that fellow who cleaned me out in La 
Paz, the fellow they said was named Roberto 
Olano.” 

“The man with the scar on his chin?” cried 
Mark. 

“ That’s the chap. Just as I was going to ask for 
my money at the banking-house I chanced to look 
out of a window and I saw that fellow passing. I 
ran out to stop him, but when he saw me he took 
to his legs and beat it for all he was worth. I went 
after him — and you know the rest.” 

“ Are you sure it was Olano ? ” queried Mark. 

“ Oh, yes, I saw that scar. Besides, as soon as 
he caught sight of me he ran. He wouldn’t do that, 
if he wasn’t Olano.” 

“ And if he wasn’t guilty,” added Frank. 

“ Maybe we had better try to follow him,” su 


A WONDERFUL RAILROAD 


139 


gested Mark. ‘‘ Although he must be a good 
distance away by this time.” 

It’s no use, he’ll hide,” answered Hockley. 
“ No, I’ll let him drop for the present. But I am 
going to keep my eyes open for him as long as we 
are in Valparaiso,” he added. 

The three lads were soon at the banking-house 
again, and Hockley had little difficulty in obtaining 
the cash he wanted. 

“ Better put it in an inside pocket,” suggested 
Mark, after he and Frank had been paid back the 
money they had advanced. 

“ Oh, nobody will get this, don’t fear,” answered 
the lank youth, boastfully. Nevertheless, he placed 
the larger portion of the cash in the inside pocket 
of his coat, securing it with a safety pin. 

It would seem that all of our enemies are at 
present in Valparaiso,” was Frank’s comment, as 
they walked in the direction of the hotel. “ I wish 
we could round ’em all up and get clear of them for 
good and all.” 

“ We’ll round ’em up some day,” answered Mark. 
‘‘ Evildoers invariably reach the end of their rope 
sooner or later.” 

‘‘ I don’t think this Roberto Olano has anything 


CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 


140 

to do with Markel or Radell/’ said Jake. “ More 
than likely he doesn’t even know them.” 

‘‘ Well, you can’t always tell,” returned Frank. 
“ You know the old saying about birds of a feather 
flocking together. If Olano is a crook he may be in 
with other crooks. Those fellows often work hand 
in hand.” 

Arriving at the hotel, the three boys found Sam 
and Darry in the reading-room, poring over some 
magazines. They listened with interest to what 
the others had to relate. 

‘‘ What a pity you didn’t capture the scar-faced 
rascal!” murmured the Western youth. “Maybe 
you might have gotten your money back.” 

“If Olano hasn’t spent it,” put in Sam. “ That 
sort of chap usually spends money as fast as he 
gets hold of it.” 

“ What I would like to do would be to give him 
a good thrashing,” muttered Hockley. “ After I 
was done with him I shouldn’t care if I got my 
money or not. I’d put him in a hospital — that 
would be better for all concerned than putting him 
in jail.” 

“ Maybe you are right, Jake,” returned Mark. 

All sat down, to await the return of Professor 


A WONDERFUL RAILROAD I4I 

Strong. While so doing, Sam pointed out an article 
he had been reading in one of the magazines. 

‘‘ It is about this new railroad that is to be opened 
between Valparaiso and Buenos Aires,” said the 
youth from the Hub. “They call it the Trans- 
andine Railroad, because it crosses the Andes 
Mountains. The tunnel under the mountains is al- 
most finished, and when completed the trains will 
run across South America from the Atlantic to the 
Pacific.” 

“ That’s a pretty long stretch,” observed Darry. 

“ The road will be nearly nine hundred miles 
long.” 

“ What about the tunnel under the Andes ? ” asked 
Frank. 

“ The tunnel is two miles long and is located two 
miles above sea level, so that, after leaving Val- 
paraiso, a train must climb two miles up into the 
mountains before it reaches that hole through the 
rocks, and then it must climb down two miles on 
the other side before it reaches the great plains, or 
pampas, of Argentina.” 

“ It must have been a great bit of engineering 
work, to build such a tunnel,” was Mark’s com- 
ment. 


142 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

It took several years to do it. Previous to 
that time, they had a railroad on this side of the 
Andes, and also another railroad through Argentina. 
They were of a ^different gauge, and that’s the rea- 
son, as the professor told us, that travelers, in going 
from one ocean to the other, have to change cars.” 

I wish we could go through to Buenos Aires by 
train,” said Hockley, with a sigh. “ It would be 
less tiresome than on horseback or muleback, and 
safer, too.” 

‘‘ Besides the tunnels, big and little, there are nu- 
merous wonderful bridges along the route,” con- 
tinued Sam. ‘‘ One bridge spans a gorge between 
two mountains that is hundreds of feet deep. Think 
of putting up bridges like that! ” 

‘‘ Well, think of putting up the bridges between 
New York and Brooklyn,” answered Mark, not a 
little proudly. 

And think of the tubes under the Hudson 
River,” added Frank. And the subways ! I 
rather guess one engineering feat is about as dif- 
ficult as another.” 

'' U we take a run up to Santiago we’ll see part 
of the railroad,” said Darry. ‘‘ And we’ll prob- 
ably see more of it in Argentina. We’ll not want 


A WONDERFUL RAILROAD 1 43 

to travel all the way across the pampas on horse- 
back.’' 

“ I imagine that the pampas are a good deal as 
our Western prairies used to be years ago, before 
everything was settled,” remarked Frank. If they 
are, they’ll just suit you, Darry.” 

“ Yes, I’ll love to get on a good horse and have 
a free-and-easy ride,” returned the Western youth. 

It will seem like a touch of old times, when I 
used to ride around the ranch in Montana.” 

“ Boys, I am afraid, after this trip through Cen- 
tral and South America is finished, we’ll be sorry 
that it wasn’t longer,” commented Mark. All 
told, we’ve had some fine times — and I’ve gotten a 
dandy lot of photos.” 

‘‘ And though we have been in peril a number of 
times we have always escaped with a whole skin,” 
added Sam. 

I think I’ll be glad to get back,” said Hockley. 
'' It hasn’t been the fun I anticipated. I don’t care 
for tramping through the wilderness, or climbing 
the mountains. I’d like to spend more of my time 
in the big cities, having a good time.” 

‘‘ Well, we’ve visited plenty of cities, big and lit- 
tle,” answered Frank. The other day I counted 


144 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

up over sixty cities where we had stopped. That's 
not so bad." 

Oh, it's been a glorious trip, glorious ! " cried 
Sam. “ When I get back home it will take me six 
months to tell my mother all about it ! " And his 
eyes beamed in anticipation of the pleasure he would 
be able to afford his widowed parent. 

The boys waited until well past noon, and still 
Professor Strong did not return. Then, when it 
got to be after the lunch hour, one after another 
the young explorers commenced to grow uneasy. 

“ It is strange what is keeping him," said Mark, 
at last. 

“ I move we have something to eat," said Jake. 
“ I’m as hungry as a bear." 

There seemed nothing else to do, so they filed 
into the dining-hall and sat down at the table. 
They ate slowly, but when they had finished, Amos 
Strong was still missing. 

“What do you make of this?" asked Darry, 
soberly. 

“ I don't know what to make of it," answered 
Mark. 


CHAPTER XIV 


THE DISAPPEARANCE OF PROFESSOR STRONG 

Mark, I think we ought to do something/’ said 
Darry, after two hours more had gone by and the 
young explorers had not heard a word from Pro- 
fessor Strong. When he went away he said he 
would be back by noon at the latest. Now it is 
after four o’clock.” 

‘‘What would you suggest?” asked the New 
York youth. 

“ I don’t know, I’m sure. I thought that you 
might have something in mind.” 

“ We might notify the police,” put in Jake. 
“ Send out an alarm, you know.” 

“ He wouldn’t like that,” returned Sam, “ espe- 
cially if everything was all right. He may simply 
be following up Markel and Radell.” 

“ I shouldn’t care if I was sure he hadn’t gotten 
into trouble,” said Darry. “ But he never stayed 
away like this before without letting us know.” 

145 


146 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

When night came on and no word was received 
from the professor, the young explorers became 
more alarmed than ever. 

“ Do you know what I think I’ll do ? ” said Mark. 
‘‘ Telephone to The Golden Crown Hotel and see 
if he is there.” 

“ There won’t be any harm in doing that,” an- 
swerel Sam, and the others nodded in approval. 

The hotel mentioned was called up, and presently 
Mark got a clerk on the wire. 

“ Is this The Golden Crown Hotel ? ” asked the 
youth. 

“ Yes.” 

“ I wish to learn if a Professor Strong called 
there to-day and if he is still there.” 

“ Who are you ? ” 

‘‘ I am Mark Robertson, one of the boys traveling 
with him.” 

‘‘ Oh, I see.” There was a pause and a buzz of 
voices near the other end of the wire. “Hello! 
Professor Strong was here this morning, but went 
away about noon.” 

“ About noon ? ” repeated Mark. “ Do you 
know where he went ? ” 

“No. Wait a minute.” There was another 


THE DISAPPEARANCE OF PROFESSOR STRONG I47 

buzz from the distance. “ Hello ! Professor 
Strong went away with two men who had been 
stopping here, a Mr. Markel and a Mr. Radell.’' 

‘‘ Where did they go ? ” And now Mark was 
growing excited. 

“ I don’t know.” 

“Can you find out? This is very important,” 
went on the New York youth, and his voice trem- 
bled with eagerness. 

There followed a long pause, and at last Mark 
received another call. 

“ One of the porters here says that Professor 
Strong acted as if he was sick, and he says the 
other two men said they would take him to a doc- 
tor. All of them got in a carriage and drove away, 
but we don’t know where they went.” 

“ When was this ? ” Mark was so excited now 
he could scarcely speak. He felt certain that the 
tutor had been the victim of foul play. 

“ About noon, as I said before. That’s all I can 
tell you.” And now the man at the other end of 
the wire hung up his receiver, so that Mark could 
ask no more questions. 

When the other lads heard what the New York 
youth had to tell, all were more alarmed than ever. 


148 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

Various were the speculations concerning what had 
taken place, but all were agreed that Professor 
Strong had become the victim of some underhanded 
work, carried out by Dan Markel and Paul Radell. 

Markel said he would square accounts, and this 
is how he is doing it! ’’ said Frank, bitterly. ‘‘ If 
Professor Strong was really sick and yet able to do 
anything, he would have telephoned for some of us 
to come to him.’’ 

‘‘ I believe Markel drugged him, or something like 
that,” put in Darry. ‘‘ And he got Radell to aid 
him in his dirty work. The question is : What will 
they do with the professor? ” 

“ That isn’t the question for us. Our question 
is: What are we going to do?” cried Mark. 

We’ve got to do something. We can’t sit still 
here, knowing that the professor is suffering at the 
hands of those rascals I ” 

“ Let us call a carriage and ride over to The 
Golden Crown,” suggested Darry. We’ll be safe 
enough if we stick together.” 

“ I’m going armed,” put in Frank. “ I’ll take 
no more chances than are necessary. That merchant 
said The Golden Crown didn’t have much of a 
reputation.” 


THE DISAPPEARANCE OF PROFESSOR STRONG 1 49 

“ We — er — we don’t want to get into trouble,” 
faltered Hockley. 

“ You can stay behind if you wish, Jake,” an- 
swered Mark, quickly. 

“ Oh, I’ll go along.” 

‘‘ It would be better for one of us to stay here,” 
said Frank. “ Then, if Professor Strong conies, 
he can tell him where we have gone.” 

‘‘ That would be best,” said Darry. ‘‘ Jake, you 
might as well stay.^’ 

‘‘ Well, if you think it would be best,” answered 
the lank youth, and his freckled face showed his 
relief, 

A carriage was called, and the four young ex- 
plorers entered it. The driver looked somewhat 
surprised when told to take them to The Golden 
Crown, but he asked no questions, and started off 
immediately. 

It was quite a drive, and it was dark by the time 
they came in sight of the hotel, a two-storied build- 
ing of stone, set back from the street and sur- 
rounded by fine shrubbery. 

“ Wait here for us,” said Mark, to the driver, as 
they alighted at the door. At once some porters 
came out, to assist with baggage, and they were 


150 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

much chagrined when they discovered that the boys 
had none and did not intend to become guests at 
the hotel. 

“ Wait a moment/’ said Mark, in Spanish, to 
the porters. “ I want to talk to you.” And then 
he mentioned Professor Strong, and Markel and 
Radell, and asked if they could give any informa- 
tion, and at the same time he suggestively jingled 
some silver that was in his pocket. 

Porters the world over are always on the lookout 
for tips, and these Chilians were no exception to 
the rule. All told of how the three men had de- 
parted in a carriage driven by a man known as Bo- 
latero, a fellow not connected with the hotel, and 
who was willing to take any kind of a job so long 
as it paid. They said that one of the men had acted 
as if he was dazed when he got into the carriage, 
and the party had driven away rapidly. But no- 
body could tell where they had gone. 

‘‘Did you see them go?” asked Mark, of the 
head porter, and the man nodded in the affirmative. 

“ Do you know this Bolatero well ? ” questioned 
Frank. 

“ Oh, yes, ever since he has driven a carriage,” 
was the reply. 


THE DISAPPEARANCE OF PROFESSOR STRONG I5I 

Do you know where he keeps his carriage, or 
where he lives ? ” went on Mark. 

Si, senor/" 

“ Then come with us and show us the places,” 
went on Mark. “ I will pay you well.” And then 
he passed out some silver coins to the other porters, 
and showed some bank bills to the head man. 

The head porter chanced to be a fellow who was 
somewhat miserly, and the thought of obtaining 
more than an ordinary tip was pleasing to him. 
More than this, on several occasions he had thrown 
business into the hands of Bolatero without being 
properly compensated for so doing, and so he had a 
grudge against the carriage driver. He quickly 
consented to go with the boys and do all in his 
power to locate the man who had carried Amos 
Strong away in his turnout. 

They first visited a public square a dozen blocks 
away, where, so the porter said, Bolatero was in the 
habit of standing to solicit fares. But he was not 
there, and the other carriage drivers said he had not 
been around since morning. 

‘‘ Then let us go to where he lives,” said Mark, 
quickly, and they accordingly turned into a poorer 
quarter of Valparaiso. Here the streets were nar- 


152 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

row and dirty, and houses and pavements swarmed 
with people. Drinking-places were numerous, and 
the sights to be seen around them filled the youths 
with disgust. 

I am glad we came armed,’' whispered Darry 
to Sam. This doesn’t suit me at all.” 

Fortunately the lads did not have to enter any 
of the houses. On the stone steps in front of one 
of the places sat a fat and greasy-looking Chilian 
woman with an equally fat and equally greasy-look- 
ing child in her arms. 

“ That is Bolatero’s wife,” said the porter. 
“ Evidently he is not home, or she would be inside, 
serving him with something to eat.” 

“ Ask her if she knows where her husband is,” 
returned Mark. ^ 

This was done, and the woman declared that her 
husband had not been home since early morning. 

‘‘ And he has left me no money with which to do 
the marketing,” she added, sourly. “ He is a 
wretch, to leave his wife and child in this way. He 
goes away, and drinks, and drives around and has 
a good time, and I can sit here and starve ! ” And 
she wiped her greasy face on her sleeve. 

‘‘ She doesn’t look much like starving,” whispered 


THE DISAPPEARANCE OF PROFESSOR STRONG 1 53 

Sam. “ She is probably as lazy as her husband is 
dissolute.” Nevertheless, as they drove off, he 
tossed her a small coin, and the others did the same, 
and she ducked her head and smiled grimly after 
them. Not a word did she ask as to why they 
might wish to see her husband. Probably just then 
she felt so bitter she did not care. 

‘‘ Let us go to where he stables his horse,” sug- 
gested Frank. “ He is bound to come back with 
the animal sooner or later.” 

That’s the talk ! ” cried Darry. 

It won’t be a very nice place to visit,” said the 
porter. ‘‘ But I think you will catch him there.” 

The stable was some distance away, and they had 
to drive slowly, for the street had been torn up. 
Just as they turned a corner the porter called on 
the driver to stop the turnout. 

There is Bolatero now,” he whispered, pointing 
to one side of the torn-up highway. 

The boys looked, and saw a large carriage, of 
ancient pattern, standing with two wheels in a ditch. 
On the seat of the turnout sat a bloated-faced 
Chilian, crying angrily to his steeds, and cracking 
his whip on their backs. The horses looked tired 
enough to drop, and they were covered with foam 


154 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

and dust. To escape the cruel lashing the team 
commenced to turn, almost upsetting the carriage. 

‘‘ Stop that ! ’’ cried Darry, and leaped to the 
street. “ Don’t hit them again, you brute ! Can’t 
you see they are tired to death? You hit them 
again and I’ll take the lash and hit you ! ” 

As my old readers know, the Western boy was 
a great lover of horseflesh, and to see an animal 
abused made his blood boil with indignation. He 
strode up to the steeds, turned them straight, and 
shook his fist at the driver. The Chilian stared in 
amazement, and the lashing came to an end. 

“ Who are you?” asked Bolatero, thickly. He 
had been drinking heavily. 

I’ll show you who I am if you abuse those 
horses again,” answered Darry, in broken Spanish. 

You’re a brute to strike them like that. Don’t 
you dare to do it again.” 

To this the driver did not answer, simply because 
he did not know what to say. 

‘‘If you do not want me any longer, I will go,” 
said the hotel porter, nervously, for he was afraid 
there might be a fight. “ But I have earned my re- 
ward, have I not ? ” he added, anxiously. 

“ Yes,” answered Mark, and passed over a small 


THE DISAPPEARANCE OF PROFESSOR STRONG 1 55 

bank bill. This the porter promptly pocketed, and 
then he lost no time in retreating to a distance, so 
that the carriage driver might not notice him. 

“ Your name is Bolatero, I believe,'^ said Mark, 
coming up and eyeing the fellow sternly. 

“ And what if it is?” demanded the fellow, eye- 
ing him suspiciously. 

“ I want to talk to you.” 

“ What do you want ? ” 

“ I want to know where you have taken Professor 
Amos Strong, and the two men named Markel and 
RadelL” 


CHAPTER XV 


A THRILLING RESCUE 

At first the Chilian carriage driver was inclined 
to deny all knowledge of Professor Strong and the 
men who had been with him. But when Mark and 
the others threatened him with arrest, and made a 
move as if to call an officer, he weakened. 

‘‘ I know not where they are now — I drive them 
early in the morning, that is all,’^ he faltered. 

“ I do not believe you,” answered Mark, sternly. 

You know where they are, and unless you take 
us to the place at once I will have you locked up 
for abduction.” 

‘‘Abduction?” cried the carriage driver. 

“ Exactly.” 

“ I did not abduct the gentleman — he was with 
the other men.” 

“ Take us to him at once, or it will go hard with 
you,” put in Frank. 

All talked to the fellow so sternly that in the end 
156 


A THRILLING RESCUE 


157 

he was badly frightened. He said he would go 
with them, in their carriage, provided he was first 
allowed to put up his own team. This was agreed 
to, Darry saying he would assist. All the boys saw 
to it that Bolatero should not escape. 

I am hungry, I must have something to eat,’’ the 
man said, after feeding the horses. 

You can wait,” returned Mark. 

“ It is a long drive — ten miles at least.” 

“ ril get you some food,” answered Sam. But 
you must not drink another drop while you are 
with us.” 

Bolatero demurred, but the young explorers were 
firm, and Sam and Frank brought some food from 
a near-by eating-place. Then they drove off, Bo- 
latero giving the necessary directions. He sat on 
the front seat, with the driver of the carriage on 
one side of him and Mark on the other, while Frank, 
Sam, and Darry occupied the seat behind. 

Now don’t you try to play us any trick,” 
warned Mark, as they drove along. “We are 
armed, and we mean business. You take us direct 
to where you took Professor Strong, or we’ll see to 
it that you are sent to prison.” 

“ I am an innocent man,” pleaded the Chilian. 


158 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

“ I did only what the men asked of me, and I re- 
ceived only my regular fare — not one cent more ! ’’ 

“ You knew that Professor Strong was being 
carried off against his will.” 

‘‘ Not so, senor. The other men said he was 
their friend, and that he was sick here,” and Bo- 
latero tapped his forehead. “ They said they would 
take him to a private hospital, where he would soon 
recover.” 

And you took him to that hospital ? ” asked 
Mark. 

‘‘ I am an innocent man,” pleaded the Chilian. ‘‘ I 
know not what sort of a place it is.” 

“Well, you take us there as soon as you can, and 
wedl find out.” 

The team was urged on, and soon Valparaiso was 
left behind and they turned into a country road 
lined on either side with fine houses. Then they 
turned into a side road, leading around some rough 
rocks. 

“ I don’t like this much,” whispered Sam. “ Per- 
haps he is going to play us some trick.” 

“ He wouldn’t dare — ^with so many of us in the 
carriage,” answered Darry. “ But keep on guard, 
to prevent a surprise.” 


A THRILLING RESCUE 


159 


Two miles more were covered, and then they 
made another turn. Here the mountainous road 
was far from good. 

You are sure you are right? ” questioned Mark, 
catching Bolatero by the arm. 

''Si, senor” 

" How much further have we to go ? 

Only a short distance. The place is yonder,” 
and the Chilian pointed with his hand. 

They made another turn, and here the highway 
was better. Beyond was a side road, thickly lined 
with trees and bushes. At a distance a light shone 
through the darkness and the dim outline of a house 
could be faintly seen. 

“ There is the place,” said the Chilian. 

You brought them here? ” questioned Mark. 

To the very gate, but no further. They said 
they did not want me to come in, that they could 
assist their friend. They paid me off and told me 
to go — and I went.” 

‘‘ I think we had better go up to the house on 
foot,” said Frank. If they hear the carriage 
coming they may be on guard, and we may have 
trouble. They may even put Professor Strong out 
of sight and say he is not here.” 


l6o CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

Frank’s suggestion was considered a good one, 
and all the boys alighted from the carriage. 

“ You remain here, with the other driver,” said 
Mark to Bolatero. “If you dare to leave, it will 
be the worse for you. We know where to find 
you in the city.” 

“ I will remain,” answered the Chilian, surlily. 

The boys advanced through the darkness until 
they reached the vicinity of a small stone house, 
set in a wilderness of bushes. The house was in 
a sad state of neglect, and looked deserted saving 
for the light of a lamp which shone from the win- 
dow of a room at one end. 

“ Let us look in at the window,” suggested Mark, 
and to this the others readily agreed. 

They listened, but could hear no sound. Then 
they hurried towards the window. As they did 
this, Sam stumbled over a stone in the darkness and 
went down, uttering a short exclamation as he 
did so. 

“ Who is there? ” cried a voice from out of the 
darkness. 

“ Dan Markel ! ” ejaculated Mark, and turned in 
the direction from whence the voice had proceeded. 

“ Don’t you dare to come in this house ! ” roared 


A THRILLING RESCUE l6l 

the voice of the man from Baltimore. “ Stand 
where you are, all of youI'V^ 

Who is coming? ’’ asked another voice, and now 
some of the lads recognized the tones of Paul 
Radell. 

‘‘ Those boys.’’ 

“ The ones who are traveling with Strong? 

“ Yes.” 

“ Then we are caught ! ” murmured Radell, and 
his tones showed his anxiety. 

“ Not yet ! ” answered Dan Markel. Keep 
back! ” he shouted, out of an open window. “ If 
you advance another foot it will be at your own 
peril.” 

“ Markel, tell us what you have done with Pro- 
fessor Strong,” called out Sam. 

“ I don’t know anything about him.” 

Yes, you do. We know you brought him here.” 
They must have discovered that carriage 
driver,” murmured Paul Radell. “ I told you not 
to trust him.” 

‘‘ Well, I had to get Strong here somehow,” an- 
swered Dan Markel, in a low voice. I didn’t think 
they’d find out anything before morning, and then 
we would have been on our way to the mountains.” 


1 62 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

“Professor Strong! Are you here?'’ shouted 
Darry. “ Professor Strong ! ” 

He called out at the top of his lungs, and some 
of the others joined in. Then came a crash and a 
shutter from an upper window fell to the ground. 

“ Help ! help, boys ! ” came in a muffled voice. 
“ I am bound and helpless I ” 

“ It’s the professor ! ” cried Mark. “ Come on ! ” 
And regardless of consequences, he ran for the 
nearest door of the building. The others followed 
in a bunch, each drawing his weapon as he ad- 
vanced. 

But their caution was unnecessary, for with the 
crashing down of the shutter from above, and 
the rush of the four boys, the nerve of both Markel 
and Radell seemed to desert them. They fled to 
the rear of the house, bolted through a door, and 
rushed forth into the darkness. 

As the two men went out the boys came in. 
While Darry and Sam went to the rear, following 
Markel and Radell, Frank caught up the lamp and, 
with Mark on his heels, mounted the stairs. He 
heard a call from a room and, finding the door 
locked, promptly kicked the barrier down. 

The sight that met their gaze caused Frank and 



The sight caused Frank and Mark to stare in wonder 

Page 162 . 







-N » 


« 

• ' • 









4 


^ . 



4 



• ^ 



/ 


I 


t 


4s 


•H ■ 

%»• 

- 4 


t 


t 









• -r^: 




« ■ 



« • 


» ■ 

^ i 



4 







«♦ 







1 


I 



4 

^4 


ft 


» 



« 




-I ' • 


I « 
> 

’ k 


n I 


^ i 





> 


s 



f 


0 ‘ 


m- 


t 

• P 


I 




K 

V . 


* 


t 




» « 


\ < 

« 4 - 



I 

« 


tik 


t 


' * . 





» 


A 


♦ •* 


« 



-r..*;# ^ r ,V 






* 4 




/.- •* 

' ' ► 


« •' 

' 

1* ♦ 

■ ■ T 

i 

• f> ' 

‘'i 


tf • 

. i 


V 

*» - 






9 t 


• ' .f ^ 


V 


^ • 

» 

•4 


r ft 


■ * i- '“i"' ^ r V 

J w'Ju - - R? 


i» 


•y* .» 


rV- 


* *. 


. ' H -4 I*- J ^ 

.» '•* •',.,■■■ .'• f ,- . '. ’ 

-• -A- , ' .£ ^^w■ 






ft * ^ 

• « 


. » 4 *' 


iO- 

r 


'^T 


« »'* • 







. ». 



•» • 


» '. » 


‘Hijfc '** ' 


• -• 


• . I 

k 




• «. 




• « 


' 

■s 


' y$ 

•? 



' r. 


K*' '■- if* "j 

' M- ' ' . * (I 

* - * m 



r ■ 


• -jt 
•' ♦ 


f 




•A 

P"* 

<• ' V ■ y 


> \ 

•> • 

•* I 


^ ‘‘J . ■ 


: . ;::■ 

• f 


4 

> • 


■Kin'ft^v 


V I 


■* 

' 




t 

4 

4 


S % * -''• 


.\ . 

k , 


0 

-/• 


■'/ 


>»■>. 


« 

/ . 
r. 



.V. * 


Wa. 


< 1 . 


» • 

■ft 


A THRILLING RESCUE 163 

Mark to stare in wonder. In the middle of the 
room stood Professor Strong, his hands and feet 
bound tightly to a board running from his heels 
to his neck. From a cut on his forehead the blood 
was trickling over his face. His eyes looked blood- 
shot, and had a strange glare to them. 

“ Thank Heaven you have come to save me ! ” he 
murmured, hoarsely. 

“Are Markel and Radell alone?'' questioned 
Mark, quickly, as he brought out his pocket-knife 
and cut the tutor's bonds. 

“ I think so, although they spoke of meeting some 
Chilians from the mountains — some fellows as 
rascally as themselves," replied Amos Strong. 
“ Boys, I am as weak as a rag — the drug they gave 
me has done it. I must rely on you to save me I " 
And then the professor sank on a bench in a corner. 

“ We’ll save you, never fear — or die trying," an- 
swered Frank. “ I'll see if I can't find a drink 
of water for you, or something to brace you up." 

He ran below, and presently found a jug of 
water and returned with this to the tutor. He was 
given a drink, and his forehead was bathed, and 
gradually he became better, although his head 
ached for a long while after. 


i 64 chased across the pampas 

Leaving Frank to care for the professor, Mark 
ran below and followed in the direction taken by 
Sam and Darry. He passed a stable and some farm 
buildings, and then gave a call. The others an- 
swered, and soon he joined them, at a point where 
a stone wall marked a back road. 

Did you catch ’em ? ” he asked. 

No, they gave us the slip in the darkness,” an- 
swered the boy from the West, in disgust. “ Too 
bad! I’d like to have ’em both arrested.” 

“ So would I, Darry.” 

What of the professor, is he safe? ” questioned 
Sam. 

“ I think so. But we had better go back — if 
those men can’t be captured.” 

They went off in the darkness, and we couldn’t 
even see what direction they took.” 

After another look around, the boys returned 
to the house, which they soon saw was old and 
dilapidated. It had evidently been locked up for a 
long time, for the rooms smelt musty and were 
covered with dust and cobwebs. Only the lamp, 
the water jug, and a market basket with some provi- 
sions looked new, as if Markel and Radell had 
brought them in that day. 


A THRILLING RESCUE 165 

“ They evidently found out the place was vacant, 
and they took possession,” said Mark, and in this 
surmise he was correct. 

The boys wanted to hear Professor Strong’s 
story, and he told it while they were assisting him 
to the carriage, after the house had been searched in 
vain for clews of Markel and Radell. 

I went to The Golden Crown Hotel and asked 
for Markel,” said the tutor. “ I was kept wait- 
ing for quite a while, and then, much to my surprise, 
Paul Radell came to see me. He acted very nicely, 
and said that Markel was sick, and that he did not 
know what to do for the fellow. He added that 
Markel was sorry he had acted so unfairly towards 
us, and that he would like to patch things up and 
make a fresh start. Radell talked so smoothly that 
I was taken off my guard, and I consented to visit 
Markel in his room, which was on the top floor 
of the hotel, and at the end of a long hallway. 

“ When I got in the room, Markel was in bed, 
and he certainly looked sick. He had a coughing 
spell, and Radell pretended that he might choke to 
death if he wasn’t given some of his medicine. He 
asked me to hold a bottle for him, and I did so. 
Then, of a sudden, he got behind me and clapped 


l66 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

some stuff to my nose and mouth, and Markel leaped 
up from the bed and aided him in holding me tight. 
I struggled all I could, but I was no match for both 
of them, and presently I began to grow dizzy. Then 
the next thing I knew, I was on the bed, and they 
were pouring some drug down my throat. I tried 
to struggle, but I was as weak as a cat. The drug 
completely bewildered me, and, like one in a dream, 
I found myself taken to the carriage for a long 
drive, and brought in here. Then, when I had 
partly recovered, I was bound to that board, and 
the door was locked. I didn’t know what to do 
until I heard you boys shouting my name. Then I 
lowered my head and rammed the old window shut- 
ter with the top end of the board. It gave way 
and fell; and you know the rest.” 


CHAPTER XVI 


SIGHTSEEING IN SANTIAGO DE CHILI 

‘‘ I AM mighty glad we started out to find you,” 
said Darry. 

“ So am I,” added Frank. “ It’s a great pity 
we didn’t catch those rascals. They should never 
be allowed at large. Instead of growing better, 
Markel is growing worse.” 

“ Did they take anything from you? ” queried 
Mark. 

They took everything I possessed.” 

‘‘ Everything ! ” cried Sam. 

‘‘ That is, everything I happened to be carrying 
with me when I visited The Golden Crown — my 
watch and chain, my ring, and something like 
thirty dollars in money, besides my pocket-knife and 
my pistol.” 

‘‘ Then we must catch them, by all means ! ” came 
from Darry. 


167 


1 68 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

“ Can’t you make that hotel responsible ? ” ques- 
tioned the youth from Boston. 

‘‘ Hardly, Samuel. I might make a complaint, 
but what would be the use ? It would simply mean 
delay, and I am pretty certain I would gain 
nothing,” returned Professor Strong, with a grave 
shake of his head. 

The tutor felt rather stiff and weak, and Mark 
assisted him down the stairs and to the carriage. 
Here the regular driver and Bolatero were waiting 
in evident suspense. 

Did this man have anything to do with assault- 
ing you, Professor? ” asked Mark, pointing to Bo- 
latero. 

Not that I can remember, Mark? Where did 
you pick him up ? ” 

“ He is the fellow who drove the carriage in 
which you were brought to this place.” 

‘‘Oh, I remember now! No, so far as I know, 
he simply obeyed the orders of Markel and Radell.” 

“ But didn’t he know you were a prisoner? ” 

“ That I can’t tell, for I was too stupefied to take 
notice. He may have thought I was simply one of 
their companions under the influence of liquor.” 

“ Then you don’t want him arrested ? ” 


SIGHTSEEING IN SANTIAGO DE CHILI 1 69 

“ Not unless he can aid us in catching Markel 
and Radell.’’ 

On the way back to Valparaiso, the matter was 
discussed freely. Bolatero insisted that he knew 
absolutely nothing concerning the plans of Markel 
and Radell, nor where they had gone, and our 
friends were inclined to believe him. The man 
begged to be allowed to go to his family, and this 
permission was granted. Then the professor and 
the boys returned to their hotel, where the carriage 
driver was paid off and dismissed. 

It was nearly one o’clock in the morning, and 
Hockley had retired to his room. But as soon as 
they came up, he ran out to meet them, having 
thrown himself on the bed without undressing. 

“ Where have you been ? ” he cried. Are you 
all right ? ” he went on, to the professor. “ I stayed 
downstairs until midnight.” 

“ It’s a long story, Jacob,” answered Amos 
Strong. “ I’ll tell you the particulars in the morn- 
ing. Now all of us had better get to bed and get a 
good night’s rest — we need it.” 

“ Do you want a doctor. Professor? ” asked Sam. 

‘‘ No, I think a good night’s rest will fix me up,” 
was the reply, and this surmise proved true; in the 


170 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

morning Professor Strong came down to breakfast 
looking as strong and well as ever. The only mark 
he carried of his adventure was the cut on his fore- 
head, which had been carefully washed and bound 
with a bit of court-plaster. 

When Jake heard the particulars of what had oc- 
curred, he was a bit envious over what the other 
boys had done, and wished he had been along. 

“ If I had been there,” he said, boastfully, I 
would have made Markel a prisoner, sure! We 
won’t be safe until that man is behind the bars ! ” 

“ Well, you can capture him the next time, Jake,” 
answered Darry, dryly. 

And the quicker the better,” added Sam. 

The entire day was spent in making inquiries con- 
cerning Markel and Radell, but nothing came of 
this. The rascals had left The Golden Crown with- 
out paying their bills, and the hotel-keeper was cor- 
respondingly angry at them. They were reported 
to the police ; and there the matter rested. 

On the following day Professor Strong and the 
boys went sightseeing, visiting the public buildings 
of Valparaiso, and also a Chilian warship that 
chanced to be lying in the harbor. On the warship 
they met an under-officer known to the tutor, and 


SIGHTSEEING IN SANTIAGO DE CHILI I7I 

he showed them through every part of the vessel, 
which was as well equipped as ships of the same 
class belonging to much larger countries. 

The next day was Sunday, and the whole party 
attended services at an English church, and then 
rested and wrote letters to the folks at home. It 
was decided that they should take a train for the 
capital in the morning. 

“ The place is commonly called Santiago,” said 
Professor Strong. “ But the real name is Santiago 
de Chili. It was founded by Valdivia, in 1541. 
It has been visited by numerous earthquakes, some 
quite serious.” 

“ I was reading that once a church burned down, 
with some people in it,” said Frank. 

“ Yes, it was the Jesuit Church, and it is said that 
two thousand people were burned up with it.” 

What a terrible happening!” murmured Sam. 

‘‘How far is Santiago from here?” questioned 
Jake. 

“ The distance by rail is about a hundred and 
fifteen miles. It is on the Mapocho River, but lo- 
cated nearly two thousand feet above sea level. 
What is rather strange is that the river water is 
not fit to drink, so water is brought into Santiago 


172 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

through an aqueduct from the mountains five miles 
away/' 

I hope we don’t strike any earthquakes while 
we are there,” sighed Hockley. 

“ I wonder if Markel and Radell went to San- 
tiago,” mused Sam. 

“If they did, more than likely they’ll keep out 
of sight,” answered Mark. 

Noon of the next day found them well on the 
way to the capital of Chili. The route was through 
a fertile valley, and then on a long upgrade of the 
Cuesta del Prado hills or mountains — the chain 
lying between Valparaiso and the Andes proper. 

“Here is where you can get a view! ’’cried 
Darry, as the train slowed up around a curve and 
came out on something of a plateau. 

“ I think I see the ocean! ” cried Frank, but be- 
fore he could make sure they passed in behind some 
rocks, and the view was lost. Then came a down- 
grade, and half an hour later they found themselves 
approaching the capital. They had made several 
stops, and travelers of various nationalities had 
gotten off and on the train, many in American or 
European attire, but the majority with native, 
broad-brimmed hats and ponchos of various colors. 


SIGHTSEEING IN SANTIAGO DE CHILI 1 73 

a poncho being, as many of my young readers must 
know, a narrow blanket, with a slit in the middle. 
The head of the wearer is usually placed through 
this slit, and the ends of the blanket are allowed to 
hang down. 

The boys had expected to find a lively town, but 
they were surprised by the bustle and confusion 
around them. They found the streets almost all 
straight, as in our own city of Philadelphia, but the 
majority of the buildings were but one story high, 
giving the capital a squatty appearance. 

“ Why don’t they build ’em higher? ” questioned 
Sam. ‘‘ I should think ground would be too 
valuable to waste this way. Why, in our own cities 
the buildings would be at least four or five stories 
high, even if there weren’t any skyscrapers.” 

'' They build low on account of the earthquakes,” 
answered Professor Strong. ‘‘ A one-story build- 
ing can withstand a shake that would tumble a tall 
structure to the ground.” 

“ Then they must be looking for earthquakes all 
the time,” said Jake, and his face showed he was 
anything but pleased. 

‘‘ As a matter of fact, Jacob, they average twenty 
to thirty earthquakes a year down here, just as they 


174 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

do in many other parts of South America. But 
many of the quakes are so slight that the inhab- 
itants pay no attention to them. If a quake seems 
extra heavy, they run out into the street until it is 
over, and then return to their houses or business 
places.” 

“ I don’t want to be here when an earthquake 
comes,” answered the lank youth, and looked as if 
he would like to leave the city then and there. 

Jake is a regular calf about earthquakes,” whis- 
pered Frank to Darry. 

Do you know what I’d like to do, Frank? ” an- 
swered the Western youth, with a twinkle in his 
eyes. “ I’d like to play a joke on him — make him 
think we’d struck an earthquake that was going to 
knock the hotel down. Wouldn’t he be scared out 

of his wite? ” 

% 

‘‘ Say, that would be great ! ” cried the New York 
boy.> “ Let us do it.” 

“ All right — if we get the chance.” 

“ But you must tell Mark and Sam, so they can 
enjoy the fun.” 

“ Of course.” 

Santiago was crowded with sightseers and busi- 
ness people, but Professor Strong had telegraphed 


SIGHTSEEING IN SANTIAGO DE CHILI 1 75 

ahead for rooms, and when they arrived at a leading 
hotel they found first-class accommodations await- 
ing them. They were glad enough to rest and wash 
up after the long and smoky railroad journey, and 
all voted to take it easy for the rest of the day. 

In the morning they commenced their sightseeing, 
and this lasted for the rest of the week. They vis- 
ited the grand cathedral and the national art gal- 
lery, with its many famous paintings, and then 
walked through the great national library. Later 
on, they inspected such portions of the mint as were 
thrown open to the public, and rode to the uni- 
versity. Professor Strong had a letter of introduc- 
tion to one of the instructors at this seat of 
learning, and this gentleman took them around the 
buildings, and, the next day, took them to the Con- 
gressional Hall, and even introduced them to a 
number of the political officials. 

“ I am very glad to meet some boys from the 
United States,” said one of the Chilian congress- 
men. It will give you an idea of what we are 
doing down here. I have visited the United States 
a number of times, and I have been amazed at the 
ignorance displayed concerning South America in 
general.” 


iy6 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

“ I believe you/' answered Sam. “ When we left 
home I had a hazy idea of the countries down here, 
but I never dreamed of such big cities, and so much 
commerce, and so many up-to-the-minute improve- 
ments. We'll have to hustle in the States, or, the 
first thing we know, you’ll be ahead of us.” And 
this remark made the Chilian congressman laugh 
heartily. He and some of his friends consented 
to stand for their pictures, and Mark and the others 
got several snap-shots which they treasured highly. 

From the capital buildings the young explorers 
went to the conservatory of music, and likewise vis- 
ited the school of agriculture and the military acad- 
emy. The drilling of the young soldiers interested 
Frank especially. 

Almost as good as the drilling at West Point,” 
said he. 

“ You are right,” returned Mark. ‘‘ No use in 
talking, Chili is a great country — but all of the 
South American countries are great when you come 
to look them over carefully.” 

Santiago boasts of a national theater, and when 
the boys heard that a performance of one of the 
standard tragedies was to be given that evening, they 
begged to go. 


SIGHTSEEING IN SANTIAGO DE CHILI 1 77 

Very well, Til see if I can get tickets,” answered 
Amos Strong, and a little later announced that he 
had procured very good seats. 

Coming back to the hotel to wash up, Darry 
called his chums to him. He did not call Jake, 
and at once the others knew that something was 
in the wind. 

“ I’ve got it all arranged,” said the Western youth, 
when the crowd of four were in his room. 

“About the earthquake?” queried Frank. 

“ Yes. I think we can scare dummy almost to 
death.” 

“ Tell us all about it,” said Mark. “ What do 
you propose to do ? ” 


CHAPTER XVII 


HOCKLEY THE BRAVE 

‘‘ Well, in the first place, you know Glummy has 
the room at the corner of the building,” commenced 
Darry. 

“ Yes, we know that,” answered Sam. 

“ It has two windows in it, good, broad windows, 
too.” 

“ So I noticed,” came from Mark. “ But go on, 
we haven’t much time to spare, if we are going to 
that performance.” 

Well, my idea is simply this,” pursued Darry. 
‘‘ Glummy is getting to be a regular fresh-air fiend, 
and leaves all his windows wide open. I’ve got two 
bags all ready in my room. One is filled with 
broken glass and old crockeryware, and the other 
has old plaster and flour in it. Well, when we are 
coming home I am going to remark that I heard a 
native saying the air felt just like an earthquake, 
and that a shake was due. That will be sure to set 
178 


HOCKLEY THE BRAVE 


179 


Jake on edge. Then when he goes to bed, we can 
go below and throw the bags into his room through 
the windows. The glass and crockeryware will 
make a great crash, and the plaster and flour will 
fill the room with dust. We can yell earthquake, 
and ril wager dummy will be scared stiff.” 

“ It’s a great plan! ” cried Frank. 

‘‘ He’ll be as mad as a hornet when he learns the 
truth,” was Mark’s comment. 

“ What do we care ? ” returned Sam. “ We’ll 
have the joke on him, and no mistake.” 

“ He may complain to the professor.” 

“ I don’t think he will. He’ll be too ashamed 
of himself,” said Darry. 

The boys continued to talk the proposed joke 
over, and at the same time dressed for dinner and 
to go to the theater. Professor Strong had gone 
to his own room, and they imagined that Hockley 
was still below. 

But they made a mistake regarding the lank 
youth. He had noticed the peculiar looks passing 
between the other boys, and he at once surmised 
that they were up to something, and did not want 
him to know anything about it. 

“ Want to leave me out of some good time, I sup- 


l8o CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

pose/’ he mused, sourly. “ It isn’t fair, after we 
all promised to bury the hatchet. I wonder what 
they are going to do? I guess I had better make 
it my business to find out.” 

He watched the other lads closely, and when he 
saw them enter the room assigned to Sam and 
Darry, he was not above playing the eavesdropper 
at the door. 

When he heard of Barry’s plan to scare him 
he was, at first, greatly enraged, and had hard work 
to keep from rushing into the room and speaking 
his mind. Then he thought he would go off and 
inform Professor Strong. 

‘‘We can let ’em play the trick, and then the 
professor can punish ’em as they deserve,” he told 
himself. “ Yes, that’s what I’ll do, tell Strong.” 

He walked half way to the professor’s room, lo- 
cated down the long hallway, and then, of a sud- 
den, came to a halt. In the semi-darkness some- 
thing like a grin appeared on his face. 

“ I won’t go to the professor,” he murmured. 
“ I’ll fight this out alone. I’ll let them play their 
joke, and I won’t take the least bit of notice. I’ll 
pretend to be asleep and not wake up. That will 
make Darry Crane and all the rest feel sick.” 


HOCKLEY THE BRAVE l8l 

The more he thought of his way to get square the 
more it pleased him, until, when he was dressing 
to go to the theater, he was actually humming a 
tune. 

“ Jake is unusually light-hearted to-night/' ob- 
served Mark. “ He must have gotten good news in 
that letter he received from home.” 

“ Just wait till later,” returned Darry, and 
winked, and at this all the others smiled broadly. 

The performance of the old-time tragedy was well 
acted, and the young explorers and their tutor en- 
joyed the play greatly. As it was in Spanish, the 
lads did not understand all that was said, but this 
did not matter, since they all knew the plot of the 
tragedy. They were also interested in the audience, 
as many of the rich Chilian ladies were present, in 
their gorgeous costumes and diamonds. 

“ It's almost like going to grand opera in New 
York,” was Frank’s comment. 

“ This is a national theater, remember,” said 
Amos Strong. The government has an interest 
in it and helps to pay the bills. That is why the 
performance is of such a high class.” 

After the show Sam said he was thirsty, and they 
had some chocolate and fancy cakes, and also some 


1 82 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

ice-cream. Then they lost no further time in get- 
ting back to the hotel, for it was growing late. On 
the way the boys talked earthquake, just to get 
Hockley “ worked up,’' as Darry expressed it. The 
lank youth shook his head and said he didn’t want 
any earthquakes to come his way, and then turned 
his face aside to hide the grin that came to it. 

“ We’ll have to wait until he is in bed,” whispered 
Frank to Darry, after Hockley and the professor 
had said good-night. 

“ Of course we’ll wait,” answered the Western 
youth. “No use in spoiling the joke, after I went 
to so much trouble.” 

Darry brought the two bags of stuff from a closet 
where he had had them hidden, and then the four 
boys sat down to wait. 

“ Now, if we work it just right, I am certain 
dummy will be scared half to death,” said Darry. 

“ I hope he left both windows open,” came from 
Sam. “We can heave the glass and stuff through 
one and the plaster and flour through the other.” 

“ Just the way I figured it out. You and I can 
carry one bag down, and Frank and Mark can carry 
the other.” 

The air seemed very oppressive, and the time went 


HOCKLEY THE BRAVE 


183 

by slowly. But at last Darry considered that they 
had waited long enough, and he and Sam took 
up one bag, and Frank and Mark the other, and 
all crept out of the room and down the stairs of 
the hotel to the first floor. 

Let us go out of the side door, so nobody can 
see us,” whispered the Western youth. 

His advice was followed, and in a minute more 
they stood out in the courtyard, directly under one 
of the windows of Hockley’s room, which was lo- 
cated at an angle of the structure. 

“ Now then ! ” cried Darry, and he and Sam gave 
a swing to the bag containing broken glass and 
crockeryware. It sailed upward and disappeared 
from view through the open window, landing on the 
floor beyond with a resounding crash. 

“ Now the other ! ” yelled Darry, quickly, and 
then that, too, went up and through the second win- 
dow, filling the room with a white cloud of plaster 
and flour dust. 

“ An earthquake ! an earthquake ! ” yelled all four 
of the boys, getting as close to Hockley’s windows 
as possible. “Get up, Jake! It’s an earthquake I ” 

They had just begun to call out when a most 
surprising thing happened. There was a strange 


184 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

rumble in the air, and then the very ground on 
which they were standing commenced to quake. 

Wha-what’s this? ” stammered Darry. 

“ That’s what I would like to know,” returned 
Mark. 

The ground beneath them continued to tremble, 
and then came a distinct shock that almost threw 
them off their feet. 

“ It’s an earthquake, that’s what it is, a real earth- 
quake! ” screamed Frank. “ Boys, we have got to 
get out of here! ” 

They all looked at each other in sudden terror. 
Was it really an earthquake, or was it some trick 
of the imagination? 

‘‘ Perhaps ” began Darry, when there came 

another shock, much more severe than the first. 
All were thrown to the ground, and down from the 
hotel roof dropped some tiling. 

There was no mistaking the truth — it was a 
genuine earthquake, and with their hearts in their 
throats the boys turned and fled from the courtyard 
into the street in front of the hotel. As they passed 
out they were joined by other guests, and by the 
clerks and porters and other hired help. Some were 
screaming in terror, but for the most part the crowd 


HOCKLEY THE BRAVE 1 85 

was silent, having gone through numerous earth- 
quakes in the past. 

'‘Boys! boys! where are you? Darry! Mark! 
Frank! Jake! Samuel!’' It was Professor Strong 
calling. He came into the street clad in his pajamas 
and with his other clothing in his arms. 

“ Here we are ! ” called back Mark, and ran to 
the tutor’s side. Just as he did this there was an- 
other slight quake, and everybody held his or her 
breath, wondering how bad it would become. But 
it was soon at an end, and then all breathed easier 
and began to look around. 

“Why, how is it you are dressed?” queried the 
professor, as the others came up. “ I didn’t have 
time to put on my clothes.” 

“ Well — er — we hadn’t gone to bed yet,” stam- 
mered Frank, as nobody else spoke. 

“ Indeed ! Well, you should have gone, but in 
this case perhaps it is just as well. Where is Ja- 
cob?” 

“That’s so — why didn’t Jake come out?” cried 
Mark. 

“ Maybe he was hurt by a falling wall, or some- 
thing,” suggested Sam. And then he looked at his 
chums, and they knew that by “something” he 


1 86 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

meant the bags they had thrown through the win- 
dows. 

Fm going in to see where he is ! ” burst out 
Darry, and before Professor Strong could stop him 
the Western youth had disappeared inside the hotel. 

“ Brave boy ! ” murmured the tutor, not knowing 
what was on Barry’s mind. Fll go, too.” 

So will I ! ” added Mark, and he followed, and 
Sam and Frank came on their heels. 

By this time the earthquake was at an end. 
There were no more shocks, and gradually the 
excitement subsided and the guests went back to 
their rooms, and the other folks in the street went 
to their homes. 

It took Darry but a minute to reach the door to 
Hockley’s room. He found it locked, and gave a 
loud knock. Then he gave another knock, for 
there came no answer to his summons. 

“Jake! wake up! There is an earthquake!” he 
called out, wildly. 

“,Oh, go to bed and let me sleep ! ” came in surly 
tones. 

“ But there is an earthquake I ” insisted Darry, 
and now Professor Strong came up to the door, and 
the others followed. 


HOCKLEY THE BRAVE 


187 

“ I don’t care if there are a dozen earthquakes,” 
droned Jake. I want to sleep. Go away and 
leave me alone.” 

“ Did you ever hear the like ! ” gasped Mark. 
“ An earthquake, and he wants to sleep.” 

‘‘ You may be scared, but I am not,” went on 
the lank youth. “ Go on and stand in the middle 
of the street if you want to. I’m going to stay in 
bed.” 

‘‘ Well ! well ! ” murmured Professor Strong. 
‘‘ How extraordinary ! And I imagined that he 
was afraid of earthquakes ! He is more calm than 
any of the rest of us ! ” 

“ It gets me ! ” murmured Darry, and gazed help- 
lessly at his chums. “ Jake always was a puzzle to 
me,” he added. 

Jacob, are you sure you are quite safe? ” asked 
Professor Strong. 

At the professor’s question the tall youth listened 
in wonder. He had thought that only the boys 
were there, trying to annoy him. He had covered 
his head with a blanket, but now he threw the cov- 
ering aside and sat up. 

“ Is that you. Professor Strong? ” he asked. 

‘‘Yes, Jacob. I want to know if you are all 
right.” 


1 88 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

‘‘ Why, yes, sir, I am.” 

‘‘ Then the earthquake didn't harm you any ? ” 
Not in the least. But the room is in a mess. 
Somebody will have to clean it up in the morning. 
Fm not going to get up to do it now,” pursued the 
tall youth. 

‘‘ Very strange, very ! ” murmured the professor. 
He paused for a moment in perplexity. “ Well, if 
you are safe it’s all right, and we’ll go to bed,” he 
added, as no more earthquake shocks seemed to be 
coming. 

‘‘Yes, sir! Good-night!” called out Hockley, 
and then those outside heard him turn over on his 
bed. 

“ A queer youth, but evidently quite brave ! ” mur- 
mured the tutor. He turned to the other lads. “ As 
the scare is over, we may as well all turn in 
again,” he added, and walked to his own room and 
disappeared. 

With looks on their faces that betokened complete 
bewilderment, the four chums walked slowly into 
the room occupied by Darry and Sam, closed the 
door, turned up the light, and then gazed helplessly 
at one another. 


CHAPTER XVIII 


AFTER THE EARTHQUAKE 

‘‘Well, whafs the answer?” demanded Mark, 
after a silence which was positively oppressive. 

“ Search me,” answered Frank, slangily. “ I was 
positive dummy would be scared to death.” 

“ We had all our troubles for our pains,” grum- 
bled Darry. “ Boys, I am sorry I made you work 
so hard for nothing.” 

“ Jake must have been fooling when he said he 
was afraid of earthquakes,” came from Sam. 
“ Maybe he did it just to see what we would say.” 

“ Fellows, I think I’ve solved the riddle! ” almost 
shouted Mark. 

“ Then tell us quickly,” answered Darry. “ Don’t 
keep us in suspense.” 

“ I believe dummy didn’t know there was a real 
earthquake I ” 

“ What!” 

“ He thought that all the rumpus was caused by 

189 


190 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

Yours Truly & Company. In some manner he got 
on to the fact that we were going to play the joke, 
and he made up his mind to pay us back by refusing 
to be scared. When the real earthquake came he 
thought it was part of the trick.’' 

Maybe you are right,” returned Frank, slowly. 

‘‘ I believe Mark has hit the truth of the matter,” 
said Sam. And if he has, then dummy has the 
laugh on us, instead of us having the laugh on 
him.” 

The boys talked the affair over in low tones, 
and at last concluded that Mark had guessed the 
truth. Darry felt much crestfallen, because his 
joke had fallen flat. 

“ Don’t you care,” said Frank. No one would 
expect an earthquake to come along and spoil his 
sport.” 

“ I’ll wager Jake will crow in the morning,” re- 
turned the boy from the West. “ Just you wait and 
listen ! ” 

“ Maybe we can turn the trick yet,” came slowly 
from Sam. 

1 don’t see how,” returned Darry. 

‘‘ We might wait until we are certain dummy is 
asleep, and then sneak into his room and remove 


AFTER THE EARTHQUAKE IQI 

those two bags of stuff. Then we can pretend that 
all the trouble was caused by the real earthquake.” 

“Good! We’ll do it!” cried Darry. “Any- 
thing so that he can’t have the laugh on us.” 

It was decided that they should wait half an hour 
and then visit the lank youth’s apartment. As the 
door was locked, they had to get in by one of the 
windows. A balcony was handy, so this was easy. 
Darry went ahead, to see if the coast was clear. 

“ He’s asleep and snoring like a sawmill,” he 
announced, after an inspection. “ Now don’t make 
any noise when getting the stuff out, or you may 
wake him up.” 

On tiptoes the four boys entered the room. A 
light from outside shone through one window, and 
by this they were able to see around them. 

Both of the bags had been flimsy and had broken, 
causing the contents to scatter in every direction. 
But the boys had prepared for this by bringing along 
a pair of bedsheets, and into these they placed the 
broken glass, crockeryware, and plaster. They no- 
ticed that some plaster had fallen from the ceiling 
of the room, but this they did not touch, nor did they 
disturb a dresser that had been knocked over and 
a picture that had fallen. 


192 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

“ Now, I guess we have everything,” whispered 
Darry, after a final look around. Come on, be- 
fore he wakes up,” and then, as silently as possible, 
they left the room, taking the stuff thrown through 
the windows with them. They had no difficulty in 
disposing of the rubbish on a heap in an alleyway, 
and then they brushed off the sheets and took them 
back to their own rooms. 

Despite what had occurred, the four young ex- 
plorers slept soundly during the remainder of the 
night. Sam was the first to awaken, and he quickly 
aroused the others. 

‘‘ Now be careful what you say,” cautioned Darry. 
“ Let Jake and the professor do the talking.” 

They went below, and soon the tall youth ap- 
peared. He was attired in one of his best traveling 
suits and acted as if nothing out of the ordinary had 
happened. Behind him came Professor Strong. 

Well, boys, how are you this morning? ” came 
pleasantly from the tutor. 

“ Very well, thank you,” murmured Darry, and 
his chums uttered words of similar import. 

‘‘And how are you?” questioned Amos Strong, 
turning to Jake. 

“ Oh, Tm all right,” was the careless response. 


AFTER THE EARTHQUAKE 


193 


“ That earthquake woke me up once or twice, but I 
soon got to sleep again.’' And Jake grinned 
broadly. 

“ Then you weren’t frightened at all ? ” queried 
the tutor. He was not yet willing to believe that 
Hockley could really be so brave. 

‘‘ No, sir, I wasn’t scared a bit ! ” cried the lank 
youth, and then his face turned a bit sour. “ I don’t 
like that kind of a joke, and somebody has got to 
clean up my room and put it to rights ! I won’t do 
it!” 

“ A — er — a, joke I ” gasped Amos Strong. ‘‘ Ja- 
cob, do you consider that earthquake a joke? ” 

Earthquake ? There wasn’t any earthquake I 
Those fellows ” 

‘'Wasn’t any earthquake?” interrupted Darry. 
“ Why, Jake, what are you talking about ? We had 
quite a bad earthquake last night; didn’t we. Pro- 
fessor?” 

“ We certainly had an earthquake,” was the an- 
swer. “ Although it was not as bad as it might have 
been. I thought ” 

Just then an American visitor at the hotel, who 
had met the tutor the day before, rushed up, smiling. 

“ Glad to see you are all right ! ” he cried. “ Say, 


194 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

that was quite an earthquake we had last night, 
wasn't it? Knocked the plaster off the ceiling in 
my room, and nearly smothered me. Nobody in 
your party hurt, I hope." 

“ No, we are all safe, Mr. Barnum," answered 
Professor Strong. 

“ Then you are better off than some of the 
others," pursued Mr. Barnum. “ One of the guests 
had a bureau fall on his toes, and another man ran 
outside and some tiling from a roof hit him, and 
they had to take him to the hospital. They tell me 
that some of the statues in the park were thrown 
down by the earthquake. But it might have been 
worse, I presume," finished Mr. Barnum, philo- 
sophically. 

Jake listened to the talk, and when he heard what 
Mr. Barnum had to say his face became a study. 
He pushed his way forward. 

“ Did you — er — say a man was hurt by an — er^ — 
the earthquake? " he stammered. 

“ Oh, yes, and they had to take him to the hos- 
pital." 

“ And some — er — statues in the park were 
knocked down ? " 

“ Yes, and a new building they were putting up 


AFTER THE EARTHQUAKE I95 

on the corner was wrecked, too,” added Mr. Bar- 
num. Oh, it was lively enough while it lasted ! ” 

“ Indeed it was ! ” came from Amos Strong. 

‘‘What did you boys do?” asked the new ac- 
quaintance, curiously. 

“ Oh, we dusted outside as quickly as possible,” 
answered Sam. “ That is, all but Jake here. He 
didn’t seem to mind the earthquake in the least.” 

“ You didn’t? ” cried Mr. Barnum. “ Well, you 
are one out of a thousand, I can tell you that. Al- 
most everybody I knew got out of the building in 
jig time.” And then the crowd moved toward the 
dining-hall. Here Mr. Barnum pointed out several 
places where the earthquake had done some damage. 

Jake was now convinced that there had been a 
real earthquake, and he looked at the other boys and 
the professor in wonder, while his face grew a trifle 
pale. He did not understand the matter thor- 
oughly, but realized that he had escaped a great 
peril. He ate his meal in silence, and when the pro- 
fessor turned away, to make arrangements for 
further sightseeing, he motioned to the other boys 
and led them to the reading-room. 

“ See here, I want to get at the bottom of this! ” 
he said, in a low, strained voice. 


196 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

Bottom of what ? ” asked Darry, coolly. 

“ Oh, you know well enough! You fellows were 
going to play a trick on me — I know all about it, 
for I overheard your plans. Now then, what was it 
happened ? 

Jake was so serious that the others could not hold 
in longer, and one after another commenced to 
laugh. This made Hockley angry at first, but 
finally he was forced to grin. 

Better not spoil it, Jake,” said Mark. ‘‘ You’re 
a real hero — the professor thinks you are the bravest 
fellow in the bunch. While all of us run for our 
lives, you turn over and go to sleep.” 

But did the earthquake really occur, or is it all 
a joke? ” 

“Do those damaged ceilings and walls look like 
a joke? ” asked Frank. 

“ No, but — ^but ” The lank youth did not 

know how to proceed. 

“ It’s a fact, Jake, that the earthquake really and 
truly came and scared everybody but you out of his 
wits,” answered Sam. “We pounded on your door 
and tried to get you out, but you refused to budge. 
Now see what a hero you are.” 

“ Hero ? I’m no hero, and you know it I ” burst 


After the earthquake 


197 


out the tall youth. “ I thought it was all a trick ! 

If I had known it was a real earthquake ” He 

did not finish, but shook his head and drew a long 
breath. “ But you started to play a trick on me,” 
he added, quickly. 

“ So we did, Jake,” replied Darry. But we got 
bit doing it.” 

‘‘ Yes, we got bit good and proper,” added Mark, 
and then, as he saw the professor approaching, he 
added in a whisper : “ Let’s drop the whole thing. 
What do you say ? ” 

“ All right. I’m willing,” answered Jake. “ Only 
don’t try to play any more tricks on me.” 

‘‘ We won’t,” answered the others; and then the 
boys shook hands all around. 

From Santiago the young explorers traveled to 
Los Andes, a small city in the mountains. 

“If you care to do so, we can travel to Carraco- 
las,” said Professor Strong. “ That is at the mouth 
of the tunnel which is to connect the railroad from 
Argentina to Chili. We may be able to see them 
finishing the work on the tunnel.” 

This interested the boys, and the following day 
the trip up the mountains was made. They got 
on what was called the rack railroad, and in 


198 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

twenty-six miles climbed up over six thousand 
feet. 

“ I see the tunnel ! cried Mark, pointing ahead. 
“ It doesn’t look very large,” he added, somewhat 
disappointedly. 

“ But think of the length, two miles, and right 
under these high mountains ! ” exclaimed Sam. 
“ That certainly is a marvelous engineering feat.” 

“ They are working from both ends of the tun- 
nel,” explained Professor Strong. “ They hope to 
meet soon.” 

“ If they haven’t made any miscalculations,” was 
Hockley’s comment. 

Let me add here, that no miscalculations were 
made. Soon after the visit of the young explorers 
the final wall of the great tunnel was blasted away; 
and to-day trains are running regularly on all the 
sections of this railroad, from Valparaiso on the 
Pacific to Buenos Aires on the Atlantic. 

Several of the boys were anxious to do a little ex- 
ploring around the mouth of the tunnel, and Sam 
wished very much to pick up some geological speci- 
mens. They wandered hither and thither, until 
Jake, Darry, and Mark declared they were tired. 
Sam kept on, up a cliff side, and Frank went with 


AFTER THE EARTHQUAKE 1 99 

him. They passed around a bend and were thus 
shut off from the view of the others. 

A quarter of an hour went by and in the mean- 
time the professor, who had been talking with one 
of the railroad engineers, came to the boys who 
were resting. 

‘‘ Where are the others ? ” he asked, but before 
any of them could answer, there came a cry from a 
distance. 

‘‘ It's from Frank! exclaimed Darry. 

“ Yes, and he is in trouble of some sort! " added 
Mark. “ He is calling for help ! " 


CHAPTER XIX 


FAREWELL TO THE ANDES 

All ran forward in the direction of the cliff. 
They could hear Frank but faintly, and at first were 
unable to locate him. 

“Frank! Frank! Where are you?’^ yelled 
Mark, at the top of his lungs. 

“ Here I am ! This way, to the left of the cliff ! ’’ 
was the answer. 

The boys below hurried in that direction, and then 
came upon Sam. The boy from Boston had his 
hands full of stones he had picked up for geological 
specimens. He had just emerged from a hollow 
in the cliff side and looked somewhat bewildered. 

“Is Frank calling?” he asked. “What is the 
matter ? ” 

“Yes, he is calling, but we can't locate him,” re- 
turned Darry. 

“ There he is ! ” burst from Mark. “ I see him 
— on the tree yonder.” 


200 


FAREWELL TO THE ANDES 201 

All gazed in the direction he pointed out, and 
there beheld Frank perched on one of the upper 
limbs of a tree that grew out of the top of the 
cliif . He had a^ slender stick in one hand, and was 
making wild passes in front of him. 

‘‘What’s the trouble?” called out Mark. 

“ A condor ! It wants to attack me ! ” 

“ A condor ! ” cried several of the others. 

“ There it is ! ” yelled Darry, and at that instant 
the vulture-bird hove into sight. It was of im- 
mense size, with a stretch of wings seven to eight 
feet from tip to tip. It was black in appearance, 
with some spots of white, and had a long, bare 
throat and cruel-looking hooked beak. 

“ The condor is going to attack Frank ! ” screamed 
Jake, and, as he spoke, the great bird swooped close 
to the youth in the tree. Frank thrashed around 
with his stick, hitting the creature on one wing, and 
the condor circled off, to prepare for another at- 
tack. 

“Let us see if we cannot shoot it!” said Pro- 
fessor Strong, and he drew his pistol, and the boys 
also brought forth their weapons. 

“ Be careful that you don’t hit Frank! ” warned 
Sam. 


202 


CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 


Frank, why don’t you shoot it? ” yelled Darry, 
his voice trembling with excitement. 

‘‘ I dropped my pistol,” was the reply. ‘‘ Oh, 
shoot it, somebody ! ” 

Again the condor circled closer. It was evidently 
hungry, and the passes Frank had made with the 
stick had angered it. It came down in a straight 
line for the youth’s head, as if to land there and 
claw him to death. 

Crack! crack! crack! One pistol after another 
was discharged in rapid succession. The condor 
was hit in the wings, and in one foot, and uttered 
shrill cries of pain and anger. Then it circled off, 
higher and higher, and presently was lost to view in 
the distance. 

“ Do you think it will come back? ” asked Mark, 
anxiously. 

“ I hardly think so,” answered Professor Strong. 
‘‘If it is badly hurt, it will be afraid.” 

“Better come down now, Frank!” shouted 
Mark. 

“ I will — just as fast as I can,” was the reply. 
“ But it is rather dangerous climbing around here.” 

Frank came down the tree with care, and it took 
him several minutes to descend to the foot of the 



Again the condor circled closer. — Page 202 



FAREWELL TO THE ANDES 2O3 

cliff. His clothing was torn, and he had several 
scratches on one hand. 

“ However did the condor happen to attack you ? ” 
questioned Jake. 

‘‘ It was in the tree and evidently asleep when I 
came up,” answered Frank. “ I couldn’t make out 
just what it was, and so climbed up to see. Then, 
of a sudden, it woke up, uttered a shrill screech, and 
commenced to attack me. I had the stick, and I 
slashed around with that. Then it sailed off, and I 
thought it was gone. But it came sailing back, and 
then I began to yell for help.” 

‘‘ Perhaps it smelt the blood on your hand,” sug- 
gested Sam. 

“ Condors do not usually attack human beings, 
outside of small children,” said Professor Strong. 
“ They prefer to attack lambs and goats, and they 
often live on nothing but carrion. It may be that 
this condor was very hungry. I have heard it said 
that condors prefer to live in very high altitudes, 
usually remaining in the mountains at the top of the 
range. But often they cannot find food so high 
up, and then they come lower, even down into the 
valleys among the farms.” 

They rested for a while at the foot of the cliff. 


204 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

and Frank’s scratches were dressed. They kept 
their eyes open for the condor, but it did not again 
appear. 

That evening found the young explorers and their 
tutor once more at Santiago. Here it was finally 
decided that they should rest for the remainder of 
the week, and then take the train as far eastward 
as possible in the mountains, and then travel on 
muleback and horseback, into the interior of Argen- 
tina. 

That will give us a taste of the great pampas, 
or prairies, of the country,” said Amos Strong. 

We can visit some of the estancias, or ranches, 
and become closely acquainted with the cowboys, 
who, down here, are called gauchos. When we 
grow tired of riding on the pampas, we can make 
for one of the towns along the line of the railroad, 
and finish the journey to Buenos Aires in a parlor 
car.” 

Say, a ride on the pampas will suit me down to 
the ground ! ” cried Darry, enthusiastically. ‘‘ Oh, 
I wish I was there right now ! ” 

“ Give me the parlor car,” was Jake’s comment. 

Perhaps you’d like to go ahead to Buenos Aires 
and wait for us,” suggested Mark. 


FAREWELL TO THE ANDES 205 

No, ril go where the rest go,” was the quick re- 
ply. “ I shouldn’t mind visiting a ranch in Argen- 
tina, but I don’t want to stay too long.” 

“ Argentina is a marvelous country,” said Pro- 
fessor Strong. “ Years ago it was little known, but 
to-day it sends immense quantities of meat and grain 
to Europe, and to many other portions of the 
globe.” 

As much as the United States ? ” questioned 
Sam. 

“Yes, Samuel, strange as it may appear, Argen- 
tina is now the leader in the export of foodstuffs. 
And this is not so strange when you consider that 
Argentina has stretches of pampas as broad as any 
of the prairies of our own country, and that thou- 
sands of the inhabitants grow nothing but grain and 
cattle. The area of the country is over a million 
and an eighth square miles, four times the size of 
Chili. If cut up, it would make about twenty- five 
States the size of Pennsylvania.” 

“Gracious! that’s some size I ” murmured Jake, 
as he well remembered how large his own State 
was. 

“ Roughly speaking, Argentina is twenty-two 
hundred miles long, and its greatest width is about 


2o6 chased across the pampas 

one thousand miles. Can any of you tell me how 
it is bounded ? ” 

‘‘ I think I can,” answered Sam. On the north 
by Bolivia, on the west and south by Chili, and on 
the east by Paraguay, Brazil, Uruguay, and the At- 
lantic Ocean.” 

That is correct. Now, who can name the prin- 
cipal cities ? ” 

The principal city is Buenos Aires,” came 
promptly from Jake. 

“ And after that? ” 

“ Rosario, Tucuman, and Mendoza,” answered 
Mark. 

“ That is correct. Now what about the principal 
river? ” 

‘‘ That is the Parana, on which Rosario is lo- 
cated,” answered Darry. 

“ You are right, Dartworth, and it is truly a large 
stream, being navigable by large steamers for a 
distance of several hundred miles, and by smaller 
craft a distance of two thousand miles — away into 
Brazil, in fact.” 

“ It seems to me we are striking some big rivers 
down here,” remarked Frank. ‘‘ The Amazon, the 
Orinoco, and now the Parana.” 


FAREWELL TO THE ANDES 207 

‘‘ There are, of course, numerous other rivers, 
like the Salado, which flows into the Parana, the 
Colorado, and the Negro,'’ went on the tutor. 
“ There are also a number of lakes of fair size, and 
four of these are of salt water.” 

‘‘ Shall we see any more mountains ? ” asked 
Darry. 

“Not after we leave the Andes. To the east- 
ward, where we shall travel, the country is made up 
almost entirely of the rolling pampas. In the south, 
in what is called Patagonia, there are also immense 
plains, but there are likewise immense mountains, 
including the Aconcaguas, the highest peaks in 
America.” 

As the party did not wish to be encumbered with 
too much baggage, they sold or gave away some of 
the things they had with them, and others were 
shipped home by express. This done, they left San- 
tiago, and traveled by train into the mountains un- 
til they reached a settlement not far from the 
mouth of the railroad tunnel. Then they took to 
horses, in company with a trustworthy guide, and 
the trip over the Andes was begun. 

“ Our first stop will be at Mendoza,” said Amos 
Strong. “ That is the center of the grape-growing 


2o8 chased across the pampas 

industry of Argentina. We can visit the public 
buildings and also some of the vineyards, which are 
very interesting.” 

‘‘ I’ve heard of the immense vineyards they have 
there,” said Sam. “ One guidebook said one vine- 
yard was over a mile long ! ” 

'‘I do not doubt it,” answered Amos Strong. 
“ They grow immense quantities of grapes, and 
Italians and Frenchmen come all the way from 
Europe at certain seasons of the year to look after 
the fruit and help to make wine.” 

The trip over the Andes was as full of interest as 
it had ever be^n. They rested one day on the 
boundary line between Chili and Argentina, and 
Mark took a photograph of an immense statue lo- 
cated there, and known as the Christus of the Andes. 

“What a grand statue!” murmured Frank, as 
he took off his cap, while the others did the same, 
and the native guide knelt to say a brief prayer. 
The statue represented Christ in a flowing robe, with 
a tall cross in one hand and the other hand held out 
in a blessing. 

“ That statue has quite a history,” said Amos 
Strong, when they had resumed their journey. “ It 
is not alone a religious emblem, but symbolizes the 


FAREWELL TO THE ANDES 209 

peace between Chili and Argentina. It was cast 
from the metal from cannons of both nations.’’ 

It is a pity they don’t have more such peace em- 
blems throughout the world/’ was Mark’s comment. 

‘‘ I think war is barbarous ! ” 

“ So do I,” added Sam. “ I think the greatest 
hero of the future will be the man of Peace.” ^ 

‘‘ And Arbitration,” finished Frank. “ A war 
never settled anything excepting the fact that one 
nation happened to be stronger than another — or 
had more money to spend.” 

“ I think arbitration will come some day,” said 
Professor Strong. “ But not just yet, for the na- 
tions have not yet been educated to it, and those in 
command of armies and navies do not want to let 
go.” 

The climb up the Andes to the boundary had been 
very hard. The slope on the eastern side was more 
gradual. 

“ And now you are in Argentina,” said the pro- 
fessor. 

The trail led to Las Cuevas and, arriving there, 
they were glad to rest for a day. Then they pushed 
on to Mendoza. 

“ Mendoza is now a city of about forty thou- 


210 


CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 


sand inhabitants, but it is rapidly growing,” said 
Professor Strong. “ It was entirely destroyed by 
an earthquake, in i86i, and about thirteen thousand 
people lost their lives.” 

“ Don’t talk to me about any more earthquakes, 
I’ve had enough of them,” said Darry, and then 
looked at Jake and the others. The lank youth 
grinned, and then of a sudden all the boys burst 
into a laugh, somewhat to the surprise of their tutor, 
who, however, being wise, asked no questions. 

They found comfortable quarters at Mendoza, 
and visited not only the public buildings but also 
several of the immense vineyards, where Mark and 
the others took some photographs. Then they- set 
out for Cordoba, nearly three hundred miles further 
eastward. 


CHAPTER XX 


ON THE PAMPAS 

Out on the pampas at last ! ” 

It was Darry who uttered the words, and as he 
spoke, he took up the reins of his steed in one 
hand, his cap in the other, and set off on a mad 
gallop over the broad prairies. 

It was a beautiful morning, the sun shining 
brightly, and just sufficient breeze blowing to ‘‘ make 
life worth living,” as Frank expressed it. All of 
the party were in the saddle, and with them were 
two natives, one to care for the horses and the 
other to do the cooking. 

Mendoza had been left far behind, and that night 
they had stopped at a small settlement called Meros. 
All felt in the best of condition, and even Jake’s 
face showed his contentment. 

‘‘ This suits Darry,” was Mark’s comment, as he 
and Frank rode side by side. ‘‘ He’d rather be on 
a horse than in the finest parlor car ever built,” 


311 


212 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

I see we have left the railroad behind,” returned 
Frank. “ And the country begins to look a good 
deal wilder than it did.” 

See the stretches of pampas ahead ! ” exclaimed 
Sam. “ This is real life in the open, and no mis- 
take.” 

‘‘ This prairie is different from those of our own 
States,” said Professor Strong. “ You will notice 
the grass is quite coarse. Yet the horses and cattle 
thrive on it, and when the ground is cultivated it 
produces heavy crops of grain, which are exported 
all over the world.” 

Over the pampas galloped the boys, with the pro- 
fessor at their heels, and the two natives not far be- 
hind. Amos Strong enjoyed the riding as much as 
did any of them, and he did not begrudge Darry his 
fun, when the Western youth gave yell after yell 
like an Apache Indian. It was only Darryls way of 
“ letting off steam,” and the tutor knew it would do 
him good. 

The Western boy had begged that they camp out 
at least three or four nights, and Professor Strong 
had put the matter to a vote, and all the boys, even 
to Jake, had been in favor of it. Jake had lost a 
good deal of his sourness since the real and artificial 


ON THE PAMPAS 21 ^ 

earthquakes, and the others had great hopes that he 
was going to reform permanently. 

“ He’s getting quite jolly,” was the way Sam ex- 
pressed himself. I guess that earthquake shook 
some of the glumness out of him.” 

They had an invitation to visit the estancia of a 
rich gentleman named Pelos, and they were making 
their way in that direction. Don Pelos owned 
many thousands of acres of land, and his herds of 
cattle were numerous. Professor Strong had met 
him in Rio de Janeiro, and the two had become 
quite friendly. 

Over the pampas galloped Darrv, and the others 
came at his heels. The Western youth was in his 
element, and he called on his chums for a race. 

‘‘ Done ! ” cried Mark. “ But I am afraid you’ll 
beat me out of my boots ! ” 

Side by side they started off, and the others quickly 
followed. Over the broad pampas thundered the 
steeds, in the direction of a line of trees and bushes 
that marked the boundaries of a small river. Far 
in the distance they could see a herd of cattle, but 
not a human being but themselves was in sight. 

No one in that crowd could ride quite as well as 
Darry, and the Western youth had picked his horse 


214 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

with care. Consequently he slowly but surely went 
ahead, until he was out of hearing of the rest. 

“ Better come back ! ’’ shouted Mark, but Darry 
paid no attention. It was sweet to ride like the 
wind, and he hated to have the pleasure come to an 
end. 

The river looked to be less than a mile away. But 
the atmosphere was so clear that distances were de- 
ceptive, and Darry must have covered several miles 
before he reached the first of the trees and bushes. 
The shade felt grateful after that run in the sun, and 
he allowed his steed to proceed along under the 
trees, although keeping him away from the water 
until he had cooled off a little. 

Closer to the stream the trees and bushes were 
thicker, and Darry presently discovered that he 
had lost the main trail, which, on the pampas, had 
been well marked by horses and cattle. He looked 
around in perplexity. 

“ It won’t do for me to get lost,” he reasoned, 
and then smiled to himself, as he realized that it 
would be an easy matter to ride out into the open 
again, and then up and down the edge of the woods 
until the trail was again discovered. 

He brought his steed to a halt, and as he did so a 


ON THE PAMPAS 21 5 

distant murmur of voices reached his ears. At first 
he imagined that some of his chums had come up, 
and he was about to call to them, when he heard 
words in broken English that he felt certain did not 
proceed from any person who was traveling with 
him. 

‘‘ Must be some of the natives,” he reasoned. 

Maybe a camp of the gauchos who are tending the 
cattle in this vicinity. I’ll take a look and make 
sure.” 

He moved forward slowly, and presently caught 
sight of a small clearing located directly on the river 
bank. Here a tiny campfire was burning, and 
around it half a dozen men were resting and talk- 
ing. 

Darry took one good look at the men and almost 
uttered a cry, so great was his astonishment. And 
well might he be amazed, for one of the party was 
Dan Markel. 

‘‘ Markel ! ” murmured the boy. “ What in the 
world can he be doing here ? ” 

His first impulse was to ride forward and con- 
front the fellow from Baltimore. But then he re- 
membered that he was alone, and that it might not 
be wise to show himself. 


2i6 chased across the pampas 

‘‘ That man wouldn’t be here unless there was 
some reason for it,” Darry told himself. “ Per- 
haps I had better keep in the dark, or ride back and 
tell the others.” 

He turned his steed into the woods, rode a few 
paces, and then, dismounting, tied the horse to a 
tree. Then he went forward again, keeping his 
body screened by the bushes. 

He soon reached a point where he could see and 
hear quite plainly. He found Markel talking ear- 
nestly to the other men, who, in turn, were asking 
a number of questions. 

“ The senor say there is in the party but six peo- 
ple?” questioned one of the men, evidently a 
gaucho, by his dress. 

“ Only six, and but one of them a man.” 

“ And they are rich, senor? ” questioned another, 
in still more broken English. 

“ The man is fairly well off, but the parents of 
the boys are all very wealthy,” answered the man 
from Baltimore. And then he spoke some words in 
broken Spanish, which Darry could not catch, 
though he strained his ears to the utmost. 

“ It is worth trying, Carlos,” said one of the 
gauchos, in his native tongue. 


ON THE PAMPAS 


217 


‘‘ Perhaps, Juan. But we might be shot down 
doing it — or be captured and put in jail,” was the 
reply. 

Bah ! Do not be so weak-kneed ! ” cried an- 
other. ‘‘ I, for one, would like to make my for- 
tune without tending cattle all my life.” 

‘‘ And a fortune you shall surely have, if you will 
do as I wish you to,” returned Dan Markel. 

‘‘How would you get the money?” asked an- 
other. 

“ Easily enough, after you had done your share of 
the work,” answered the man from Baltimore. “ It 
would take time, but the money would arrive sooner 
or later — and then we would all be rich.” 

“And would your friends take part?” ques- 
tioned the gaucho called Carlos. 

“ Certainly. They could help me in arranging 
about the money. We would have to be very care- 
ful in cashing a bank draft, or a money order, or 
anything like that.” 

“ Better ask for gold,” grumbled the man called 
Juan. “ Gold is gold, the world over. Had I my 
share now, Td not stay in this forsaken country. Td 
go to Buenos Aires and have a good time.” 

“ And Fd go with you,” added Carlos. “ But 


2i8 chased across the pampas 

how much could you get and how would you divide 
it ? ” And then followed a discussion, the particulars 
of which Darry could not catch. 

But the Western boy had heard enough, and now 
he made up his mind to retrace his steps, mount his 
steed, and rejoin his party. 

‘‘ They are plotting against us,’’ he reasoned. 
“ They are up to some trick, and Markel is leading 
them. Maybe he has an idea he can make us pris- 
oners and then get our folks to pay a big sum for 
our release ! ” 

A few steps more brought Darry to the side of 
his horse. He was in the act of untying the ani- 
mal, when he suddenly found himself attacked 
from the rear. A poncho was thrown over his 
head, almost smothering him, and then his hands 
were bound behind him. 

Don’t you dare to make a sound ! ” was hissed 
into his ear, and a moment later the blanket was re- 
moved and a dirty gag was thrust into his mouth, 
that he might not cry out. 

If the Western youth had been surprised before, 
he was amazed now, for the two men who had thus 
'unceremoniously made him a prisoner were none 
other than Paul Radell and the scar-chinned fel- 


ON THE PAMPAS 2ig 

low, Roberto Olano, the man who had taken Hock- 
ley’s pocket-book in La Paz. 

“What shall we do with him?” asked Roberto 
Olano, in broken English. 

“ We’ll take him into the woods for the present,” 
answered Radell. “ Bring along the horse. Then 
I’ll see how Markel is making out with those 
gmichos. Perhaps they won’t do what we want 
them to.” 

“ I know that class well, and they will do almost 
anything for money,” answered Olano. “ But we 
must be careful, since the others of that party are 
so close.” 

Darry heard these words, but could not answer, 
nor ask any questions. He was hurried through 
the woods, and, at a distance, bound tightly to a 
small tree. His horse was tethered near him, and 
then the two men went off, in the direction of the 
camp on the bank of the river. 

In the meantime the others of Barry’s party had 
kept on the broad trail, and thus they reached the 
woods at a point somewhat north of where the 
Western youth had entered it. Here they halted 
and looked around. 

“ Wonder where Darry went ? ” mused Sam. 


220 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

“ He can^t be very far off,” returned Mark. “ Let 
us call to him.” 

They called half a dozen times, but no answer 
came back. Then they continued on through the 
woods until they reached a spot on the river where 
there was a ford. 

“ He may have gone to the other side of the 
river,” said Jake. “ Do you see any fresh hoof- 
marks ? ” 

All made an examination, but there were so many 
marks, coming and going, that they could make 
nothing of them. 

“ I do not like this turn of affairs,” said Amos 
Strong, seriously. “ He ought to have known 
enough to wait for us at the edge of the timber.” 

“ Let us ford the river to see if he isn’t on the 
other side,” replied Mark, and led the way. The 
water was scarcely a foot deep at the ford, and all 
of the horses insisted upon stopping for a drink. 

On the opposite side of the river the forest was 
quite dense. But the trail was broad, so they had 
little difficulty in making their way along in pairs. 
As they advanced they frequently gave a call, and 
once Professor Strong discharged his pistol as a 
signal. 


ON THE PAMPAS 


221 


‘‘ Darry would answer that, if he heard it,” said 
Sam, and now the Boston boy looked very thought- 
ful. I am afraid he has gotten into some sort 
of trouble.” 

“ Supposing some of us go ahead and some of us 
return to the river? ” suggested Frank. “ Then, as 
soon as Darry is found, we can fire a shot to let the 
others know.” 

This was thought good advice, and while Sam and 
Mark continued on the broad trail through the 
forest. Professor Strong, Frank, and Jake turned 
back to the river bank. 

You may remain here,” said the tutor, presently, 
to Frank and Jake. “ I am going still further back. 
It is possible he lost the trail before the forest was 
reached.” And he sped off along the back trail and 
was soon lost to view. 


CHAPTER XXI 


IN THE HANDS OF THE ENEMY 

Left to himself, Darry tugged away eagerly at 
the bonds which held him. He did not attempt to 
cry out, for the gag was fairly tight in his mouth, 
and he realized that his friends must be some 
distance away, probably entirely out of hearing. 

But the rascals who had made the Western youth 
a prisoner had done- their work well, and all he ac- 
complished by his efforts was to lacerate his wrists 
until the blood came. Then, realizing that his 
squirming was useless, he stopped. 

“Wonder what they will do with me?” he 
mused, but try his best he could not answer that 
question. He realized that he was in the power 
of men who were thoroughly unscrupulous, and who 
would probably stop at nothing to accomplish their 
ends. 

. “ They want to make money out of me,” he rea- 
soned. “ Most likely they will carry me off to some 


222 


IN THE HANDS OF THE ENEMY 223 

out-of-the-way place, and then demand a big sum 
from father for my release/' 

A quarter of an hour went by, and then came 
footsteps behind the boy. Markel and Radell ap- 
peared followed by Olano and several of the 
gauchos. As quickly as it could be done, Darry 
was released from the tree, and placed on the back 
of his horse. Then the steed was led to a trail 
running along the river bank. 

Darry felt that he must be getting further and 
further away from his friends, and the thought 
made his heart sink within him. The further he 
got away the smaller would be his chances of being 
rescued. 

Yet, try his best, he could think of nothing by 
which to better his condition. He was absolutely 
helpless, and at the mercy of those who held him 
captive. 

On and on went the party, along the river bank. 
At a distance of about half a mile they came to a 
place where the stream divided, and here they forded 
over to the patch of forest between the two 
branches. 

“ Water leaves no trail,” observed Dan Markel, 
with satisfaction. Then he turned and looked at 


224 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

Darry, and seeing that the youth was actually suf- 
fering from the gag, continued : “If I take that 
gag away, will you promise to keep quiet ? I don’t 
think anybody is within hearing, but we don’t care 
to take chances of being followed.” 

Darry was willing just then to do anything to get 
a good breath of air, and he nodded in the affirma- 
tive. The gag was thereupon removed, so that he 
could breathe more freely. 

“ Markel, where are you taking me ? ” demanded 
the boy, when he could speak. 

“ You had better not ask questions just now. 
Crane,” was the growled-out return. “We can do 
our talking when we get to where we are going.” 

“ You know it is against the law to treat me in 
this fashion. Abduction is a serious crime.” 

“ I am taking my chances,” answered the man 
from Baltimore, with an uneasy laugh. 

“ My friends will be after me. Professor Strong 
will get aid and run you down.” 

“ He’ll have a sweet time of it finding us,” put in 
Paul Radell. 

After this there was a period of silence, broken 
only by some questions put by Markel to the 
gauchos in Spanish. Evidently the cowboys had 


In the hands of the enemy 225 

agreed to do whatever the man from Baltimore 
wanted. 

Presently the party reached a clearing in the 
forest. Here there was a rude cabin, now deserted. 

‘‘ This is the place, senor” said one of the 
gauchos, to Markel. 

‘‘ It’s retired enough,” was Radell’s comment, as 
he looked around through the forest. Fd hardly 
know how to find my way out of here.” 

Darry was made to dismount, and was again tied 
to a tree, but this time in such a fashion that he 
could lie down if he wished to do so. His hands 
were behind him, and crossed at the wrists, so 
that he could do little towards releasing himself. 

The gauchos evidently knew the spot well, for 
they at once made themselves at home. A camp- 
fire was built, and one of the number started to 
cook a meal of some provisions brought along, con- 
sisting principally of charque, which is jerked beef, 
and beans and crackers. All also had a drink from 
a flask of liquor, and then they started to smoke 
and to talk. They spoke in a jargon peculiarly 
their own, so that Darry understood but little of 
what they said, and Markel and Radell were equally 
in the dark. 


226 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

‘‘ Markel, are you willing to tell me what you 
intend to do?’’ demanded Darry, as the man came 
in front of him and eyed him speculatively. 

“ Well, if you want to know so much, I am going 
to pay you back for some of the trouble you caused 
me in the past,” answered the man from Balti- 
more. 

“ I never caused you trouble that you didn’t de- 
serve,” was the Western youth’s spirited reply. “ If 
you had acted in an honest manner from the start, 
there would have been no trouble.” 

‘‘Bah! it is useless to talk to me like that, 
Crane. You and your friends got me into many a 
scrape, and now I am going to pay you back, and 
with interest.” 

“ What are you going to do ? ” 

Well, if you want to know, we intend to make 
all of you prisoners, and then ” 

“ Say, Dan, why do you tell him so much? ” in- 
terrupted Paul Radell. “ Time enough to go into 
details later on.” 

‘‘ I should not tell the boy one t’ing,” interposed 
Roberto Olano. ‘‘ He might possibly escape, an’ 
then he would expose all,” and he shook his scarred 
face decidedly. 


IN THE HANDS OF THE ENEMY 22 ^ 

** He shan’t escape, don’t fear,” returned Dan 
Markel. 

“ I guess I know what you have in mind to do,” 
said Darry, boldly. You are holding me to get 
money out of my folks, and that is what you think 
of doing to the others. Well, I hope my folks don’t 
give you a cent.” 

They had better! ” growled Markel. “ If they 
don’t — well, it will go hard with you, that’s all.” 

“ Who are these fellows who are with you? ” 

“ Men who will do just as I want them to.” 

“ Do they belong on the ranches around here? ” 

“ No, they come from a distance.” 

Ask the boy about himself, and what his father 
is worth,” came from Radell. 

“ You can ask all you please, but you’ll not get 
any information from me,” returned Darry, firmly. 

You’d better tell.” 

“ Not a word! ” 

We’ll find a way of making you tell,” growled 
Radell, and then motioned for Markel to come to a 
distance. Once out of earshot of the lad, the pair 
talked earnestly for several minutes. 

Slowly night came on, and poor Darry was left 
bound as before. He was given a drink of water, 


228 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

but no food. He now commenced to realize what 
the men from Baltimore had in mind to do. They 
intended to starve him into submission, so that he 
would tell them anything and everything they 
wanted to know. 

“ Oh, what base wretches ! ” he reasoned. “ But 
they shan’t get anything out of me — I’ll die first! ” 
And he shut his teeth hard. 

All of the party but Olano and the gaucho called 
Juan had departed, probably to spy on the move- 
ments of Professor Strong and the others. Darry 
had watched their going with interest, and spec- 
ulated on what this new move meant. 

“ Maybe they’ll capture some of the crowd and 
bring them here,” he reasoned. “ Oh, if only I 
could warn them in some way! But I am afraid 
I can’t do a thing.” 

Juan was evidently sleepy, and it was not long be- 
fore he rolled himself in his poncho and began to 
snore. Olano sat by a tiny campfire, smoking one 
cigarette after another, and thinking deeply. 

Darry watched the scar- faced man and wished 
he would go to sleep, too. He commenced to work 
on his bonds once more, determined to get free if 
such a thing were possible. 


IN THE HANDS OF THE ENEMY 229 

“ You are a rich boy, yes? ’’ said Roberto Olano, 
presently. 

“ You may think so if you wish,” answered 
Darry, coldly. 

“ You fader pay well to have you go free? ” 

“ I hope he won’t pay a cent.” 

You like to be prisonair, yes? Maybe you like 
to starve, too ? ” went on the man, with a leer. 

You won’t dare to starve me.” 

“ We starve if it is of a necessity.” 

“ Olano, do you know that we know you robbed 
one of our party in La Paz? ” went on Darry, after 
a pause. 

“ Ha ! Not so, not so ! ” stormed the scar-faced 
man. 

“ It is so. You took that pocket-book from Jake 
Hockley, down in the market place.” 

Bah ! You talk too much ! ” growled Olano. 
“If you say ” he broke off short. 

From a distance had come a peculiar whistle. 
Whether it was a signal or not Darry did not know, 
but evidently Roberto Olano was much interested. 
He moved as if to awaken the sleeping gaucho, 
then changed his mind, kicked out the campfire, and 
walked out of sight among the trees. 


230 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

If he was to escape, now was Barry’s chance, and 
frantically he continued to work at his bonds. The 
ropes at his wrists finally gave way a little and he 
managed to slip his hands loose. Then he worked 
at the ropes on his feet and got those unfastened. 

Juan was still sleeping, but there was no telling 
how soon Roberto Olano would return. The youth 
looked around for his horse, but the steed had been 
taken away by his captors. 

Another signal rang out, and now Barry heard 
the low murmur of voices. Some of the gaiichos 
were returning to the camp, and with them was 
Paul Radell. 

The Western youth realized that he had no time 
to lose. As silently as a shadow he glided in 
among the trees. He could not see where he was 
going, and passed within a few feet of Radell and 
one of the cowboys. The latter held a torch in his 
hand, and had he happened to look in the right di- 
rection, Barry must have been discovered. 

But he was not seen, and as the men passed into 
the camp, Barry sped deeper into the forest. He 
did not know where he was going and, just then, 
did not care, his one thought being to get as far 
from his enemies as possible. 


IN THE HANDS OF THE ENEMY 23 1 

The youth had covered less than a hundred feet 
when a shout reached his ears, telling him that his 
escape had been discovered. Then came a call for 
Olano. 

“Where is the boy?'’ demanded Radell. 

“ I know not,” stammered Roberto Olano, in 
amazement. “ He was here but a minute ago, 
bound as you left him.” 

“ You are sure of that? ” 

“Yes, yes! I was with him until I heard your 
whistle. Then I walked forward to make sure 
that all was well.” 

Juan was kicked awake, and he was as much 
astonished as Olano. Neither could tell how Darry 
had gotten away. 

“ This is a pretty mess ! ” murmured Paul Radell. 
“ Markel won’t like it, I can tell you that. We 
must search the forest and recapture that boy! If 
he gets away and reaches his friends he may spoil 
our whole game ! ” 

“ I will do anything you say,” murmured Olano. 

“ I will find the boy if it can be done,” came 
from Juan, in Spanish. 

“ Let us spread out in a circle, and each arm him- 
self with a torch,” continued Radell. “ He cannot 


232 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

be far off, and if he went down to the river we’ll 
be bound to strike his trail sooner or later. Come, 
the sooner we get after him the better.” 

And then the hunt for Darry commenced in 
earnest. 


CHAPTER XXII 


THE BANDITS OF THE PAMPAS 

Professor Strong was much worried. He felt 
instinctively that something had gone wrong with 
Darry, and he wondered what it could be. He 
plunged into the forest at various points, and at 
last touched on a trail that looked to be fresh. He 
was gone the best part of an hour, and when he re- 
turned to where he had left Frank and Jake, his 
face was full of concern. Mark and Sam had also 
returned, and all of the young explorers looked in- 
quiringly at the tutor. 

“ I am afraid that something serious has hap- 
pened to Dart worth,” said Amos Strong. 

“Did you get any track of him?” questioned 
Mark, eagerly. 

“ I did in a way. I followed his horse’s hoof- 
marks on a side trail, and they led to a place where 
there were a number of other footprints, of men as 
well as horses. It loNoked to me as if there had been 


233 


234 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

something of a struggle, or as if a horse had run 
away. Then I followed another trail to a camp 
along the river bank. Here a number of people 
had stopped, and also some horses. At the camp I 
picked this up.” 

It’s Barry’s notebook ! ” exclaimed Sam. 

Exactly, and it was lying close to a tree, and 
the bark of the tree was worn, as if some animal 
or a human being had been fastened there. There 
were footmarks close to the tree.” 

‘‘ Do you think Barry has been made a prisoner 
by somebody? ” cried Jake, and his face grew pale 
with apprehension. 

It looks so to me, otherwise why does he not 
return, or send some word to us? If he was hurt 
and met some others, he would send somebody to us 
with news.” 

“ Unless he was unconscious,” put in Frank. 
‘‘ That horse he was riding was a mighty frisky 
animal. Maybe he ran away and threw Barry, and 
knocked him unconscious, and the folks who found 
him didn’t know about us.” 

“ I fired my pistol several times and called out, 
too, but nobody answered me,” pursued Amos 
Strong. “ The whole matter looks very bad to 


THE BANDITS OF THE PAMPAS 235 

me,” and his serious face plainly showed how much 
the tutor was worried. 

“ Why should anybody hold Darry a prisoner? ” 
asked Jake. 

'‘Well, you know what we heard before!” ex- 
claimed one of the others. “ This may be part of 
a deep game, hatched out by Markel and Radell.” 

The others could scarcely credit this, yet they 
agreed it might be so. The main question was, 
What should they do next? 

“ Well, one thing is certain,” said Sam, decidedly. 
“We can’t go ahead without Darry.” 

“ Of course not,” seconded Mark. 

“ But what are you going to do ? ” demanded 
Jake. “ We can’t sit here and suck our thumbs.” 

“ Do you want to go on without Darry, Jake? ” 
asked Frank. 

“ Certainly not. But I don’t know what to do. 
It will be night before long.” 

“ Well, we can camp out here as well as any- 
where,” was Mark’s comment. 

“ Yes, the bank of the river will afford an ex- 
cellent camping-spot,” answered Professor Strong. 

They talked the matter over a while longer, and 
then concluded to go into camp close to the main 


236 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

trail and the river. Wood was gathered by the na- 
tives, who had remained near the river during the 
hunt, and a brisk blaze was started up. 

“ We’ll keep a good fire going,” said Mark. 

Then, if Darry starts to find us, he can do it.” 

The native cook prepared an excellent meal, but 
nobody was in the humor to eat a great deal. Even 
Jake was downcast and shook his head a number of 
times. 

“ I reckon we missed it by not keeping to the 
railroad,” he said. “ Horsebacking is good enough, 
but it doesn’t pay if we are going to have such 
trouble as this.” 

Although all were tired out, only the natives felt 
like sleeping. The others sat around the campfire, 
discussing the situation from every possible point 
of view. 

For all we know, Darry may be dead,” said 
Sam, dolefully. ‘‘ His horse may have thrown 
him into the river on the rocks, and he may be 
drowned.” 

‘‘ Let us hope for the best,” answered Professor 
Strong. “As soon as it is light we can institute 
another search.” 

As it grew later, one after another of the boys 


THE BANDITS OF THE PAMPAS 237 

dropped into a doze. Sam was the only one to re- 
main wide-awake, for Darry was very dear to him, 
and he could not get the Western youth out of his 
mind. 

“ Don’t you wish to sleep, Samuel ? ” questioned 
the professor, who was walking up and down by 
the river, nervously. 

I can’t do it, sir,” was the reply. “ Oh, Pro- 
fessor, supposing something serious has happened 
to Darry ! And just when we are on the very end 
of this long trip, too ! ” 

It is too bad, Samuel; but you must keep up 
your courage.” 

Another hour went by, and the professor was in 
the act of replenishing the campfire, which had 
burned low, when he paused as a sound from a 
distance reached his ears. The night was very 
quiet, and noises could be heard a long way off. 

I believe it is somebody on horseback ! ” he 
murmured to himself. 

What did you say, sir ? ” questioned Sam. 

I hear something — I do not know what it is.” 

Both listened and heard the sounds coming closer. 
Then, through the night air, floated a well-known 
musical whistle. 


238 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

It’s Darry ! ” almost shouted the boy from Bos- 
ton. ‘‘Hello, Darry!” he yelled. “This way!” 
And then he gave a similar whistle — one all the 
boys practiced constantly and knew well. 

The whistle was repeated, and answered, and 
soon those around the campfire saw a figure on 
horseback approaching. It was truly Darry, and 
all of his friends ran forward to greet him. 

“ Where in the world have you been ? ” 

“You look tired to death!” 

“ What is the matter with your wrists ? ” 

These and other questions were asked, as Darry 
rode into camp and dropped rather than jumped 
from his steed. 

“ One question at a time, please ! ” he gasped, 
as he sank on the ground. “ And first of all, please 
give me a drink of water, and then something to 
eat. I am half starved ! ” 

“ You shall have all you want,” declared Pro- 
fessor Strong, and at once ordered the native cook 
to make coffee and prepare a meal. In the mean- 
time Darry was given a drink of water, and his 
lacerated wrists were dressed. 

“ I don’t know if those rascals are following me 
or not,” he declared, after he had told of how he 


THE BANDITS OF THE PAMPAS 239 

had been made a prisoner. “ When they found i 
had gotten away they were very angry, and I had all 
I could do to keep from being discovered. Then, 
by pure luck, I stumbled across my horse, tied to a 
tree; and here I am. I knew you must be some- 
where on the trail and near the river, and I rode in 
this direction until I spotted the gleam of the camp- 
fire.” 

“ Those fellows are certainly rascals,” was Mark’s 
comment. “ And those cowboys are evidently as 
bad as the others.” 

Don’t you think we had better move on, now 
Darry is here?” questioned Jake, nervously. ‘‘I 
don’t want to be made a prisoner.” 

‘‘ I doubt if they would dare to attack us while 
we are together,” said Professor Strong. “ But if 
you wish, we can move to some spot across the 
river, where it would be more difficult for them to 
locate us, especially in the dark. Then all of us 
may feel more like going to sleep for the rest of the 
night.” 

Accordingly, as soon as Darry had rested and 
had had something to eat, they broke camp and 
moved along the trail and over the ford, and 
then into the forest. It was decided to light no 


240 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

fire, and all took turns at standing guard, Darry 
excepted. 

Nobody came to disturb them, and when the sun 
arose all was as peaceful and quiet around the camp 
as could be expected. While the professor and the 
boys had breakfast, they plied Darry with ques- 
tions, and he told them all he knew of the plans 
of Markel and those with him. 

“ What we ought to do is to report this at the 
nearest town,” said Frank, “ and have Markel, 
Radell, Olano, and the others locked up. As long 
as those chaps are at large we won’t be safe.” 

Those gauchos do not belong around here, I 
found out,” said Darry. “ They come from the 
northern part of Argentina, from the Grand Chaco, 
as it is called. They are a wild set, and some of 
them have Indian blood in their veins. Their leader 
is a man named Anzenos, but he is not with them 
just now.” 

“ Anzenos ! ” cried Professor Strong, and at the 
mention of the name even the two natives looked 
up with interest. 

Yes. Have you ever heard of him? ” 

Yes, Dartworth, I have. Anzenos is nothing 
but a bandit, roaming the entire western portion of 


THE BANDITS OF THE FAMPAS ^41 

Argentina. Years ago he was a mail carrier, and 
it is said that he delights in holding up the mail 
whenever he thinks it will pay him to do so. If 
those gaiichos were under that fellow, they were 
undoubtedly bandits also. I am very glad that you 
escaped from their clutches.” 

‘‘ Perhaps Anzenos will collect other members of 
his band and come after the lot of us ! ” cried Jake. 
“ I think the best thing we can do is to move on to 
some city, and then get on the train for Buenos 
Aires.” 

“ There is no city near here, Jacob. We might 
turn back.” 

“ Oh, I wouldn’t turn back,” put in Mark. “ We 
are armed, and on the line of a number of large 
ranches and villages. I don’t think they’d dare to 
attack us while we kept together, and especially if 
they saw our firearms.” 

“ I don’t believe in showing the white feather,” 
put in Frank. 

“ Nor do I,” added Sam, and I shan’t turn back 
unless Darry and the professor want it.” 

“ I’ll go ahead, if the rest say so,” answered the 
boy from the West. “ Maybe now that I’ve 
escaped from the bunch, they’ll get scared — ^think- 


242 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

ing we’ll set the authorities after ’em — and clear out 
for good.” 

“ Let us hope that will be the case,” said Amos 
Strong. “ Then it is settled that we go ahead, at 
least as far as Don Pelos’s ranch, which we ought 
to reach day after to-morrow. When we are safe 
at the ranch, we can decide upon what is best to do 
next.” 

The forward move was begun a little later, and 
they traveled steadily until noon, when they rested 
in the shade of some trees surrounding a spring of 
pure, cold water. They saw several herds of cattle, 
and also a drove of horses, some of them white in 
color. 

“ They are the wild horses of the pampas,” ex- 
plained Professor Strong. ‘‘ And they are about as 
unmanageable as you can imagine. I have never 
had any experience with them, but it is said that 
they are worse than our own Western broncos.” 

‘‘ I don’t see how anything could be worse than 
a bucking bronco,” said Darry. I’d like to try 
one once, just to see.” 

“ You had better leave them alone,” returned the 
tutor. 

“ I shall for the present, sir,” replied Darry, with 


THE BANDITS OF THE PAMPAS 243 

a grin. “ I don’t believe a fellow could get within 
gunshot of them, they are so wild and scary.” 

During the afternoon they made good progress, 
and about five o’clock passed a caravan moving 
slowly over a cross trail leading southward. The 
caravan was made up of about a dozen c arret as, or 
carts, each drawn by four oxen, wearing yokes of 
heavy timber. The carts were two-wheeled affairs, 
wide and roomy, and with big wooden wheels all of 
six feet in diameter. Alongside of each carreta 
strode the driver, with his prod and his long, snake- 
like whip, shouting lustily to his team, to keep them 
in motion. As the trail was dry, the air was filled 
with dust, and dust covered the whole turnout. 

A tall, weatherbeaten rancher was at the head of 
the caravan, and to this fellow Professor Strong re- 
lated the particulars of the encounter with the band 
under Anzenos. At the mention of that bandit’s 
name, the caravan leader was much disturbed. 

“ They are bold, bloodthirsty villains,” he said in 
Spanish. Only last week they shot down some 
mail carriers and robbed them. There is a price 
on their heads. But I doubt if they will be cap- 
tured. They know too well how to keep themselves 
hidden.” 


CHAPTER XXIII 


A MIDNIGHT ADVENTURE 

“ Boys, I think we had better keep together after 
this,” said Professor Strong, after they had parted 
company with those forming the caravan. ‘‘ I do 
not consider it will be safe for any of you to ride off 
alone.” 

“ Do you really think Markel and those outlaws 
will follow us?” questioned Jake, anxiously. 

“ I do not know, Jacob. That fellow, Anzenos, 
has a reputation for holding up anybody who has 
money, and if Markel and Radell tell him your folks 
are wealthy and will pay a handsome ransom for 
your release, he and his band may do all in their 
power to make us prisoners.” 

“ Can’t we get to the railroad and get on the 
cars ? ” 

“ Oh, let us go ahead as we originally planned ! ” 
cried Frank. “I don’t want to sit in the stuffy 
cars if I can ride on horseback.” 


244 


A MIDNIGHT ADVENTURE 245 

Again the matter was discussed, and all but Hock- 
ley were in favor of continuing on horseback. 

“ The railroad is quite a distance from here,” 
said the tutor. And it would take almost as long 
to reach the nearest station as to get to Don Pelos’s 
estancia. If we keep together and watch out, I 
think we shall be safe.” 

They rode on until nearly sunset, and then went 
into camp beside a stream that was little more than 
a brook. Here were several immense omhu trees, 
the branches stretching out on all sides for many 
yards. Beside the brook the pampas grass was 
thick, and here the horses proceeded to make them- 
selves at home. 

‘‘ I think it best that we keep a good guard all 
night,” said Amos Strong. “ I am going to divide 
our party up, so that two of our number will be 
awake all the time. One can be stationed at the 
north and east of the camp and the other at the 
south and west. There will be no moon, but I think 
the stars will all be out, so it will be fairly light.” 

“ What about a campfire? ” asked Sam. “ Won’t 
that attract attention, after it gets dark? ” 

‘‘ Yes, and I think, as soon as supper is cooked, 
we will let it go out.” 


246 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

Ever since the name of Anzenos had been men- 
tioned the natives had been plainly nervous, and 
they built the fire and cooked the evening meal in 
a fashion that indicated plainly that they had their 
minds elsewhere. 

“ Anzenos is a great, heartless wretch,” said one 
of the natives, to Sam. “ He stops at nothing to 
get what he wants.” 

“ It’s a pity the authorities can’t catch him,” re- 
plied the boy. 

“ He leads a charmed life, so I have been told,” 
was the assertion. “ Times without number has 
he been shot at, and never once has a bullet reached 
him.” 

That is a common rumor regarding all bandits,” 
said Professor Strong. “ I heard the same story 
once of a bandit in Mexico. All the natives in a 
town declared that he had been shot at fifty times, 
and never been hurt. But the very next week he 
held up a Texan on the highway, and that man drew 
his six-shooter and put two bullets into him, killing 
him almost instantly. Sooner or later this man, 
Anzenos, will meet the fate he seems to deserve.” 

Supper was eaten, and then the campfire was al- 
lowed to die down. Professor Strong putting on a 


A MIDNIGHT ADVENTURE 247 

little damp wood and a few wet leaves, to make a 
smudge, to drive away the mosquitoes and the 
pampas flies, which were numerous. The horses 
were securely tethered, and then one by one the 
boys turned in. Professor Strong and one of the 
natives doing duty first as sentinels. 

About midnight Frank and Sam found them- 
selves on guard, to do duty until three o’clock. 
Each of the lads had had quite a nap, and conse- 
quently felt wide awake. So far nothing had come 
to disturb the travelers, and it looked as if the re- 
mainder of the night might pass without interrup- 
tion. 

‘‘ I don’t believe Markel and that bunch know 
where we are,” said Sam to his chum, in a low 
tone, so as not to disturb the others. 

“ We mustn’t be too sure of it, Frank. From 
what Darry says, they may be hot on our trail. 
Markel is evidently very angry over what has taken 
place in the past, and is willing to do anything to get 
the best of us.” 

The two boys continued to discuss the situation 
in low tones, and then each took a short walk up 
and down the stream and over the pampas beyond. 

Sam was moving along slowly, looking out on the 


248 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

pampas, when a low whistle from Frank reached 
his ears. Immediately he hurried to where his 
chum was standing, in an attitude of keen suspense. 

“ What is it ? What do you see ? ” he whispered. 

“ Something out there, moving,” was the low re- 
ply, and the New York lad pointed to the pampas 
south of the largest of the omhu trees. 

Both looked “ with all eyes,” but could see 
nothing. They waited for fully a minute, but not 
a sound broke the stillness. 

“ Perhaps you were mistaken,” said Sam. 

No, I am sure I saw something, sneaking along 
through the grass,” answered Frank. 

Again they looked and waited, and thus fully five 
minutes went by. Then, from one of the horses 
came a snort, as of fear. 

“ It must be some animal,” whispered Frank. “ If 
it was a man, that horse wouldn’t carry on that way.” 

‘‘ What sort of an animal could it be? ” 

Oh, anything from a pampas dog to a jaguar.” 

“ Got your pistol ready? ” 

“ Sure. Have you ? ” 

“Of course. But I’d rather have the professor’s 
rifle — if it’s some big beast.” 

“ Then go and get it. I’ll stay on guard here.” 


A MIDNIGHT ADVENTURE 


249 


The rifle was brought forward, and once more 
the two youths waited. Then came another snort 
from the horses, and of a sudden there was a wild 
commotion among all of the steeds. 

It’s something, sure!” cried Frank. “Come 
on I ” And he headed for the spot where the 
horses had been tethered. 

The commotion increased, and the noise was so 
great that everybody in the camp was awakened. 
As the two boys drew closer, they saw one of the 
horses running away, dragging the lasso that had 
held him at his heels. Then another steed fol- 
lowed, bounding over the pampas madly. 

“ It’s a big beast — I think it’s a jaguar! ” cried 
Frank, and then he opened fire, and Sam quickly 
followed. 

They did not wish to hit any of their horses, 
and so had to aim with care. The jaguar — for 
such it really was — had leaped for one of the re- 
maining horses. That steed whirled around and 
planted a hoof in the beast’s side. 

Crack! crack! went the rifle and the pistol in the 
hands of Sam and Frank, and the jaguar was struck 
in the flank. Thinking an enemy was at its heels, it 
gave a vicious snap in that direction. At the same 


250 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

time the horse it had attacked gave a wild snort 
and, breaking loose, followed its two mates on a 
wild gallop over the pampas. 

By this time all the men and boys in the camp 
were on their feet. Professor Strong reached for 
his rifle, and, not finding it, got his pistol. 

‘‘ What is it?” 

“ Are those rascals attacking us ? ” 

Are the horses running away?” 

These and other questions filled the air. Then 
Mark saw the midnight visitor and gave a yell : 

‘‘ A jaguar ! Look out, he is headed for camp ! ” 

“ Oh ! ” screamed Jake, and then the lank youth 
suddenly shut his teeth hard and felt for his pistol. 
He had made up his mind to be as brave as any- 
body, no matter what the consequences. Several 
more shots rang out, and the jaguar was sent whirl- 
ing on its back. It fairly screamed with pain, and 
the remaining horses snorted in terror. 

“ Keep back ! Don’t let him reach you ! ” called 
out Amos Strong. He fired his pistol, and Jake 
also took a shot, and so did each of the others. 

Such treatment was too much for the jaguar. 
It tried to get up, but could not, and so rolled over 
and over, screaming and spitting ferociously. In 


A MIDNIGHT ADVENTURE 


251 


its pain it did not notice the smoldering campfire, 
and so rolled right into this, scattering the embers 
in all directions. But then a final bullet from the 
repeating rifle passed through its head, and with a 
quiver it stretched out and lay still. 

“ Is — is it dead ? questioned Jake. He was so 
agitated he could scarcely speak. 

“ I think it is,'' answered the professor. “ Wait 
a minute until I light a torch and make sure." 

It was soon ascertained that the jaguar was dead, 
and then all present breathed more freely. It was 
a long but gaunt creature, and had evidently been 
suffering from intense hunger. 

‘‘ They come around camps and attack horses only 
when very hungry," explained Professor Strong. 

“ Do you suppose there are any more of them 
around ? " asked Darry. 

“ I do not know. I trust not." 

“ Three of the horses are gone ! " cried Sam. 
“ What are we going to do about that ? " 

“We'll have to catch them," answered Mark. 
“ Perhaps they didn't run very far." 

Everybody in the camp was so wide awake that 
further sleep was out of the question. All sat 
around the smudge, talking the situation over. 


252 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

They hoped the runaway horses would come back of 
their own free will, but in this they were mistaken; 
not a single steed showed himself. 

“ Well, we can’t go on very well without the 
horses,” said Frank. ‘‘ What are we to do? ” 

‘‘ We’ll simply have to find ’em,” answered 
Darry. “I’ll see if I can’t round ’em up as soon 
as it is daylight.” 

At early dawn he and the professor sallied forth, 
on the backs of two of the remaining horses. 

“ You stay right here until we get back,” said 
Amos Strong to the others. “ And don’t allow 
any strangers to come near unless you feel certain 
they are friendly.” 

“All right; we’ll be on guard,” answered Mark. 

An hour went by, and the others got breakfast, 
consisting largely of some delicious fish caught in 
the brook. Then the time dragged along slowly 
until nearly noon. 

“I see somebody coming!” cried Sam at last. 
He was shading his eyes and looking across the 
pampas to the northward. 

“ Two persons on horseback, and with other 
horses by their side,” cried Jake. 

“ The professor and Darry,” supplemented 


A MIDNIGHT ADVENTURE 253 

Frank. “ And they are riding just as fast as the 
horses can go ! ” 

“ It’s queer they should ride so fast,” was Sam’s 
comment. “ Those horses will be all tired out, and 
they won’t want to do anything but walk this after- 
noon, when we continue our journey.” 

“ Maybe they have news of some sort ! ” cried 
Frank. “ They certainly act as if they were in a 
hurry.” 

On and on came Professor Strong and Darry, 
the hoof beats sounding out quite plainly over the 
broad pampas. The boys and even the natives 
watched their approach with keen interest. As he 
came more plainly into view, Darry waved his hand 
at them. The tutor, however, kept doggedly on 
until he was within a few yards, then he stopped 
short and leaped to the ground, and the boy from 
the West followed. 

Boys, we have got to leave here at once ! ” said 
Amos Strong. “ Pack up everything as quickly as 
possible, and we’ll be off.” 

“What’s the matter?” asked the others, in a 
breath. 

“ The matter is that that fellow, Anzenos, and 
his band are after us,” answered Darry. 


CHAPTER XXIV 


CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

The announcement that the bandit Anzenos was 
after them, filled the others of the party with con- 
sternation. 

“ How did you learn this ? ” asked Mark. 

‘‘We have no time to tell the story now,’^ an- 
swered Amos Strong. “ Let us pack up as quickly 
as it can be done and be off, and we’ll tell what we 
know when we are on the way.” 

The tutor was evidently much worried, and know- 
ing how bravely he usually acted, the others felt 
that the situation must be unusually grave. 

“ I — I hope they don’t catch us,” muttered Jake, 
as he helped to pack up the camping outfit. “ Do 
you think there are many of them in the band? ” 

“ There are at least a dozen,” answered Darry. 

“Are Markel and Radell with them?” asked 
Sam. 

“ Yes, and Olano too.” 

254 


CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 255 

But little more was said just then, everybody 
paying attention to packing up, so that nothing 
might be left behind. The natives were almost 
white with fear. 

'' Anzenos will kill us all!” muttered the cook. 

Oh, that I were back in the village again ! ” 

“ I do not think he wishes to kill anybody,” an- 
swered Professor Strong. “ He has been informed 
by Markel and the others that we are very wealthy, 
and he is going to do what he can to capture us 
and hold us for heavy ransom.” 

At last the traps were packed up, and all leaped 
into the saddle. A last look was taken around, 
and then off they galloped. Professor Strong lead- 
ing the way. 

Are we to ride for Don Pelos’s ranch? ” asked 
Frank. 

I hardly think that will be best,” answered the 
tutor. ‘‘ In some manner those rascals have dis- 
covered that we were bound for that place, and they 
will doubtless try to intercept us. We’ll have to 
take to one of the trails leading to the southeast- 
ward, and trust to luck to reach some other place 
of safety.” 

The two natives were consulted, but they could 


256 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

give little information about the trails other than 
that which they had been following. Both de- 
murred when it came to leaving the main trail. 

“ We go to the Pelos estancia, yes/’ said one. 

No go that way,” and he pointed with his hand. 

“We are going that way,” answered Amos 
Strong, sharply. 

“No go that way,” said the other native. “ Go 
this way,” and he pointed to the main trail. 

The tutor tried to argue, but the natives were 
stubborn. As said before, they were badly fright- 
ened, and their one thought was to leave those for 
whom Anzenos and his band were seeking. They 
demanded their pay, and on receiving this, said they 
would go back to the village where they belonged. 

“ Very well, you can go,” answered the professor, 
coldly. “ I want no such cowards in my com- 
pany.” 

“ You will see who is the coward — when you face 
the dreaded Anzenos,” cried one of the natives, in 
Spanish, and then both wheeled their horses about, 
and galloped off on the back trail. 

“ Do you think they’ll tell that bandit how we 
are headed ? ” asked Darry. 

“ Hardly,” answered the tutor. “ They fear him 


CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 257 

SO greatly that they will do all in their power to 
keep out of his sight.” 

As the professor and the boys rode on over the 
pampas, the tutor and Darry told of their adven- 
tures while looking for the missing horses. After 
circling around for several miles, they had discov- 
ered the steeds at a distance, cropping the pampas 
grass. The horses would not let them get close, 
however, until they had chased the steeds into some 
timber. 

They had been on the point of returning with 
the horses, when they chanced to see a camp at a 
distance. This was close to some rocks, and, leav- 
ing the horses tied to some trees, they had climbed 
up the rocks, to see who was in the camp. They 
had soon recognized Markel and Radell and, a little 
later, Olano, because of the scar on his chin. Then 
they had noticed a gaudily-attired horseman mov- 
ing about among the ganchos, talking earnestly to 
them, and had heard this fellow addressed as Cap- 
itan Anzenos. 

“ As soon as I knew the fellow was the bandit 
leader, I grew anxious to learn what he was talk- 
ing about,” said Professor Strong. “ We listened 
closely, and I made out that he was telling his men 


f 


258 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

what Markel and Radell had said, that we were all 
wealthy travelers, and if we could be made pris- 
oners and carried off to some out-of-the-way spot 
in this locality, no doubt our relatives would pay 
princely sums for our release. Markel and Radell 
had evidently told their story well, for Anzenos was 
very much interested, and soon he got all of his 
followers excited. Every man agreed to chase 
after us and run us down, and they were getting 
ready to start when we came away, so they ar^ 
probably already on our track.” 

“ Do you think they can be very close to us ? ” 
asked Jake, and looked back along the trail, as if 
expecting the bandits to show themselves then and 
there. 

“ No, I think we have a pretty fair start,” an- 
swered Amos Strong. “ But I noticed that they 
have the best of horses, and all of them must know 
how to ride well — I mean the gauchos. Of course, 
Markel and Radell, and probably Olano, can ride 
no better than we can.” 

If only we could reach some large ranch, where 
the owner would protect us! ” sighed Frank. 

“ The trouble is, one does not know whom to trust 
here,” answered the professor. “ Ranch owners 


CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 


259 


are afraid of men like Anzenos, because of the dam- 
age he can do to their herds of cattle, and to their 
horses. We might go to some rancher 0 for pro- 
tection, and he might play right into the hands of 
our enemies.” 

‘‘ Then you want to head for one of the towns ? ” 
asked Mark. 

“ I think that would be best.” 

On and on they went, over the broad pampas. 
The brook with its big trees had been left behind, 
and on all sides were the boundless prairies, upon 
which the sun shone with scarcely a cloud. Occa- 
sionally they saw some cattle at a distance, but that 
was all. 

The day was drawing to a close, and they had 
somewhat slackened their pace, for their horses 
were tired, when Mark, who had turned around, 
to get a good view of what was behind, uttered an 
exclamation. 

What is it, Mark? ” questioned Frank, who was 
nearest to his chum. 

Look yonder, Frank ! Are those horsemen, or 
only some cattle? ” 

Frank studied the distant objects with care for 
several seconds. 


26 o chased across the pampas 

They look like horsemen to me,” he said at 
last. “ But they are a long way off.” 

The attention of the others was called to the ob- 
jects, and Professor Strong quickly brought into 
play the field-glass he carried. He took one good 
look. 

“ They are after us ! ” he exclaimed. “ And they 
are riding just as hard as they can! ” 

“How many of them?” asked Mark. 

“ Fourteen or fifteen, and perhaps more.” 

“ Are they headed this way ? ” came from Darry. 
“ Maybe they haven’t seen us yet.” 

“ Yes, they are coming straight for us.” 

“ Then all that is left to do is to outride ’em I ” 
cried Frank. “Can we do that?” he asked, 
anxiously. 

“ We can try,” answered the tutor, grimly. 

“ Oh, if only we didn’t have our camping out- 
fit! ” exclaimed Jake. 

“ Well, they have their outfit, too,” answered 
Darry. “ They carry it with them wherever they 
go, so on that score we are even. Come on ! We’ve 
no time to lose ! ” 

Nobody needed any urging, and in a moment the 
professor and the boys were galloping across the 


CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 26 1 

pampas at the best speed they could get out of their 
steeds. 

It was a truly thrilling chase. Led by Anzenos, 
the gauchos came on like the wind, yelling, and oc- 
casionally firing a pistol in the air, just to scare our 
friends. As close behind the bandits as possible 
rode Markel, Radell, and Olano. They wished to 
see the travelers made captives, but they did not 
wish to run any chance of being shot down if the 
objects of their pursuit showed fight. 

“ Do you think we’ll catch them? ” asked Radell, 
when those ahead were in plain sight. 

I don’t see how it can be otherwise,” answered 
Dan Markel. “ Their horses — or at least some of 
them — must be about used up, while ours are still 
fresh.” 

It will be a great event if we do capture them,” 
went on Paul Radell. 

It will mean a barrel of money for all of us.” 

Provided we can work the game properly.” 

Oh, you leave that end of it to me. Once we 
get those fellows in our power. I’ll show you what 
I can do,” boasted Markel. 

That captain of the bandits will want the lion’s 
share of the ransom, Dan.” 


262 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

“ But he won’t get it, Paul. Just you wait and 
see.” 

The chase continued, and slowly but surely those 
in pursuit drew closer to our friends. But they 
were still too far away to make a shot effective, so 
Professor Strong did not fire, even as a warning. 
But his rifle was ready for use, and his snapping 
eyes indicated that he was prepared for any trouble 
that might arise. 

‘‘ I wish no bloodshed, if it can be avoided,” he 
said. “ But I’d rather fight than have those fel- 
lows make me a prisoner.” 

“ So would I,” came from Mark, Frank, and 
Darry. 

‘‘ Well, we don’t want to be shot down,” inter- 
posed Jake. “ It would be better to let them take 
us prisoners than have anything like that happen.” 

“ I see something ahead ! ” cried Mark, a minute 
later. “ What do you think it is, a village? ” 

“ It is a patch of woods,” answered the professor, 
after using the field-glass. “ Come, if we can gain 
that, perhaps we can throw those fellows off the 
trail.” 

Here was a new inducement to go on, and their 
jaded steeds were urged forward. Soon their pur- 


CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 263 

suers discovered how they were headed, and set up a 
great shout, and at the same time fired several pistol 
shots into the air. 

“ I suppose that is a command to halt ! said Pro- 
fessor Strong. “ Well, I don’t propose to do it.” 

“ Why not fire some shots in return, just to let 
them know we are armed ? ” suggested Mark. 

“ A good idea,” was the answer, and half a dozen 
shots rent the air soon after. Looking back, they 
saw the gauchos and others halt. But not for long. 
Soon they came riding on as swiftly as before. 

It was a good mile to the woods that had been 
discovered, and to the boys it seemed that they 
would never reach that longed-for shelter. Jake 
was in advance, lashing his steed unmercifully to 
make him go faster. As they got closer they won- 
dered if the woods would be thick enough and deep 
enough to shelter them. 

The sun was now going down in the west, flood- 
ing the broad pampas with a final golden glow. 
The trees of the forest cast long shadows over the 
prairie grass, and here and there small animals 
darted hither and thither, alarmed by the hoofbeats 
of the advancing steeds. 

Just before they entered the woods, the professor 


264 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

halted his horse and swung around in his saddle. 
His rifle came to his shoulder, and he took careful 
aim. 

“ Are you going to shoot at them? ” asked Mark, 
with something like a gasp. 

No, at one of the horses,” was the answer, and 
then the rifle crack sounded out. The boys strained 
their eyes and saw the leading horse leap up, and 
then go down in a heap, hit in the foreleg. The 
rider went sailing in the air over his head, and 
pitched into the tall grass. 

‘‘ That may teach them a lesson,” said the tutor, 
gravely. ‘‘ Come, let us lose no more time ! ” And 
then one after another they entered the thicket be- 
fore them. ' 


CHAPTER XXV 


PURSUED AND PURSUERS 

Fortunately for our friends, the woods they 
had entered proved to be of considerable extent. 
As was to be expected, they bordered a small 
stream, coming from some springs at the south end, 
and in the vicinity of these springs were numerous 
clumps of heavy bushes, some of them gorgeous in 
their flowers. 

No time was lost in penetrating the woods to a 
distance of at least a quarter of a mile. Then they 
struck the small watercourse, and here Professor 
Strong called a halt. 

“ As you all know, water leaves no trail,” he said. 
“ But hoof marks can sometimes be traced even un- 
der water. To throw them off their guard more 
completely, we will enter the stream, go down a 
short distance, and then turn and go up. Then, if 
they make an inspection, they will see the hoof- 
prints leading both ways, and it will bother them. 

265 


266 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

From now on make as little noise as possible, for, 
despite the shot I gave them, they may be coming 
up to the woods as fast as ever.” 

They then entered the stream and did as he had 
mapped out. On going up the watercourse Amos 
Strong kept his eyes on the alert, and at one point 
located a spot where a small side stream came down 
from among some thick bushes. He forced his 
horse among these bushes, and then into the forest 
beyond, and one by one the boys on their steeds 
came after him. 

“ Now, if they do not hear us, they will have 
great difficulty in following us,” said the professor. 

But we will continue to go on as long as it is 
light, and get away from them as far as possible.” 

But how are we heading? ” questioned Jake. 

“We are heading eastward, the way we want to 
go,” returned Professor Strong. “ My idea is, if 
possible, to get to the other side of this forest be- 
fore morning, and then strike out across the pam- 
pas once more, leaving our followers searching for 
us here. By that means we may get another very 
good start of them.” 

“We may get lost in the forest,” grumbled the 
lank youth. 


PURSUED AND PURSUERS 


267 

“ We’ll have to run that risk, Jacob. But I do 
not see how we can become lost when I have my 
compass with me.” 

After this they advanced in silence, the tutor go- 
ing ahead slowly, for it was now dark, and he had 
no desire to step in a soft spot or a water hole. 
Thus they went on fully a quarter of a mile, when 
Sam, who rode a little to one side, uttered an ex- 
clamation. 

“What’s the matter?” asked several of the 
others. 

“ Ugh ! I just ran into a big spider web, and some 
spiders were in it ! ” answered the Boston youth, in 
disgust. 

“ Be careful that none of the spiders bite you,” 
returned Amos Strong. “ They may be poi- 
sonous.” 

“ I can hardly see,” said Frank. “ I wish we 
had a light.” 

“ It would not be wise to make a light,” an- 
swered the tutor. “ I hope to reach the edge of 
the forest before long.” 

But this was not to be, and presently they came 
to a spot where the growth of timber was extra 
heavy. Here it was almost impossible to advance 


268 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

on horseback, and they dismounted and gathered 
close together for a consultation. 

“ You had better remain here, while I go on and 
investigate,” said Amos Strong. “If you keep 
quiet, I am almost certain it will be impossible for 
those rascals to find you.” 

“Don’t you want somebody along?” asked 
Mark. 

“ Well, you may go if you wish. We will pro- 
ceed on foot, leaving our horses here.” 

“ Can’t we get something to eat? ” asked Frank. 
Riding always made him hungry. 

“Yes, Frank. But I would not advise you to 
light a fire, unless you can find a deep hollow, where 
the light cannojt be seen.” 

After Mark and the professor had departed, the 
others tethered their steeds, and then proceeded to 
make themselves as comfortable physically as their 
means afforded. Mentally all were nervous, not 
knowing at what moment their enemies might show 
themselves. 

“ That bandit, Anzenos, must know all about 
these woods,” said Jake. “ And as we are green, 
he has the advantage of us.” 

“Yes, but that shot the professor fired may keep 


PURSUED AND PURSUERS 269 

them at a distance,” returned Darry. They may 
think we are still at the edge of the forest, lying 
low for them, and ready to take a shot at 'em on 
sight.” 

“ I hope that is so,” said Frank. ‘‘ But I imagine 
that bandit is no coward — and what he has done 
in the past proves it. He is willing to take big 
chances to gain his ends.” 

After this talk the boys lapsed into silence, every 
ear on the alert for any sound that might indicate 
the approach of the enemy. They ate some crack- 
ers and dried beef, and washed the scanty meal 
down with water from a spring. 

“ Oh, for a good porterhouse steak and some 
green corn and potatoes! ” sighed Frank. 

‘‘And a piece of apple pie on the side! ” added 
Sam. 

“ And some doughnuts and cup-custard for me,” 
said Darry. 

“ Huh ! Fd be satisfied with plain corned beef and 
cabbage,” grunted Jake. “ Fm dog tired of this 
living out of a knapsack.” 

“ What a treat it will be to eat a good meal at 
home ! ” went on Frank, with something like a sigh. 

“If we ever get home,” was Jake’s comment. 


270 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

For all you know, none of us may ever see the 
United States again.’' 

“ Oh, don’t croak like that, Jake ! ” cried Darry. 

We’ll get out of this trouble, see if we don’t.” 

“ If so, it can’t come any too quick for me,” re- 
turned the lank youth, and then heaved a moun- 
tainous sigh. 

They all felt depressed, yet did their best to keep 
up their spirits. Though the stars were shining 
brightly, it was dark under the trees, so that they 
could see next to nothing. They kept quiet, and 
the only sounds that broke the stillness were the 
movements of the horses as they ate the leaves from 
the brushwood, and the call of the night birds. 
Once came something of an alarm, but it proved to 
be nothing more than the movements of several 
small animals through the brushwood. 

“ I wonder when the professor and Mark will 
be back,” ventured Darry, after an hour had gone 
by. 

“ There is no telling,” returned Frank. “ Maybe 
not till daylight.” 

All felt tired, yet sleep, just then, was out of the 
question. Every time a horse moved, or a bird 
cried out, all would sit up alert, and each had his 


PURSUED AND PURSUERS 27 1 

pistol where it could speedily be brought into use if 
needed. 

Almost another hour dragged by, and Jake and 
Frank were in a light doze through sheer weariness, 
when Darry and Sam heard a low whistle from a 
distance. It was the well-known signal, and Darry 
at once answered. Then, after an interval, he an- 
swered again, and presently Mark and the pro- 
fessor appeared from among the shadows. 

‘‘ The edge of the forest is but a short distance 
away,’' said Professor Strong, '' and we have lo- 
cated a fair trail, running in the direction we want 
to go. I do not think we can do better than move 
out to the trail while it is still dark, and place as 
much distance as possible between ourselves and 
our pursuers.” 

“ That suits me,” cried Jake, who had roused up. 
'' Maybe we can reach some village by morning.” 

“ Possibly, Jacob, although I doubt it. Settle- 
ments in this part of Argentina are few and far be- 
tween. But we may get to some estancia, where 
we can secure protection from our enemies until the 
authorities can be notified, and steps taken to get rid 
of the ruffians.” 

The tutor and Mark had made a note of the way 


272 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

they had come, and now they led the way through 
the thickets, the others following. All were on 
foot, for the branches of the trees hung so low that 
riding was out of the question. They had to cross 
another small stream, and here they stopped for a 
final drink, and to water their horses. 

When the edge of the forest was gained, Amos 
Strong called a halt, and he went out on the pam- 
pas to reconnoiter. 

'' So far as I can see, the coast is clear, with ab- 
solutely nobody in sight,’' he said. “ So the best 
thing we can do is to get in the saddle and ride as 
hard as we can until this spot is left out of sight. 
If we can thus fool those bandits, and the others, 
they may spend all night and to-morrow in these 
woods looking for us.” 

Once out of the forest, all mounted their steeds, 
and then, at the command of the professor, they 
swept out on the pampas in a bunch. By the bright 
starlight the trail to be followed was clearly 
discernible, and along this they galloped in pairs, 
the only sound being the dull thud of the horses’ 
hoofs. As they went on they looked back fre- 
quently, but none of the enemy came into view, nor 
did any alarm reach their ears. 


PURSUED AND PURSUERS 273 

** I reckon we fooled ’em nicely,” was Jake’s com- 
ment. Well, it serves the rascals right.” 

“ Do not be too sure that we have fooled them,” 
answered the professor. “ They may have wit- 
nessed our departure and thought best to pursue 
us in silence. Our best plan is to get ahead just as 
fast as we can.” 

After that, mile after mile was covered over the 
broad pampas, each rider urging his steed forward 
as best he could. But the horses were tired, and 
frequently dropped into a walk, and Frank’s animal 
even wanted to lie down. 

“ My horse can’t go much farther,” said the lad. 

‘‘ Whip him up ! ” cried Jake. “ It’s the only 
way.” 

“ No, he is too tired, Jake. It is nothing but 
cruelty to ply a whip.” 

“ You are right, Frank; I can see that the horse 
is utterly played out,” said Amos Strong. “ Well, 
I imagine all of them are tired. We’ll call a halt 
as sUon as we come to what looks like a good 
resting-place.” 

“ But I thought we were to go on until we reached 
some village, or ranch,” put in the lank youth. 

‘‘ We cannot do the impossible, Jacob. Your 


274 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

own horse looks ready to drop. We must save our 
horses, otherwise to escape our enemies will be im- 
possible.’’ 

The best part of another mile was covered, the 
steeds dropping into a slow walk, and then the party 
came to a spot in something of a hollow that had 
been used for a camp before, and which looked in- 
viting. Here they dismounted and tethered their 
horses, and then threw themselves on the ground to 
enjoy a much needed rest. 

It was decided that one of the party should re- 
main on guard, and Frank volunteered for this, as 
he saw that Mark and the professor were utterly 
fagged out. He remained awake two hours, and 
was then relieved by Sam, who, in turn, was relieved 
by Jake, and then Darry stood watch. 

Daylight came without their enemies showing 
themselves, and then a small fire was lighted, and 
they had a cooked breakfast, to which all did full 
justice. 

‘‘ Now, let us be on the way! ” cried Professor 
Strong. “ Our horses have had a fair rest, and 
ought to be able to carry us a good many miles.” 

The camping outfit was once more stowed away, 
and all prepared to leap into the saddle. Having 


PURSUED AND PURSUERS 275 

mounted, the tutor brought his field glasses into 
use, and swept the back trail with care. 

‘‘ I can see something in the distance,” he an- 
nounced. But whether horsemen or cattle I can- 
not tell.” 

Let me look,” exclaimed Mark. 

While he gazed through the glasses the distant 
object began to separate into a long line, each part 
of the object a rod or two away from that nearest 
to it. 

“ Those are not cattle ! ” cried Mark, for cattle 
never travel in that way. They must be horse- 
men.” 

“ That is just what they are! ” ejaculated Frank, 
after using the glasses. “ They must be our ene- 
mies, spreading out to find our trail ! ” 

Come on, then ! ” shouted Jake, in alarm. ‘‘ No 
use in staying here! Let us ride as fast as our 
horses can carry us ! ” And away he galloped, and 
the others came after him. 


CHAPTER XXVI 


THE CATTLE STAMPEDE 

Do you think they are gaining on us ? ” asked 
Frank, after about half a mile had been covered, 
and they were certain that their enemies were in 
pursuit. 

They may be gaining a little,’' answered Mark. 
“ But they are probably urging their horses to the 
limit.” 

That is just what I think,” put in Darry. 
“ More than likely they hunted for us all night, 
and if so, their horses must be mighty tired.” 

“ Those bandits may have better horses than 
ours,” interposed Jake. “ Most likely they are 
horses that have been stolen, and when such chaps 
steal, they steal the best.” 

On and on, and still on they went, the dull thuds 
of the horses’ hoofs being the only sound that 
broke the stillness. Far behind came their pur- 
suers, now no longer spread out in a line, but mov- 
276 


THE CATTLE STAMPEDE 


277 


ing forward in a bunch. Evidently they had dis- 
covered our friends, and were making every effort 
to overtake them. 

They must have had to leave one fellow be- 
hind,” remarked Darry, grimly. 

“ Who ? ” asked Jake. 

‘‘ The fellow who had his horse shot from under 
him — ^that is, unless they had an extra horse.” 

‘‘ Most likely they have a number of extra 
horses,” said Mark. “ In fact, I know they have, 
for I counted ’em when they were spread out.” 

“ What are we to do if they reajly do gain on 
us ? ” asked Sam. 

‘‘ That remains to be seen,” answered Professor 
Strong, gravely. “ I do not wish to have you run 
the risk of being shot down. Perhaps, after all, it 
will be best to surrender.” 

“ I’d rather pay those bandits something than be 
hurt,” said Jake. 

‘‘ Oh, let us ride just as hard as we can and see if 
we can’t get away ! ” cried Darry. The idea of be- 
ing “ held up ” and made to pay was exceedingly 
distasteful to him. 

“ I think I’d rather trust myself in the hands of 
the bandits than in the hands of Markel,” said 


278 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

Frank. “ You can wager he has it in for us, and 
he’ll make us suffer if he ever gets us in his 
clutches.” 

There was not much chance to say more, for 
each of the party was riding hard, and had to keep 
his eyes on his steed. They were coming to a bad 
part of the trail, where holes and soft spots 
abounded, and each was afraid his horse might sink 
down and perhaps break a leg — a. dire misfortune 
at such a time as this. 

Thus the chase kept up until noon. The clear 
sun now shone down hotly on the broad pampas, 
and riders and animals were commencing to grow 
thirsty. But not a sign of water was to be seen 
anywhere. 

“ We are sure to find water sooner or later,” said 
Amos Strong. “ These trails all lead to springs 
and rivers.” 

They looked back and were gratified to see that 
their pursuers were not so close as they had been 
an hour previous. 

Hurrah ! they are dropping back ! ” exclaimed 
Frank. Maybe they are going to give up the 
chase.” 

“ I don’t think they’ll do that just yet,” answered 


THE CATTLE STAMPEDE 279 

Darry. ‘‘ But we are certainly getting ahead of 
them.” 

‘‘ Don^t stop!” urged Sam. we keep on, 

perhaps we'll be able to ride out of their sight. 
There is a rise of ground ahead, and that will hide 
us from their view.” 

Nobody needed urging, and on they went as be- 
fore. It was very warm, for not a breath of air 
was stirring. All wondered how far it could be to 
the next drinking-place. 

The top of the rise ahead was nearly a mile away, 
but on the higher ground the trail was better, and 
thus they were able to make as good progress as 
before, even though going up hill. Jake was in 
the lead, with the others strung out behind him. The 
Pennsylvanian youth rode as if he did not wish to 
stop until safe in some village or at some ranch. 

The top of the hill was gained, and they were 
gratified to see at a distance ahead a small patch 
of timber. This must indicate water, and thither 
they headed their thirsty steeds. The horses evi- 
dently smelt the water, for they now advanced 
without urging. 

In among the trees they found a small but clear 
spring. The water was pure, and to the thirsty 


28 o chased across the pampas 

travelers tasted like nectar. All had a drink, and 
then the horses were given a little, but not enough 
to do them harm in their heated condition. 

“ I suppose we really ought to rest ” com- 

menced Darry, but at this Jake and Sam shook their 
heads, and so it was decided to go on without any- 
thing further being said. With something like a 
sigh they left the grateful shade and cooling spring 
behind, and once more rode out on the pampas, now 
seemingly hotter than ever. The trail was appar- 
ently well-traveled, so all had hopes that before 
long they would come in sight of some habitation 
or village. 

‘‘It’s queer we don’t meet some caravan or cat- 
tle,” observed Sam. “ I thought this country was 
full of them.” 

“ It is no different from our own land,” answered 
Professor Strong. “ In spite of the advances of 
civilization, there are great stretches in the West 
and Southwest still unsettled. But the railroads 
being built will soon change all this.” 

They were riding down into a broad valley where 
the pampas grass, always heavy and coarse, was 
thicker than ever, when they came to a small thicket, 
where many tall flowers and trailing vines grew. 


THE CATTLE STAMPEDE 28 1 

They had to pick their way around this, for fear of 
going down into some holes of which there were 
not a few in that vicinity. 

Suddenly Sam's steed reared up and almost threw 
the Boston boy. Then Frank’s horse gave a wild 
snort and turned back on the trail. 

‘‘What’s the matter?” cried Mark, and then he 
discovered the cause of the trouble. “ Snakes ! ” he 
yelled. 

“ Yes, and dozens of them ! ” cried Darry. “ Look 
out that your horses are not bitten. They may be 
poisonous ! ” 

It was true, the thicket was a regular hot-bed for 
snakes, and now the reptiles glided forth in all di- 
rections, hissing viciously and showing their fangs. 
They were brown and black, with patches of white 
near the head and tail — ugly-looking creatures that 
made all of the party shudder. 

The horses were as badly scared as their riders, 
and for the time being the professor and the boys 
had all they could do to keep in the saddle. Sam’s 
steed and that ridden by Jake were particularly agi- 
tated, and both lads came close to being thrown 
headlong among the reptiles. One snake wound it- 
self around a foreleg of the steed ridden by Jake, 


282 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

and horse and rider went nearly frantic until the 
reptile dropped back to the ground. 

“ No more snakes for me ! ” panted Jake, when 
the scare was at an end, and all had ridden to a safe 
distance. 

“Was anybody bitten?” asked the tutor, 
anxiously. 

“ Not that I know of,” answered Darry, with a 
look at the others. 

“ I was afraid we might run into a den of 
snakes,” went on Professor Strong. “ They are 
common down here, and play sad havoc sometimes 
with the cattle and horses. The gaiichos get used 
to them, and sometimes have what they call snake 
hunts, with prizes to the fellows who kill the most 
snakes. I once heard of a gaucho going out on 
such a hunt, and in three days killing nearly three 
hundred fair-sized snakes.” 

“ Phew ! that’s a snake story ! ” murmured Darry. 
“ But I am willing to believe it, after seeing such 
a den of snakes as that. Why, a fellow with a 
shotgun could kill a hundred there in less time than 
it takes to tell it.” 

“ The gauchos don’t use shotguns. They use 
what they call a snake lasso and the bolas. With 


THE CATTLE STAMPEDE 283 

such a lasso, or the bolas, they can strike and kill a 
snake from a considerable distance.’’ 

They made a wide detour around the snakes’ 
nest, and then continued on the trail, presently 
gaining the top of another rise. From this view- 
point they gazed back eagerly over the trail by 
which they had come, but could see no signs of their 
pursuers. 

‘‘ But they are chasing us, I am sure of it,” said 
Jake. ‘‘ Come ahead, until we reach some kind 
of a village, or ranch.” 

But the others wished to rest, if only for a short 
while, and so they dismounted and threw them- 
selves down in the tall grass. The lank youth was 
too nervous to even sit still, and so wandered 
around among the horses, and made use of the 
field glass the professor had loaned him. 

‘‘ I see something coming ! ” he cried, presently, 
and this announcement made all of the others spring 
up. “ It isn’t from behind us, it’s from in front,” 
Jake went on. 

And what is it ? ” questioned the others. 

‘‘ I can’t make out exactly, either horses or cattle. 
They are coming this way pretty swiftly, though.” 

One after another looked through the field 


284 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

glasses, and it was Darry who announced that the 
oncoming mass were cattle, and nothing else. 

They seem to be headed right for this spot,” 
he added, after another long look through the 
glasses. 

“ I hope some gauchos are driving them,” said 
Sam. If they are good fellows, they will tell us 
what to do, and aid us.” 

Closer and closer came the herd of cattle, until 
they could be plainly seen with the naked eye. They 
had stretched out until they formed a line reach- 
ing almost across the little valley below the rise 
of ground. They came forward with strange 
snortings, and with a wild tossing of countless 
heads. 

“ Say, I don’t like this ! ” cried Darry, uneasily, 
as the cattle came closer. 

“Why, what do you mean?” asked Frank, 
quickly. ^ 

“ I think those cattle are stampeding — running 
away ! ” 

“Oh, Darry, are you sure?” burst out Sam. 

“ It looks so to me.” 

“ I believe you are right,” said Amos Strong. 
“They would never run like that if they hadn’t 


THE CATTLE STAMPEDE 285 

been stampeded. Boys, we had better mount and 
ride out of harm’s way.” 

‘‘ Are we in any danger? ” asked Jake. 

'^Danger?” cried Darry. “Well, I just guess 
yes, Jake! Why, stampeding cattle have been 
known to run right over men and horses more than 
once! ” 

“ But can’t we chase ’em back? ” 

“ Not such a herd as that. Why, there must 
be thousands of ’em! No, the only thing we can 
do is to ride to the north or the south, out of their 
way.” 

By this time all were in the saddle once more. 
The horses had sighted the running cattle, and were 
now almost as nervous as when in the vicinity of 
the den of snakes. 

“ Watch your horses, or they may run away 
from you ! ” cried Professor Strong. “ And fol- 
low me ! ” ^ 

Leaving the trail, they swept along the rise of 
ground and then off to the northward. They thus 
hoped to get out of the path of the rushing cattle. 
From a distance came the thunder of countless 
feet, and a cloud of dust arose from the dry pam- 
pas and the still drier trail. 


286 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

All knew that they had some hard riding to do to 
escape, and each urged his steed forward at top- 
most speed. They were riding along the front line 
of the frightened cattle, but the end of the line was 
a considerable distance away. 

'‘See! see!’’ screamed Sam, a moment later. 
" They are swinging around ! ” 

The boy from Boston was right; slowly but 
surely the herd was heading in a new direction — 
directly for our friends! 

" Ride ! ride ! As hard as you can ! ” called out 
Professor Strong. " It is our one hope of 
escape ! ” 

Scarely had he spoken, when there came a call 
of dismay from Frank. 

“ My horse ! ” wailed the youth. “ He has gone 
lame ! ” 

All looked at the steed, and saw that what the 
New York lad said was true. The steed had some- 
thing in his left front foot, and was limping along 
painfully. 

Then all looked toward the cattle, and saw that 
the herd was coming forward as madly as ever. 
What should they do to save themselves? 


CHAPTER XXVII 


LOST ON THE PAMPAS 

Darry was close beside Frank, and in a trice 
he called to the latter to halt, and at the same time 
reined in his own steed and sprang to the ground. 

‘‘What are you going to do?” asked Professor 
Strong, as he, too, stopped short. The others con- 
tinued to go ahead. 

The Western youth did not answer. Instead, 
he ran up to Frank's animal and raised up the foot 
that had so suddenly gone lame. 

A short distance back the party had passed some 
thorn brush. All had avoided stepping on the 
thorns but Frank, who had gone straight through 
the bushes. Darry imagined that the horse had 
taken a big thorn with him, and in this surmise 
he was right. 

The thorn was deep in the flesh, and the Western 
youth had no easy task to extract it. But the ani- 
mal was patient enough to stand still, and soon the 
287 


288 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

thorn was out and Darry held it up before casting 
it away. 

'' There ! that is what caused the trouble ! ” cried 
the boy from Chicago. “ Now, go ahead, and see 
if you can catch the others ! And he again 
sprang into the saddle. 

The delay had been a short one, yet the stamped- 
ing cattle were now dangerously close. 

I’ll give them a shot or two ! ” cried Amos 
Strong. ‘‘ You boys may do the same ! ” 

He swung his rifle into position and aimed at 
one of the foremost of the oncoming beasts. The 
report of the weapon was followed by a bellow of 
pain, and down into the pampas grass rolled a big 
bull, shot in the neck. 

The rifle shot was followed by several shots from 
the boys’ pistols. A number of the cattle were hit, 
but none seriously. Yet the shots served to stay 
the rush for the moment, and thus our friends 
gained precious time. 

‘‘There is the end of the line!” cried Sam. 
“ Come on, we have only a hundred feet more to 
ride!” 

On they went. They could now hear the snort- 
ing and plunging of the cattle plainly, and they 


LOST ON THE PAMPAS 289 

were afraid that they might be surrounded at any 
instant. Once in the midst of that wildly- 
struggling mass, they knew that escape would be 
out of the question. 

Come on ! ” screamed Jake, and rode ahead, 
lashing his horse viciously — a useless thing to do, 
since the animal was already trying its best to get 
out of danger. But the lank youth was so full of 
terror he knew not what he was doing. 

A few seconds more, and the last of our friends 
passed beyond the range of the stampeding cattle. 
On thundered the great mass, herded close together, 
heads and horns bobbing wildly up and down, and 
feet digging deeply into the pampas grass. Some- 
times one of the mass would lose its footing and 
fall, and then it would speedily be trampled to 
death by those coming behind. 

The professor and the boys had been riding down 
hill. Now they went up a small rise, and from 
this point of view they watched the stampeding 
cattle as they continued to rush over the broad 
pampas. 

“ How long will they run? ” asked Frank, when 
he had somewhat regained his breath. 

‘‘ Until they are exhausted, or until something 


290 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

happens to stop them,” answered Professor Strong, 
with a sigh of relief. 

“ Say, that was a narrow escape ! ” murmured 
Mark. ‘‘No more stampeding cattle for me! ” 

“ I reckon I had the narrow escape,” said Frank. 
“ Darry, that was very kind of you — to stop and 
pull out that thorn,” he added, with a grate- 
ful look. 

“ Oh, it wasn’t much to do,” answered the West- 
ern lad, modestly. “ I knew that the horse couldn’t 
go on with such a thorn in his foot.” 

“ I wish the cattle would run into Markel and 
that bandit bunch,” came from Sam. “ It would 
serve ’em right to be surrounded and trampled 
under.” 

“ What a fate that would be! ” murmured Frank. 

“ No worse than they deserve,” came promptly 
from Jake. “ Maybe they will catch it — the cattle 
were headed that way.” 

They watched the cattle out of sight, and then 
turned and slowly continued on their way east- 
ward. They had lost the trail they had been pur- 
suing, but hoped, sooner or later, to pick it up 
again. 

But in this they were disappointed. They did 


LOST ON THE PAMPAS 


291 


not know that the trail curved to the southward, to 
several estancias, and to a number of villages, where 
they might readily have obtained aid against the 
bandits and their other enemies. Their riding took 
them to a lonely part of the great pampas, where 
there was not the slightest sign of a trail, or of a 
human habitation. 

“ Where are we going? ” asked Darry, when the 
sun was getting low and they had stopped, to rest 
and to get something to eat. They had come upon 
the carcass of one of the cattle, trodden to death by 
its followers, and had cut out some generous steaks, 
to cook or to take with them. 

I must confess I do not know,’" answered 
Amos Strong. “We have been riding by the 
compass, but it does not seem to land us any- 
where. I fancied we would gain some estancia 
long before this.” 

“ Then we are lost on the pampas ! ” cried Jake, 
in dismay. 

“ So it would seem, Jacob. But I am in hope 
that we will soon strike another trail.” 

Supper over, and the horses rested a bit, they 
pushed on, hoping to reach some spot where they 
could obtain water. All were so tired that they 


292 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

could scarcely sit upright, and the steeds moved 
onward at no better pace than a walk. 

Slowly the sun sank over the mountains in the far 
west, and one by one the stars came out in the 
clear sky overhead. It was silent all around them, 
and soon a lonely feeling commenced to creep over 
one boy after another. 

“ I must say, I don’t like this much,” whispered 
Frank to Mark. I wish we could hit a trail, or a 
ranch, or something.” 

I don’t like it myself,” was Mark’s answer. 
“It’s so lonely you can fairly feel it, can’t you?” 

“ The only consolation is the fact that those 
bandits will have a job locating us,” went on Frank. 
“ They’ll think we stuck to the trail.” 

“ Or else they’ll think we were killed by the 
stampeding cattle.” 

“We may as well come to a halt and go into 
camp for the night,” said Professor Strong, a 
short time later. “ Here is a little hollow, and 
in that we can build a fire and cook some of those 
nice steaks we brought along. The water may not 
be extra good, but we’ll make it do, although I 
advise you not to drink more than you actually 
need.” 


LOST ON THE PAMPAS 


293 


“ Let the horses try it first,” suggested Darry. 
“ Out West we always do that — if we are sus- 
picious of water. A horse won’t touch it if it isn’t 
fit to drink.” 

The horses drank the water in the hollow with 
eagerness, and, seeing this, the professor and the 
boys also drank some, and used a pot of it for mak- 
ing coffee. Then they broiled several juicy steaks, 
and from these and some crackers, and the coffee, 
made quite a fair meal. After that the fire was put 
out, so that its light could not guide their enemies 
to the camp. 

All were so worn out from their hard riding that 
each was glad enough to lie down and sleep. A 
guard was maintained, the professor and each of 
the youths doing duty as before. There was only 
one alarm, but this was caused by one of the horses 
breaking loose. The animal was soon caught and 
tethered more securely. 

In the morning the sun came up as clear as ever, 
flooding the rolling pampas with its golden glow. 
Some of the boys were already astir, and they 
cooked a hearty breakfast before they awakened the 
professor. 

'‘Well, I can’t see a thing,” announced Mark, 


294 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

after turning the field glasses in every direction 
along the horizon. “ It’s nothing but pampas and 
more pampas, as far as the glasses carry. We are 
out on a regular sea of waving grass, with the hills 
and hollows for billows ! ” 

“ Then we are lost on the pampas, and no mis- 
take ! ” murmured Sam. “ Professor, what are we 
to do?” 

“ There is but one thing to do, Samuel, and that 
is to go on until we strike a trail or an estancia, or 
meet some friendly gauchos, or other persons, to di- 
rect us. To remain here would be foolish. Our 
provisions will not last forever, and we may not 
be fortunate enough to pick up more meat.” 

“ Hadn’t we better carry some of this water with 
us ? ” suggested Darry. 

‘‘ Yes, we will fill our canteens, and also the kettle 
and the coffee pot, and you had better drink your 
fill, and give the horses their fill, too.” 

Breakfast over,- they did as the tutor suggested, 
and then set off once more, due eastward by the 
compass. They had a broad, flat stretch of the 
pampas to cover, and then followed a series of lit- 
tle hills and hollows, not unlike the long swells of 
the ocean. Some of the hollows had holes in them, 


LOST ON THE PAMPAS 295 

and here they had to travel with care, for fear of 
some mishap to their steeds. 

On every side was the coarse, waving grass, with 
here and there a small clump of bushes, many of 
them rich with flowers of various colors. In the 
bushes nested the pampas birds, and these would 
fly forth in wonder at the approach of the trav- 
elers. 

Talk about small game! ” cried Frank. “ If it 
comes to the pinch, we can live on birds ! ” 

“Yes, they would make a rare pot-pie!’' an- 
swered the professor, with a smile. 

It was shortly before noon when they topped a 
rise higher than any others in that vicinity. All 
were wondering what lay beyond. 

“ A house ! A house ! ” cried Darry, who was in 
advance. “ A house at last ! ” 

All came up to the top of the hill in haste, and 
looked in the direction he pointed out. They were 
rather disappointed to note that the building he had 
seen was but a small one of sticks and sods, stand- 
ing out by itself as though lost in the midst of the 
lonely pampas. 

“ It is a gauchos' hut,” explained Professor 
Strong. “ They use them to live in during the sea- 


296 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

son when they are rounding up and branding cat- 
tle. I doubt if you will find anybody there now, for 
the branding season is past.’^ 

‘‘It’s too bad!” muttered Jake. “If only one 
fellow was there he might tell us how to travel to 
get somewhere.” 

They soon reached the hut, to find it deserted, 
just as Amos Strong had surmised. The inside 
was practically bare, containing nothing but a bed 
of dried grass, and a stone crock, evidently for 
water. Outside the hut were the remains of a fire- 
place and a temporary corral. 

“ I see something of a trail I ” exclaimed Mark, 
who had gone beyond the hut. “ It leads to the 
southeastward.” 

All came forward and examined the marks 
through the grass with interest. 

“ It must be a trail leading to some estancia/^ 
said Professor Strong. “ Probably the ranch to 
which the gauchos who come here belong. And if 
that is true, the best thing we can do is to follow 
it.” 

They stopped at the hut for lunch and to rest 
the horses, and then pushed forward once more. 
Beyond the hut the pampas grew more level, and 


LOST ON THE PAMPAS 297 

soon they could see for many miles in all direc- 
tions. 

“ I don’t see any ranch ! ” sighed Sam, after 
riding for over an hour. “We are lost as much 
as we ever were ! ” 

“ Yes, Sam, but this trail must lead somewhere,” 
answered Mark. 

“ Maybe not. I’ve heard of trails losing them- 
selves out on the prairies. This may do the same 
thing.” 

The professor had his field glasses out, and was 
slowly sweeping the pampas in every direction. 
He could see nothing ahead, nor to the north and 
south. Then he turned to look behind them to 
where they had left the hut to follow the newly 
discovered trail. 

He could see the hut in the dim distance, and 
the hill from which they had discovered the shelter. 
As the glass swept the hilltop he drew a quick 
breath. Then he looked more closely, and pres- 
ently handed the glasses to Mark. 

“Tell me if you see anything on yonder hill,” 
he said, in a low voice. 

Mark took the glasses and gave a sharp look. 

“ Yes, I do ! ” he cried. “I see something 


298 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

moving — some men on horseback ! They are com- 
ing this way ! ” 

It must be the rascals who have been following 
us! exclaimed Jake. And all the others felt that 
what he said was true. 


CHAPTER XXVIII 


ESCAPING THE PAMPAS FIRE 

Do you think they have discovered us? ” ques- 
tioned Frank, after they were sure it was Anzenos 
and his band, as well as Markel and his crony, who 
were riding down from the little hill. 

It is more than likely,” answered the tutor. 

They must have discovered the trail we made 
through the deep grass.” 

‘‘ Yes, and they are headed right for us! ” cried 
Jake, who was now using the glasses. “ Come on, 
let us get out of here ! ” 

The others needed no urging, and forward they 
went as before, but now keeping to the imperfect 
trail they had discovered. It was exceedingly hot, 
the sun shining down from a sky that was without 
a cloud. 

“ If only we would reach another forest! ” sighed 
Sam, as mile after mile was covered. “ Fm about 
baked, and so sore I can hardly keep in the saddle.” 

299 


300 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

“ So am I,” added Frank. “ I am just so played 
out I almost feel like halting and fighting those 
chaps.” 

“ Don’t you do it ! ” cried Jake, in alarm. 
“ They outnumber us three to one, and they’ve got 
rifles and shotguns, and I don’t know what! We’d 
stand no chance at all against them ! ” 

I can see something, far off in that direction,” 
said Darry, pointing ahead with his hand. 
“ Whether it is some cattle, or buildings, or a 
woods, I can’t make out.” 

‘‘ Looks to me like a cloud coming up,” returned 
Mark, a minute later. “ It wouldn’t hurt if it did 
get cloudy, and I shouldn’t mind a shower.” 

They continued to ride on, the tired horses mov- 
ing slower and slower at every step. Looking back, 
they could make out their pursuers quite plainly, al- 
though they were still a long distance off. 

‘‘ Maybe we ought to give ’em a shot,” suggested 
Jake. 

“If we did that, they might do some shooting 
on their own account,” answered Amos Strong, 
grimly. “ No, we’ll try to outride them and trust 
to luck to reach some friendly ranchero's place, or 
some village.” 


ESCAPING THE PAMPAS FIRE 3OI 

The object that Darry had noted continued to 
grow larger, but they were still too far off to make 
out what it was. But that it was no estancia they 
felt quite sure. 

“ It’s either a forest or a low-hanging cloud,” 
said the professor. '' And I am rather of the 
opinion that it is a cloud.” 

“ So am I,” added Darry. “ And the reason it 
doesn’t grow larger is because the breeze is blow- 
ing from us instead of towards us.” 

“ And because that breeze is behind us we can’t 
feel it,” came from Mark. “ I wish the wind 
would turn, so we could feel it in our faces.” 

Soon they found themselves going up a slight 
rise, so gradual that it could hardly be noticed from 
a distance. Here the horses moved slower than 
ever, in spite of all their efforts to urge them for- 
ward. 

“ I think those fellows are gaining on us ! ” ex- 
claimed Frank, as he paused to look back. “ Don’t 
they seem closer to you, Mark ? ” 

“ They certainly do. But that can’t be helped, 
we are riding as hard as we can.” 

They won’t make such good time when they 
strike this rise,” put in Amos Strong, consolingly. 


302 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

Their horses cannot be any fresher than our 
own.” 

“ I am hoping that there will be some kind of a 
ranch on the other side of this long hill,” said 
Darry. “ See the cross trails here and there ? 
They show we are coming a bit closer to civiliza- 
tion.” 

“ You are right, Dartworth,” returned the tutor. 
“ Come, let us make the best of our chances.” 

They continued to mount the rise, which was 
steeper near the top than it had been below. The 
horses panted painfully, and every now and then 
one would lift his head and sniff the air. 

“Wonder if they smell water, or a stable?” 
mused Frank, as he noticed the steeds. 

“ Maybe they smell oats ! ” cried Darry. “ Hope 
they do! ” 

“ I think I smell smoke ! ” cried Jake, who, as 
usual, was in advance. 

“ Smoke ! ” cried the others, and drew in the air 
through their nostrils. 

“ I smell smoke myself ! ” said the tutor, sniffing 
the air keenly. 

“ Hurrah ! we must be near some camp, or 
ranch! ” burst out Frank. “ Hurry up and see! ” 


ESCAPING THE PAMPAS FIRE 303 

Side by side he and Jake climbed the rest of the 
rise, and the others came close behind. As they 
did this, Professor Strong looked back, to behold 
their enemies fast gaining on them. In the lead 
was Anzenos, and not far behind the bandit rode 
Dan Markel. 

The breeze had been shifting, and now, as the 
top of the rise was gained, it blew directly into 
the faces of our friends. It was a strong breeze, 
and every instant it was growing stronger. 

“Look! look!” fairly screamed Frank, and 
came to a sudden halt. 

“ IPs a fire ! ” bawled Jake. “ The pampas are 
on fire ! ” 

The others came up and looked, and saw that 
what the lank youth said was true. The broad 
pampas beyond the rise were on fire as far as the 
eye could reach. The smoke had been blowing 
away from them, but now, with the turning of the 
breeze, smoke and flames came rolling towards 
them with incredible swiftness. 

“Oh, what shall we do?” asked Jake. “If we 
stay here we’ll be burned up ! ” 

“We must turn and go back!” burst out Sam, 
“ It’s our only chance! ” 


304 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

“If we do that, we’ll ride right into the hands 
of those bandits!” groaned Frank. 

“ But that is better than being burned alive ! ” 

“ Those fellows will have their hands full sav- 
ing themselves,” argued Darry. “ They won’t 
think of us as soon as they see that fire.” 

All of the boys looked at Professor Strong, won- 
dering what he would advise. He had drawn out 
his field glasses again and was taking a hasty look 
towards the pampas fire, and to the north and the 
south. 

“ I see a patch of timber to the northward ! ” he 
cried. “ That may indicate the presence of water. 
And if not, we stand a better chance of escaping the 
flames in a dense forest than we do out here among 
this dry grass.” 

“ Yes, and the wind is blowing a bit to the south- 
westward ! ” added Darry. “ Let us make for the 
timber.” 

There was no time to argue the situation, and 
all followed the professor, as he left the top of the 
rise and turned in the direction of the forest he had 
discovered. 

The breeze continued to increase, and with it 
came the smoke and the smell of the burning pam- 


ESCAPING THE PAMPAS FIRE 3O5 

pas grass. These made the horses nervous and the 
riders had all they could do to control the steeds. 
Mark’s horse wanted to rush directly for the fire, 
and the tutor had to turn back and come to the lad’s 
assistance, to make the animal follow the others. 

As they moved on, the boys glanced back to the 
top of the rise, towards which the fire was swiftly 
leaping. Presently they saw one horseman show 
himself, followed by several others. Then the 
riders turned and disappeared as fast as they had 
come. 

‘‘ That’s a surprise for them ! ” muttered Darry. 
“ They’ll have warm work of it getting away from 
that fire ! They are closer to it now than we are.'^ 

“ Come on ! Don’t wait ! ” urged Amos Strong. 

The wind may shift in our direction any in- 
stant ! ” 

They continued to move toward the timber, 
which could now be seen through the drifting 
smoke. Swiftly the pampas fire was creeping 
toward the party. The air grew hot and scarcely 
fit to breathe. The horses snorted and plunged in 
fright, trying to unseat their riders, that they 
might run on alone. 

But all clung fast, realizing that to keep on riding 


3o6 chased across the pampas 

was the one chance of escape. A puff of air sent 
a thick cloud of smoke down on them, causing 
them to cough and splutter. The smoke made the 
tears run from their eyes. Then came another 
puff of wind, carrying with it some burning wisps 
of grass. 

‘‘ Ouch ! ’’ yelled Jake, and not without reason, 
for he had been burnt on the neck. Professor 
Strong and Frank were burnt on the hands, and 
Mark received some burning grass in his face, but 
quickly brushed it away. 

The timber was now less than a hundred yards 
away, and the pampas fire was about the same 
distance. Then came a rush of hot air and smoke 
that nearly blinded horses and riders. 

“ This way ! ” yelled Amos Strong, as loudly as 
he could. “ This way, quick ! ’’ 

He had seen a small opening leading to the 
depths of the forest, and into this they urged their 
horses, going forward in a bunch. They bumped 
into one another, and Darry and Mark got some 
bruises on the legs, but just then they paid no at- 
tention to the hurts. 

“Water! I see water!” burst presently from 
Frank’s lips. 


ESCAPING THE PAMPAS FIRE 307 

“ Huh ! it’s only a brook ! ” muttered Jake. 

That won’t save us from such a fire ! ” 

‘‘ It’s better than nothing,” retorted Frank. We 
can lie down in it, if we have to.” 

This brook may lead to a larger stream,” said 
Professor Strong, urging his horse forward. '' Let 
us follow it and see.” 

The horses wanted to stop for a drink, but this 
the riders would not allow, for every second was 
precious. They went splashing along the tiny 
watercourse, which widened out and grew deeper as 
they advanced. The smoke now hid the light of 
the sun and drifted through the timber, making the 
birds flutter about with shrill notes of alarm. But 
no fire reached the travelers, for which they were 
thankful. 

Presently, just as the tutor had hoped, they 
found the brook emptying into a much larger 
stream. Here they came to a halt, and allowed the 
horses to drink, while they bathed their faces and 
hands, and otherwise refreshed themselves. They 
were gratified to see that the wind was again shift- 
ing, blowing the smoke away from them. 

'' Do you — er — think we are safe ? ” stammered 
Jake, after Professor Strong had made a careful 


3o8 chased across the pampas 

inspection of their surroundings, and had looked 
at the sky. 

I hope so, Jacob. All we can do is to wait 
and see how matters turn out. So long as that fire 
is raging we cannot go on. We’ll stick to the 
water.” 

The horses were tethered at the river bank, and 
the travelers sat down to rest, and thus a dismal 
hour went by. They knew that the pampas fire 
was raging beyond the timber, and also knew that 
the wind might shift again and drive it towards 
them. 

“If it comes in here we’ll have to ford or swim 
the river,” said Professor Strong. “ Or maybe 
we’ll have to remain in the water until it burns it- 
self out.” 

Another hour passed, and still the fire did not 
come their way. The wind had now turned 
around and was blowing from the same direction 
it had in the morning. 

“ That will drive the fire back,” said Professor 
Strong. “ And it may burn itself out for the 
want of fuel. I trust it does.” 

“ Do you think Markel, Radell, and those bandits 
escaped ? ” questioned Darry. 


ESCAPING THE PAMPAS FIRE 309 

“ It is hard to say. The fire was rushing towards 
them very rapidly.” 

“ I hope it did reach them ! ” .came harshly from 
Jake. 

“ Oh, Jake, would you want them burned up?” 
cried Sam. 

‘‘ It’s no more than those rascals deserve,” mut- 
tered Jake. “ They had no business to follow us 
and try to make us prisoners.” 

It would be a dreadful fate for anybody,” mur- 
mured Mark. “ I’d not want a dog to suffer such a 
fate as that.” 


CHAPTER XXIX 


ON TO ROSARIO 

Towards sundown the breeze died down utterly, 
and it was very warm even by the river side. 
Leaving the others with the horses, Professor 
Strong and Mark went up the smaller watercourse, 
and then out to the edge of the timber. 

A desolate sight met their gaze. As far as eye 
could reach the ground was covered with the 
smoldering remains of the heavy pampas grass. 
Here and there could be seen the carcass of some 
animal, now a steer, then a wild horse, and again a 
rabbit or a pampas dog. 

“Do you think the fire has burned itself out?” 
asked Mark, after they had tramped around for 
half an hour. 

“ It has so far as this district is concerned,” an- 
swered the tutor. “ It was a terrible happening 
while it lasted,” he went on, with a shudder. “ If 
310 


ON TO ROSARIO 3II 

those stampeding cattle got into it, more than likely 
every animal was killed by the fire ! ” 

They walked over to where the partly-burned 
body of a big steer lay. The ground was still hot, 
so that it was far from comfortable to stand still. 
With his hunting-knife, Amos Strong cut from the 
carcass such meat as the party could use, and he 
and Mark carried it back to where they had left 
the others. 

It was a night never to be forgotten. All were 
completely exhausted, even the horses preferring to 
lie down rather than eat. The tutor and the boys 
rested fully an hour before preparing a meal, and 
after it was eaten they went to sleep, one at a time 
remaining on guard, as before. 

Mark was on the watch from midnight to two 
o'clock in the morning. To keep himself awake 
he tramped up and down the river bank many 
times. He had his pistol ready for use, also a 
stout stick, but he hardly anticipated an attack, 
feeling that the pampas fire had ended the plans of 
their enemies, at least for the time being. 

Presently, as Mark looked down the river, he 
thought he saw a dark object moving slowly in 
the water, close to one of the banks. 


312 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

Maybe it’s only a branch of a tree, or a block 
of wood,” he thought. 

He watched the object, and as it drew closer he 
made out the form of a man. The fellow was 
alone, and moved slowly along, in water up to his 
ankles. 

“ Halt ! ” cried the youth, and raised his pistol. 
Then he gave a call, to arouse his companions. 

“ Do not shoot, I beg of you ! ” cried the ap- 
proaching man, in Spanish. 

‘‘ Up with your hands ! ” ordered Mark, and as 
the man’s hands went into the air he added : “ Are 
you alone ? ” 

” Si, senor/' 

By this time Professor Strong and Darry wc 
awake, and each ran forward to join Mark, tf 
tutor carrying his rifle. But there was no nee 
for firearms, for the man who had come up was i 
no humor to fight. He was a gaucho, and hi 
clothing was burned full of holes, as was also h. 
hat. 

He is one of the Anzenos band ! ” cried Darry. 
“I remember him well. His name is Cellaboni. 
He is one of the chaps who made me a pris- 
oner.” 






It was not until morning that Cellaboni was able to tell 

HIS story.— 313 . 







* 




T'*- 

• 






I . « 




•S *1 

t ^ 


• V 




-<v 


- J-' -V 




» 



« « 


< 


V 

4 



. • A/.'' 


• 4 ^ 


r^* # _ » 

. ^ 

•’ ’ \': 



I * 


• t 


I 

4 


\ 





ON TO ROSARIO 


313 


For the love of Heaven, have mercy on me ! ” 
cried the gaucho, and, coming out of the river, sank 
on his knees in front of our friends. “ See how I 
am burned ! ” he went on, showing his bare arms 
and his breast. “ Have mercy on me and help me, 
or I shall die!” And then he sank on his side, 
clearly exhausted. 

The gaiicho made a truly pitiable spectacle, and 
the hearts of all the boys were touched, even Jake 
turning away to repress a shudder. The fellow 
had fainted from exhaustion, and from his awful 
burns, and they had to carry him into the tem- 
porary camp. There they covered the burns with 
cooling oil, and otherwise made the sufferer as 
comfortable as their means afforded. 

It was not until morning, after he had had some- 
thing to eat and to drink, that Cellaboni was able 
to tell his story, and even then what had happened 
was not altogether clear in his mind. He related 
how the whole band under Anzenos, urged by Mar- 
kel, Radell, and even Olano, had pursued the pro- 
fessor and the young explorers until, reaching the 
top of the hill, they had found themselves sud- 
denly confronted by that long and terrible line of 
fire. 


314 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

We did not dream the fire was so near/' said 
the gaucho, brokenly. “ And when the wind blew 
it directly down upon us, all of the party became 
panic-stricken. Anzenos tried to tell us what to 
do, but his horse became frightened and threw him 
to the ground, and then galloped away. Then, as 
the fire swept down on us, we scattered to the north 
and the south. I came in this direction, and so 
did two of the other gauchos, and Markel and 
Radell. We had to fight the fire every foot of the 
way, and when we at last reached the river, I was 
more dead than alive, and hardly knew what I was 
doing.” 

‘‘ And what became of the others who were with 
you ? ” asked Amos Strong. 

One of the gauchos was thrown into the deep 
water by his horse, and, as he could not swim, he 
was drowned. The other gaucho swam the river 
with Markel and Radell, and then went on, leav- 
ing me behind. I begged of the three to aid me, 
but they paid no attention to my cries. I suffered 
so from my burns that I was nearly insane, and I 
wandered along through the shallow water until I 
arrived here.” 

“ Then you think that Markel, Radell, and that 


ON TO ROSARIO 315 

Other gaucho escaped?” asked Mark, with deep 
interest. 

Si, senor. But they did not deserve it, for 
they deserted me,” answered Cellaboni. 

“ You said Anzenos fell from his horse,” went 
on Amos Strong. ‘‘ Did he get away? ” 

‘‘ No, as he went down his horse stepped on him. 
Then one of the other horses grew frantic and 
rushed over him, and that was the last I saw of 
him. He must be dead,” added the gaucho. And 
this surmise, later on, proved to be correct. It may 
be added here that in that terrible pampas fire four 
of the bandits lost their lives and several others 
were, like Cellaboni, severely burned. 

The suffering gaucho knew the country well, and 
he told the travelers that they were not far from 
the estancia of one Cecil Morriwell, a rich English- 
man, of whom Professor Strong had heard. They 
were southeast of Cordoba, and less than a hun- 
dred miles from Rosario. 

“ Let us go on to the Englishman’s ranch and 
then on to Rosario ! ” cried Jake. 

“ How far is it from Rosario to Buenos Aires ? ” 
asked Frank. 

About two hundred and thirty miles, down the 


3i6 chased across the pampas 

Parana River/’ answered Professor Strong. “ We 
can get one of the regular steamers if we are will- 
ing to wait a day or two,” he added. 

It was decided to move on in the direction of 
the Morriwell estancia that afternoon. They 
hardly knew what to do with the gaucho, but he 
begged them not to leave him behind. 

“ I would rather go to prison than be left here 
alone,” he said. 

“ We might take turns carrying him,” said Mark. 
“ It’s the only way.” 

The bandit was a plucky fellow, and although his 
burns hurt him exceedingly, he did not utter a 
single protest when he was taken up and placed on 
one of the horses. He was allowed to ride alone, 
the other taking turns in riding together. 

The journey to the Morriwell estancia took them 
all of the afternoon and part of the evening. Sev- 
eral gauchos came out to meet them, and later on 
Mr. Morriwell, a burly Englishman, who had lo- 
cated in Argentina six years previously, showed 
himself and made them welcome. 

I was afraid that fire would swing in this di- 
rection,” he said. “ But luckily the wind carried 
it the other way, so I suffered but little.” 


ON TO ROSARIO 


317 


Professor Strong and the boys were taken into 
the ranch home, a long, low, one-story affair, while 
the suffering bandit was taken to the gauchos' 
quarters. It may be said that Cellaboni remained 
at the estancia, and when he got well he reformed 
completely and was hired by the ranch owner to 
work with the other cowboys. 

The Englishman listened with interest to what 
our friends had to tell regarding the bandits and 
their other enemies. He said that Anzenos had 
caused him much trouble, and if the bandit was 
dead it would be a good thing for the community 
at large. 

Nearly a week was spent at the estancia, and 
during that time the boys witnessed a good deal 
of South American ranch life. They saw the 
gauchos round up some cattle and put them in the 
saladero and the corral, and also witnessed some 
fancy riding. Darry showed what he could do on 
horseback, and the native cowboys applauded his 
efforts vigorously. 

It had been decided that they should start for 
Rosario on Monday morning, and preparations 
were made accordingly. Mr. Morriwell was send- 
ing a pack train to the city, and they accompanied 


3i8 chased across the pampas 

this as far as the village of Agobonia. Then they 
headed direct for Rosario, arriving at that city 
later in the week. 

“Well, this is like living again!” cried Mark, 
when seated in a room in the leading hotel. 

“ My, what a number of adventures we have had 
since we started from home!” was Frank’s com- 
ment. 

“ I’d like to know just one thing,” said Darry, 
“ and that is what became of Markel and Radell.” 

“ I reckon we’d all like to know that,” returned 
Jake. “ But more than likely we’ll never hear of 
them again.” 

By inquiring at the shipping office, they learned 
that they could get accommodations on a steamer 
going to Buenos Aires on the following Saturday. 
This would give them a full day in which to see the 
sights in Rosario. 

“ Rosario is a city of about a hundred thousand 
inhabitants,” said Professor Strong. “ It is a rail- 
road terminus, and also the center of trade for a 
great deal of river shipping. We can spend some 
time looking at the shipping, and then take a drive 
around the other points of interest.” 

The view at the long docks interested the boys. 


ON TO ROSARIO 


319 


and they spent several hours in watching the great 
ships loading and unloading. Some boats were 
leaving off and taking on passengers, and they 
watched the people of various nationalities as they 
came and went. 

“ It certainly is quite a cosmopolitan place,” was 
Mark’s comment, after he had snapped pictures un- 
til he had used up his films. 

One big steamer was just leaving with a fresh 
load of freight and passengers, and they looked 
over the crowd on the deck. As they did this, 
Frank gave a start. 

Look ! look ! ” he cried. 

'‘What do you see?” queried several of the 
others. 

" Those two men on the rear deck ! Don’t they 
look familiar to you? ” 

" Markel and Radell ! ” cried Darry. " Well, 
what do you think of that! ” 

It was indeed the two men from Baltimore, and 
as Darry pointed excitedly with his finger, Markel 
saw him, and also caught sight of the others. He 
spoke to Radell, and the two sharpers got up and 
disappeared in the crowd. 

" Well, that proves they escaped from the pam- 


320 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

pas fire/’ said Sam, as the steamer disappeared ow 
its way down the river. 

‘‘Yes, and I guess they have escaped from us, 
too,” added Jake, bitterly. 

“ Was Olano with them? ” asked Frank. 

“ I didn’t see him,” answered Darry. “ What 
shall we do about it?” he continued, turning to 
Professor Strong. 

“ I don’t know that we can do anything,” was the 
reply. “ Now that they know we saw them, those 
rascals will try to keep out of sight. They may 
even leave the steamer at the first stopping-place.” 


CHAPTER XXX 


AT BUENOS AIRES HOMEWARD BOUND 

“ Our trip is almost at an end/’ said Frank, 
when, on Saturday, they boarded the river steamer 
that was to take them from Rosario to Buenos 
Aires. 

“ Hardly,” answered Sam, since we have still 
the trip from Buenos Aires to New York, a distance 
of nearly six thousand miles.” 

“ Well, once we are on the steamer homeward 
bound, we’ll have nothing to do but take it easy,” 
said Mark. “ And I must confess I’d like nothing 
better than to loaf awhile.” 

“ And loaf without worrying,” added Jake. “ No 
more pampas fires for me ! ” 

“ And no more earthquakes,” said Darry, with a 
grin. 

And no more adventures with savage animals,” 
added Sam. 

What yarns we will be able to tell when we get 
321 


322 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

back to school ! ” cried Mark. ‘‘ The other fellows 
won’t believe half of ’em ! ” 

The trip down the broad Parana and the still 
broader La Plata was full of delight to the young 
explorers, and as they sat on deck they talked 
over their many adventures. They passed various 
towns and made several stops, and all too soon the 
voyage came to an end, and they found themselves 
in Buenos Aires and quartered at a hotel which 
was as elegant in appearance and appointments as 
any they had stopped at in New York. 

‘‘What a magnificent city!” was Sam’s com- 
ment, as he viewed the broad and well-kept streets, 
and the great office buildings and fine mansions. 

“ Buenos Aires has often been called the Paris 
of South America,” said Professor Strong. “ It 
covers seventy -two square miles of territory, and 
has about nine hundred thousand inhabitants — ^be- 
ing the largest city in the Southern Hemisphere. 
As you can see, it has all the up-to-date improve- 
ments, trolley cars, electric lights, telephones, and 
is the terminus of the great transcontinental rail- 
way system. It is located on the bank of the La 
Plata, and the Atlantic Ocean is really over a hun- 
dred miles farther east.” 


AT BUENOS AIRES HOMEWARD BOUND 323 

“ It must do a tremendous shipping business,” 
said Mark. 

“ I understand that the annual tonnage is about 
half that of New York, and four times that of 
San Francisco. Steamers sail from here to almost 
every civilized port on the globe, and, as you have 
already seen, sailing vessels without number can 
harbor here.” 

From Rosario Professor Strong had telegraphed 
for accommodations not only at the hotel, but also 
for staterooms on a steamer that was to leave for 
New York on the following Thursday. This would 
give the young explorers ample time in which to 
view the various sights of the Argentine capital. 

On the following day the boys packed their 
things for the journey to New York, and then vis- 
ited the great university, the art gallery, and the 
military school. Another day was spent in the 
great stores of the capital, buying the last of the 
souvenirs to take home. 

To make certain that their steamer accommoda- 
tions were what they wanted for such a long jour- 
ney, the whole party visited the ticket office of the 
transportation company. Here they had to wait a 
considerable time, as business was brisk, and the 


324 


CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 


boys improved the time by looking over some pic- 
tures of vessels and illustrated folders of various 
excursions. 

Frank had just laid down a folder when he saw 
three men come in and walk up to the desk. The 
men were Dan Markel, Paul Radell, and Roberto 
Olano. 

“ Look ! ” he whispered, as he clutched Mark by 
the arm. 

'' Keep back, out of sight,” was the quick return. 
‘‘ We must capture those rascals this time! ” 

Both boys signaled to the others and to Pro- 
fessor Strong. The tutor looked around, and see- 
ing a policeman standing on the pavement outside 
the office, beckoned to him. 

“Do you see those three men?” he said, in 
Spanish. 

“ Yes,” was the officer’s answer. 

“ I want them arrested. I and these young men 
will make a complaint against them. They are 
wanted on serious charges, so do not let any of 
them get away.” 

“ You wish the whole three arrested? ” asked the 
policeman, in astonishment. 

“ Yes.” 


AT BUEiNOS AIRES HOMEWARD BOUND 325 

“ I cannot arrest them alone. I shall have to call 
assistance.^’ 

“ Very well; but do not delay. We’ll watch the 
men,” answered the professor. 

Markel and Radell had come to see about tickets 
to a point up the coast, and Professor Strong called 
one of the clerks aside and asked that the sharpers 
be detained as long as possible. This was done, 
much to their disgust. 

These South Americans are the slowest people 
on earth,” growled Dan Markel. “ They’ll make 
you wait every time.” 

Well, we are in no particular hurry,” answered 
Paul Radell. 

The policeman had sent in a hurry call for as- 
sistance, and soon four other officers appeared. 
Then the policeman came up to Professor Strong 
again. 

“You are quite sure about these gentlemen?” 
he asked. 

“ Yes, arrest them at once,” was the firm an- 
swer. 

When confronted by the officers of the law, Mar- 
kel, Radell, and Olano were dumfounded, and did 
not know what to say. 


326 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

“ I — I think you have — er — ^made a mistake/^ 
murmured Markel, in Spanish. 

“ This gentleman makes a charge against you,” 
replied one of the officers, and pointed to Professor 
Strong. 

The man from Baltimore turned swiftly. When 
he saw the professor he turned red, and then, as 
he beheld the boys, he went pale and gave a gasp. 

‘‘You!” he murmured. 

“ That crowd ! ” exclaimed Paul Radell. “ How 
did they get here so soon ! ” 

“I — I think I will leave!” faltered Roberto 
Olano, and turned to run away. But a policeman 
held him fast and handcuffed him. 

“ I suppose this game is up ! ” muttered Dan 
Markel, as he, too, was handcuffed. 

“ It is, Markel,” answered Professor Strong, 
grimly. “ I am going to see to it that you are 
placed where you belong, in prison.” 

“ You’ll have a lot of trouble doing it,” answered 
the man from Baltimore. “ And it will take time, 
too.” 

“ Never mind,” put in Mark. “ It will be worth 
all the time it takes.” 

“ That’s the talk ! ” cried Jake. “ I’d spend six 


AT BUENOS AIRES HOMEWARD BOUND 327 

months in Buenos Aires just to put those rascals 
where they belong ! ” 

A little later the three prisoners were taken to 
the police station, and there Professor Strong made 
a formal charge against them, and the boys told 
their stories to the officer in charge. Then the 
three offenders were committed to await further 
action. 

The immediate trip home had to be abandoned, 
and the young explorers remained in Buenos Aires 
some time, until the charges against the prisoners 
were proven at their trial. All three were found 
guilty, and they were sent to prison for long terms 
of years. 

‘‘ Well, that's the last of Markel, Radell & Com- 
pany! " cried Frank, when the proceedings were at 
an end. “ And I am mighty glad of it ! " 

“ And so am 1 1 " added Jake. And the others 
said the same. 

And now let me add a few words more and then 
bring this story of exploring and sightseeing in Ar- 
gentina and elsewhere to a close. 

On a clear, warm day the professor and the 
young explorers embarked on a steamer bound for 


328 CHASED ACROSS THE PAMPAS 

New York City. All were in the best of health, 
and even Jake was in high spirits. His former 
sourness was gone, and he acted like quite a dif- 
ferent boy. 

Well, good-by to South America ! cried 
Darry, as the big steamer cast off and moved away 
from the dock. 

'' What thousands and thousands of miles we 
have covered since we left home! ” added Sam. 

“ And how much we have seen! ” said Frank. 

“ And what perils we encountered ! ” supple- 
mented Mark. 

But it was a trip worth taking,” broke in Jake. 
“ I wouldn’t have missed it for a good deal ! ” 

“ Even if we didn’t stay in the big cities all the 
time; eh, Jacob?” said the professor, dryly. 

Yes, sir, I am glad, now, that you took us up 
the Orinoco and up the Amazon and over the 
Andes. And I’m glad we went through Central 
America and through those islands.” 

“ Well, there is one thing certain, boys,” said 
the tutor. “You know a great deal more about 
Central and South America than when you 
started.” 

“ And I’ve got a dandy lot of pictures ! ” cried 


AT BUENOS AIRES HOMEWARD BOUND 329 

Mark. “ Hundred and hundreds of them ! I am 
going to make a regular book of them when I get 
home — and each of you shall have copies,” he 
added. 

And Tve got some good photos, too,” said 
Frank. 

And I’ve got my specimens,” broke in Sam. 

“ And I’ve got those skins of wild animals,” re- 
turned Darry. 

“ Well, I didn’t make any collection,” said Jake, 
gravely. But I learned one thing, and that’s a 
good deal. I learned how to control my temper.” 

‘‘ It is a great deal,” said Professor Strong. 

Slowly the great steamer left the harbor of 
Buenos Aires, and then turned her bow towards the 
heaving and sparkling Atlantic. The boys and the 
professor gathered on the afterdeck and watched 
the great city fade from view. Then they went 
forward, to greet the first view of the rolling 
ocean. 

“ And now for home! ” cried Mark. 

“Ho for home!” cried all of the others. And 
here we will leave the young explorers and say 
good-by. 


THE END 



- SOLDIERS OF FORTUNE SERIES 

By EDWARD STRATEMBYER 


VOLUME ONE 

ON TO PEKIN 

Or Old Glory in China. 

Cloth 330 pages Illustrated by A. B. Shute $1.25 

T he hero, Gilbert Pennington, goes from the Philippines with the 
Ninth Regiment to take part in the rescue of the beleaguered Brit- 
ish Embassy at Pekin by the international forces. Mr. Stratemeyer has 
risen to the occasion by giving, in addition to one of his very best stories, 
a store of information concerning China and the Chinese, conveyed in a 
natural and entertaining manner. 

The demands of boy readers are peculiar, and the author who can sat- 
isfy them, not once or twice, but uniformly, must p>ossess rare ability in 
an extremely diflScult field. Such an author is Edward Stratemeyer. — 
Sunday News, Newark, N y, 

VOLUME TWO 

UNDER THE MIKADOS FLAG 

Or Young Soldiers of Fortune 

320 pages Cloth Illustrated by A. B. 5hute Price $1.25 

T TNDER the Mikado’s Flag” relates the adventures of two young 
Americans in Korea and Manchuria during the outbreak of the 
great war between Russia and Japan, one of the leading characters being 
Gilbert Pennington, the hero of **On to Pekin,” and the other, Ben 
Russell, who with his brothers, Larry and Walter, is so well known to the 
thousands of readers of the famous “Old Glory Series.” It closes with 
the great Battle of Liao-Yang, and is as valuable for the information 
conveyed as it is interesting as a story. 

Mr. Stratemeyer is undoubtedly improving very greatly on the average 
book for boys. — Slar, Sf. Louis, Mo. 

He knows how to attract and hold boy readers.— Standard, 
Skw Bodfird, Masu 


SOLDIERS. OF FORTUNE SERIES 

By EDWARD STRATEMEYER 


VOLUME THREE 

AT THE FALL OF FORT ARTHUR 
Or A Young American in the Japanese Navy 

300 pages Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25 

T his story relates, primarily, the adventures of Larry Russell, 
who is on board his old ship, the Colu^nbia^ which is carry- 
ing a cargo for the Japanese government. The young sailor joins 
the Japanese navy, and under Admiral Togo assists at the bombard- 
ment of Port Arthur. Life in the Japanese navy is described in 
detail, and also life in Port Arthur during the siege and bombard- 
ment, which has few parallels in history. 

** At the Fall of Port Arthur” is very well told. — Chronicle ^ San Prancitco* 

A rattlioj; good story for boys. — Republican^ Denver^ CoL 

VOLUME FOUR. 

VNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN 

Or Three Young Americans on Land and Sea 

310 pages Illustrated by A. B. Shute 12mo Cloth, 1.25 

T he ^ Soldiers of Fortune Series ” is a continuation of the famous 
Old Glory Series,” and enjoys equal popularity. The prin- 
cipal characters are Ben and Larry Russell, Gilbert Pennington, 
and the fine old gunner, Luke Striker, all of whom are w'ell known 
to thousands of readers. The climax of the book naturally deals 
with the battle of the Sea of Japan and Admiral Togo’s wonderful 
victory, in which Larry and Luke Striker bear an honorable part. 
The fortunes of Ben and Gilbert Pennington on land also furnish 
much that is of interest. 

The youth who finds a good story of war adventure on the sea to Us liking will gain 
his heart’s desire in “ Under Togo for Japan.” — Philadelphia Press. 

Young readers will find the volume entertaining from first to last. — News, Haiti* 
more, Md. 

Will undoubtedly prove a favorite with the boys. — Advertiser, Newark, N.y. 

No more popular lxx)k for boy» could be ima^ned just at this time. — Christian En- 
deavor World. 


X92 


TSe bey»’ delight— >the •• Old Glory Seriei.**— The Christian Advocate^ N.T, 

THE OLD GLORY SERIES 

BY EDWARD STRATEMEYER 


FIRST VOLUME 

UNDER DEWEY AT MANILA 

Or The War Fortunes of a. Castaway 

Cloth Illustrated by A. B. 5hute Price $1.25 

T his book, published in September, 1898, at once sprang to the front 
as the greatest success among books for boys since the famous Army 
and Navy series by “ Oliver Optic,” and its popularity has steadily in- 
creased as the succeeding volumes of the series have appeared. 

Edward Stratemeyer weaves the incidents of the naval conflict at Manila into a 
narrative of experiences and adventure which is wholesome in spirit and full of 
excitement, and which the boys will like. — Congregationalist. 

SECOND VOLUME 

A YOUNG VOLUNTEER IN CUBA 

Or Fighting for the Single Star 

Cloth Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25 

T he career of Larry Russell, as recorded in “Under Dewey at 
Manila,” was the hit of the season among juveniles. The fortunes 
of Larry are equalled in interest by the adventures of Ben, his older 
brother, and his friend, Gilbert Pennington, and the many exciting scenes 
through which they passed during their service in the army. Ben enlisted 
in a New York volunteer regiment, while Gilbert joined Colonel Roosevelt’s 
famous Rough Riders. Their life in camp, the capture of El Caney, the 
charge at San Juan hill, are all vividly described. 

Mr. Stratemeyer's boys are clean, manly fellows, and deserve the popularity 
which doubtless awaits them. — Christian Register, 

THIRD VOLUME 

FIGHTING IN CUBAN WATERS 

Or Under Schley on the Brooklyn ** 

Cloth Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25 

r l this book Walter Russell, brother to Larry and Ben, the respective 
heroes of the two preceding volumes of the series, finds his way to 
Boston, secures employment, enlists in the navy, and is assigned to the 
“ Brooklyn.” Then follow intensely interesting chapters, telling of Com- 
modore Schley, the routine life of the “ Jackies,” and blockade and dis- 
covery of Cervera’s fleet, followed by the memorable conflict of July 3. 

•* Fighting in Cuban Waters ” is in the same hearty, manly spirit that has made 
tlM other volumes of the Old Glory Series so much liked. — journal of Education, 


OLD GLORY SERIES 

By EDWARD 5TRATEMEYER 


FOURTH VOLUME 

UNDER OTIS m THE PHILIPPINES 

Of A Young Officer in the TrojAcs 

Cloth Illustrated by A. B. 5hute Price $1.25 

T he “ Young Officer in the Tropics ** is none other than our old friend 
Ben Russell, who upon reenlisting for service in the Philippines is 
given the same position, that of second lieutenant, to which he had been 
promoted for gallantry while “ A Young Volunteer in Cuba.** 

Mr. Stratemeyer is in a class by himself when It comes to writing aboat Aioeti 
can heroes, their brilliant doings on land and sea. Times, Boston, 

FIFTH VOLUME 

THE CAMPAIGN OF THE JUNGLE 

Or Under Lawton through Luzon 

Cloth Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25 

B en and Larry figure in the “ Campaign of the Jungle,** which has a 
truthful and graphic historical setting in two expeditions of the noble 
General Lawton, whose portrait adorns the cover, the first being that di- 
rected against Santa Cruz on the Laguna de Bay, and the second from 
Manila to San Isidro, through one hundred and fifty miles of jungle. The 
same sterling qualities that have made these brothers so well liked carry 
them through perilous scenes with true American fortitude. 

A good war story, — San Francisco Bulletin* 

SIXTH VOLUME 

UNDER MACARTHUR IN LUZON 

Or Last Battles in the PhilipjAnes 

12mo Cloth llustrated by A. B. Shute Medallion cover 
320 passes $1.25 

W E have here a thoroughly up-to-date, clean, and entertaining boys* 
story, complete in itself, but forming the sixth and last volume of 
the “ Old Glory ** Series. The boys in all parts of the country have been 
anxiously waiting to learn the final fortunes of the three Russell brothers, 
Larry, Walter, and Ben, with scarcely less interest in Gilbert Pennington, 
hero of ‘‘On to Pekin,** and not forgetting other old friends on land and 
sea. All are here, doing their duty in the same straightforward way as 
ever; and the final battles in the Philippines are followed with that accu- 
racy of statement which Mr. Stratemeyer always employs, thereby giving 
general value to his books without in the least impairing the interest of the 
storv. 

Maintains the high standard in attractlva narratioa whleh was set bf Um flsst 
voiame. Tbs ate books malMi s somplsls aod vaitiabls collscUs*^ — Jfsw the* 


MEXICAN WAR SERIES 

By EDWARD STRATEMEYER 


VOLUME ONE 

FOR THE LIBERTY OF TEXAS 

12ino Cloth Illustrated Price, $1.25 


M uch is toW here of Sam Houston, Davy 
Crockett, Colonel Bowie, and other Texan 
heroes in connection with the entertaining story 
of the fortunes of two brothers, Dan and Ralph 
Radbury. The fall of the Alamo is introduced, 
and other famous incidents. 

VOLUME TWO 

WITH TAYLOR ON THE 

RIO GRANDE 

12ino Cloth Illustrated Price, $1.25 



A S with each of the series, this is a complete story, but continues the 
adventures of the patriotic young Radbury brothers. They serve 
under General Taylor at Palo Alto, Monterey, and Buena Vista and share 
in the glory of “Old Rough and Ready.” 


VOLUME THREE 


UNDER SCOTT IN MEXICO 

12ino Cloth Illustrated Price, $1.25 

I N the concluding volume of this valuable historical series Dan and 
Ralph come under the command of Gen. Winfield Scott and finally 
bear their part in the triumphant entry of the proud city of Mexico. 


These books were first issued under a pen name and by another 
publisher. We have now placed them in the regular list of this unequaled 
writer for boys, with an entirely new cover design in keeping with the 
uniformly rich appearance of our Stratemeyer books. 


“There are few live boys in tne country who have not read the intensely 
interesting books of Mr. Stratemeyer, and who do not have a warm place in their 
hearts for nim. No living- American writer of boys* books is so widely read, and 
none so sure of a cordial welcome for everything that comes from his pen,’*— 
Chicago News. 


DAVE PORTER SERIES 

By EDWARD STRATEMEYER 
12mo Cloth Illustrated $1.25 per volume 


Mr. Stratemeyer has seldom introduced a more 
popular hero than Dave Porter. He is a typical boy, 
manly, brave, always ready for a good time if it can be 
obtained in an honorable way, — Wisconsin, Milwaukee, 
Wis. 

“ Edward Stratemeyer’s ‘Dave Porter* has become 
exceedingly popular ,” — Boston Globe. 

“Dave and his friends are nice, manly chaps.** — 
Times -Democrat, New Orleans. 

DAVE PORTER AT OAK HALL 

Or the Schooldays of an American Boy 

DAVE PORTER IN THE SOUTH SEAS 

Or The Strange Cruise of the Stormy Petrel 

DAVE PORTER’S RETURN TO SCHOOL 

Or Winning the Medal of Honor 
DAVE PORTER IN THE FAR NORTH 

Or The Pluck of an American Schoolboy 

DAVE PORTER AND HIS CLASSMATES 

Or For the Honor of Oak Hall 
DAVE PORTER AT STAR RANCH 

Or The Cowboy’s Secret 
DAVE PORTER AND HIS RIVALS 

Or the Chums and Foes of Oak Hall 



LOTHROP, LEE & SHEPARD CO., Publishers, Boston 


THE LAKEPORT SERIES 

By EDWARD STRATEMEYER 
12mo Cloth Illustrated $1.25 per volume 


“ The author of the Lakeport Series, Mr. Edward 
Stratemeyer, is well known for his delightful boys’ 
stories .” — Philadelphia Ledger. 

“ The Lakeport Series, by Edward Stratemeyer, is 
the lineal descendant of the better class of boys’ books 
of a generation ago.” — Christian Advocate^ New 
York. 

‘‘ The Lakeport Series will be fully as popular as 
the author’s Dave Porter Series.” — San Francisco 
Call. 


THE GUN CLUB BOYS OF LAKEPORT 

Or The Island Camp 

THE BASEBALL BOYS OF LAKEPORT 

Or The Winning Run 

THE BOAT CLUB BOYS OF LAKEPORT 

Or The Water Champions 

THE FOOTBALL BOYS OF LAKEPORT 

Or More Goals Than One 

THE AUTOMOBILE BOYS OF LAKEPORT 
Or A Run for Fun and Fame 



LOTHROP, LEE & SHEPARD CO., Publishers, Boston 


COLONIAL SERIES 

By EDWARD STRATEMEYER 
FIRST VOLUME 

WTTH WASHINGTON IN THE WEST 
Or a Soldier Boy s Battles in the Wilderness 

Illustrated by A. B. Shute 302 pages $1.25 

M r. STRATEMEYER has woven into an excellent story something 
of Washington’s youthful experience as a surveyor, leading on 
to the always thrilling Braddock’s defeat. The hero, David Morris, 
is several years younger than Washington, with whom he becomes 
intimately associated. Pictures of pioneer life are given ; scenes with 
friendly Indians ; and old-time games. 

SECOND VOLUME 

MARCHING ON NIAGARA 

Or The Soldier ‘Soys of the Old Frontier 

Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25 

T^HE story relates the doings of two young soldiers who join the 
* Colonial forces in a march on Fort Niagara, during the time of 
the war with France, when the whole territory between the Blue 
Ridge and the Great Lakes was in a state of unrest. Many side lights 
are thrown into the colonial homes, and much useful information is 
given of the pioneers who helped to make our country what it is to-day. 

David Morris is a fine fellow, and about him is woven a fine “Injun” story that 
to sure to delight the boys . — Universalist Leader ^ Boston. 

THIRD VOLUME 

eAT THE FALL OF MONTREAL 

Or a Soldier Soy's Final Victory 

Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25 

^HIS volume relates the adventures of Dave Morris and his cousin 
A Henry during the two last campaigns against the French for the 
possession of Canada and the territory below the great lakes. The scal- 
ing of the heights of Quebec under General Wolfe, and the memorable 
battle on the Plains of Abraham, are given in detail. There are many 
stirring scenes of battle, and there are also adventures while fishing and 
hunting, and with the Indians. 

The chief charm of Mr. Stratemeyer’s stories lies in the fact that an enormous 
quantity of valuable information, collected from the most reliable sources, is 
deftly woven into the narrative without taking away from the interest.*^ 
Philadelphia Inquiretr, 


CX)LONIAL SERIES 

By EDWARD STRATEflEYER 


FOURTH VOLUME 

ON THE TRAIL OF PONTIAC 

Or Pioneer Boys of the Ohio 

Illustrated by A. B. 5hute Price $1.25 

‘THIS volume tells of times in our country immediately after the war 

* with France for the possession of Canada. A fight with the Indians 
and the French in a snowstorm is especially realistic, and the entire book 
carries with it the atmosphere of colonial times. 

Boys are attracted to stories by Edward Stratemeyer, and they will enjoy “On 
the Trail of Pontiac.” — Plain Dealer ^ Cleveland ^ O, 

VOLUME FIVE 

THE FORT IN THE WILDERNESS 

Or The Soldier Boys of the Indian Traits 

306 pages Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25 

THIS story is one of the best tales of Colonial days penned by this 

* favorite author for young people. A central figure is the noted 
Indian warrior, Pontiac, and the particulars are given of the rise and fall 
of that awful conspiracy against the whites, which will nev^r be forgotten, 
and vivid pen pictures are given of fights in and around the forts and at a 
trading-post on the Ohio. 


VOLUME SIX 

TRAIL AND TRADING POST 

Or The Young Hunters of the Ohio 

320 pages Illustrated Price $1.25 

A FINE closing volume to this deservingly popular series. Here we 
again meet the Morris boys, and many other friends. The plot 
centres about the possession of a certain trading-post on the Ohio River at 
a time just previous to the Revolution, and there are some encounters 
with tbe unfriendly Indians and with some Frenchmen who wished to 
claim the post as their own. 

Thera are few authors whose books have so wide and so thoroughly satisfactory 
< reading as those by Mr. Stratemeyer.— Boston 


American Boys’ Biographical Series 

By EDWARD STRATEMEYER 


VOLUME ONE 

AMERICAN BOYS 

LIFE OF WILLIAM McKINLEY 

300 pages Illustrated by A. B. Shute and from Photo- 
graphs $1.25 

H ere is toW the whole story of McKinley’s boyhood days, his life 
at school and at college, his work as a school teacher, his glorious 
career in the army, his struggles to obtain a footing as a lawyer, 
his ciForts as a Congressman and a Governor, and lastly his prosperous 
career as our President, all told in a style particularly adapted to boys and 
young men. The book is full of interesting anecdotes, all taken from 
life, showing fully the sincere, honest, painstaking efforts of a life cut all 
too short. The volume will prove an inspiration to all boys and young 
men, and should be in every library. 

For nearly a year Mr. Stratemeyer has been gathering material and 
giving careful study to the life of the young William, his childhood, his 
boyhood, and all his inspiring and romantic history. The story was near* 
ing its end when the awhil finale came and tragedy ended the drama of 
President McKinl^’s life . — New York Jouri^, 

VOLUME TVO 

AMERICAN BOYSr LIFE OF 

THEODORE ROOSEVELT 

300 pages i2mo Illustrated from Photographs $1.25 

T his excellent work for young 
people covers the whole life of 
our strenuous executive, as school- 
boy, college student, traveler, author, 
hunter and ranchman, as assembly- 
man, as civil service commissioner, 
as Assistant Secretary of the Navy, 
as a daring rough rider, as Governor 
of New York, and lastly as President. 
Full of stories taken from real life 
and told in a manner to interest both 
young and old. 

We unreservedly recommend Mr. Stratc- 
OBeyer’t books for boys. They are wholesome, accurate as to historical 
details, and always interestiag.--^haim TYmms. 





4 





< « 


V V 


' w '■'V 







» • 





t- 


» , V 


• ^ 



« « 



1 r 


\ 


*», \ 


«# I. 


/ •■ v; >;. • C'''' «;■'■ ■'' *''';> 




« ♦ 


i ,,i.tL 

I 




‘ '"’■ .’■,-n^-vt-^*^ .* 

■*^ '- ♦^^'.■;’a. v ' -.» 

/ ‘ ’ I i •, 

I I < 


s \ 


/ 


f 


► v 


« *: 


M • 


\ •' 


' • *. ‘ - ’ I i •, 

<’♦ ■ ' ' ' t 

»..:• I . .A V*’ '■* 

■ ‘'f '■ 




''■K -, ,i^ .. f |i 

<r- .» . * ■ 


• • 



V 




^ 


1 


,r»^ * • 


I'’-.:!.;. 


•*; 


♦ I 



V ' 


/ 




« '■. 


, ’ •< 


M 


s • 


I If 


> * 


.*» 


. • 

. 7 / 


1 ^ 


' ■ ‘ V>y- ^■ ^ 



• , t- 


.»■ <*i ■» 



V/*‘V. 







\ • 


;i ' 




. ' ♦ 


■ri' 


*■ '. «. 


S'# 


m 





* . ♦ . ■ .j, » ^ 

- v 'V/ 

V ■ t«'/.v<aV 


J « 





, * 







f- > 


< • V 



■ ’'Vfl 15K, 


* 






>* 



v* 

■ *'>*:' 


/ v'i 

* 


r*' 

^ > * 

•/ 



• ( 






i \ 





X 


* r' 




t » 


*4 




•,v ^ 

• .r ' •■ 


. / 


t • « 


^ • r • ■ 


. .A - . r. 

>¥ • ' ■ 


L > i 


• ' 




iKb^ 


•■a/j.' " * -,' 

■'. .*--U:p . ■■ ■■. ; 



.’i'l 




u 




V 


f 


/ J 


• t 


■t - 


•i. 




' i 


M 






• f 


V.. 




• ^ 


{ I 




»• 









-« 4 •/ '•' 












< 

* O 

* o 


<> '<r. a'* ,0' 'c> 4 

-Or © ® " ® -» 

0 ♦ - o 


b S'='’ * 

>* jP-n#. 

0^ V ©’*®-> ^ rk'r ., 

• C.*^ '^rk 

* <t? ^ 




,V ana ’^. 

0^ • 

o‘ 

• . -.-« ’* ^ _ _ %_‘^-’ V 








, -t 


y' - 



t • o 


A. 


^ 1^ ^ A 


V V 







■ ’ \ 0° °o 

• A o. : 



o 


o<«o’ 


0 % 







O • A 


O f* 9 


c *" ^ O 


* «'i'’ '. 

• ^ ,0^ '^o » 



• • 



Oa^it^^k® Pa 

CT 19e^V 


UfiffilV^ 

Sept— O 

^JV€'rf Qtfk»y Bt 





° / ‘ 





